JP2021104439A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine in which a player can play easily.SOLUTION: A touch operation on a display surface by a player is detected by display means. An operation is allowed by energization means, for energizing to a first position for maintaining at a prescribed interval, the display surface of the display means and a cover body covering visibly the display surface and depressible and operable by a player, and for moving to a second position where the display surface of the display means and the cover body are brought close by subjecting the cover body to depressing operation. A touch operation by the player is determined to be effective by determination mean by movement of the cover body to the second position.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

Conventionally, there has been known a pachinko machine that draws a lottery when a game ball is won at the starting port and displays a variable effect or a big hit effect according to the lottery result on a liquid crystal screen. In such a production, various patterns of production such as a production to give the player a sense of expectation and a production to increase the player's motivation to participate in the game are executed to improve the interest of the game. .. Among these types of pachinko machines, a gaming machine is proposed in which the gaming machine is provided with an operating means (switch, etc.) that can be operated by the player, and the player operates the operating means to change the production of the game. Has been done.

In such a pachinko machine, for example, in order to execute various effects when the player operates the operating means, there is a machine that executes a lottery that changes the effect of the game when the operating means is operated.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-075741

In this type of pachinko machine, there is a problem that the player becomes absorbed in operating the operating means and misses the displayed effect, which makes the game difficult.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that is easy for a player to play.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 has a display means capable of detecting that the player has touched the display surface, and the display surface of the display means is visually covered and pressed by the player. The cover body that can be operated, and the display surface of the display means and the cover body are always urged to a first position maintained at a predetermined interval, and the cover body is pressed. Then, the urging means that allows the display surface of the display means and the cover body to move to a second position close to each other, and the cover body moves to the second position, so that the player can perform a touch operation. It has a determination means for determining that is valid.

The gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the second position is configured at a position where the cover body and the display surface of the display means come into contact with each other, and the cover body is the display. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the gaming machine is configured to be electrically conductive when it comes into contact with the display surface of the means.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 1, it is detected by the display means that the player touches the display surface. Always, the display surface of the display means and the display surface of the display means are visibly covered, and the cover body that can be pressed by the player is urged to the first position maintained at a predetermined interval. By pressing the cover body, the urging means allows the display surface of the display means to move to a second position where the cover body approaches. When the cover body moves to the second position, the player's touch operation is determined to be effective by the determination means.

As a result, even if the cover body is accidentally touched, the touch operation is not effective unless the cover body is in the second position, so that malfunction can be suppressed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can play the game more easily.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 2, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine according to claim 1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the position where the cover body and the display surface of the display means come into contact with each other is set to the second position. The cover body is configured to be electrically conductive when it comes into contact with the display surface of the display means. Therefore, even if the touch operation is performed through the cover body, there is an effect that the touch operation can be accurately recognized.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen, and (b) is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen. (A) to (b) are diagrams showing an example of the display mode of the SW effect displayed on the third symbol display device. (A) to (b) are diagrams showing an example of the display mode of the SW effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the second embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the outline of various counters. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM of the MPU of the main control device, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the first hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type in the special symbol. (B) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the first hit random number counter C1 and the hit in the special symbol, and (d) is the second hit random number counter C4 and ordinary. It is a schematic diagram which shows the correspondence relationship with the hit in the symbol typically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which showed the special symbol variation start processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol variation processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the thru gate passing process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interrupt process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process which is executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which showed the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the variation display setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring / effect processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the lottery probability setting process executed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the pachinko machine in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the lottery probability setting process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the lottery probability setting process 3 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the modification of 2nd Embodiment. (A) to (b) are diagrams showing an example of the display mode of the SW effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the third embodiment. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM of the MPU of the main control unit in the third embodiment, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM of the MPU of the main control unit in the third embodiment. FIG. 3C is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the display lottery table according to the third embodiment. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the comment selection table in the third embodiment, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the indicator setting data in the third embodiment. (A) to (b) are diagrams schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern selection table in the third embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the variation pattern selection process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 3 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the mission setting process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 3rd Embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing an example of an opening display mode displayed on the third symbol display device in the jackpot game in the fourth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the opening display mode displayed in the jackpot game in the fourth embodiment, and (b) is the third symbol in the jackpot game in the fourth embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example of the round display mode displayed on a display device. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM of the MPU of the main control device in the fourth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the opening display mode selection table in the fourth embodiment. It is a figure shown. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process 3 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the opening process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 4 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the customer waiting effect processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the process during the demo screen display executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 4th Embodiment. (A) is a timing chart showing the transition of the background mode in the fifth embodiment, and (b) is a timing chart showing the transition of the background mode in the modified example of the fifth embodiment. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM of the MPU of the main control device in the fifth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM of the MPU of the main control device in the fifth embodiment. FIG. 3C is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the background change lottery table in the fifth embodiment. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing a command determination process 4 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device according to the fifth embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 5 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the background change process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 5th Embodiment. It is a figure which showed the timing chart when the SW effect in 6th Embodiment is executed. (A) to (b) are diagrams showing the display mode of the SW effect displayed by the third symbol display device in the sixth embodiment. (A) to (b) are diagrams showing the display mode of the SW effect displayed by the third symbol display device in the sixth embodiment. (A) to (b) are diagrams showing the display mode of the SW effect displayed by the third symbol display device in the sixth embodiment. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM of the MPU of the main control unit in the sixth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM of the MPU of the main control unit in the sixth embodiment. FIG. 3C is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the maximum value selection table in the fifth embodiment. 6 is a flowchart showing a command determination process 5 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device according to the sixth embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the winning command reception process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 6 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 6th Embodiment. (A) to (b) are diagrams showing the display mode of the SW effect displayed by the third symbol display device in the seventh embodiment. (A) to (b) are diagrams showing the display mode of the SW effect displayed by the third symbol display device in the seventh embodiment. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM of the MPU of the main control device in the seventh embodiment, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the comment selection table in the seventh embodiment. It is a figure. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing a command determination process 6 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing a frame button input monitoring / effect processing 7 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device according to the seventh embodiment. (A) to (c) are diagrams showing the display mode of the SW effect displayed by the third symbol display device in the eighth embodiment. (A) to (b) are diagrams showing the display mode of the SW effect displayed by the third symbol display device in the eighth embodiment, and (c) is a setting prohibiting the SW effect in the eighth embodiment. It is a timing chart when doing. It is a figure which showed typically the contents of the RAM of the MPU of the main control device in 8th Embodiment. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing a command determination process 7 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device according to the eighth embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the opening process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the round processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 8 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 8th Embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the opening display mode of the jackpot game displayed by the third symbol display device in the modified example of the eighth embodiment, and (b) is the SW effect in the eighth embodiment. It is a timing chart in the case of, and (c) is a timing chart in the case of no SW in the eighth embodiment. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the ninth embodiment. It is a four-view view of the rotating body switch in the ninth embodiment. It is an exploded perspective view of the rotating body switch in 9th Embodiment. It is sectional drawing of the rotating body switch in 9th Embodiment. (A) is an example of a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device in the ninth embodiment, and (b) is an example of a display mode displayed on the rotating body switch in the ninth embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the pachinko machine in 9th Embodiment. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM of the voice lamp control device according to the ninth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM of the voice lamp control device according to the ninth embodiment. It is a figure shown. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 9th Embodiment. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing a command determination process 8 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device according to the ninth embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the sphere display scenario setting process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 9th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the sphere display processing executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 9th Embodiment. 9 is a flowchart showing a frame button input monitoring / effect processing 7 executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device according to a ninth embodiment. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing a rotation operation determination process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device according to the ninth embodiment. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the tenth embodiment. It is an enlarged view of the liquid crystal type switch in 10th Embodiment. (A) is a cross-sectional view before the liquid crystal type switch in the tenth embodiment is pressed, and (b) is a cross-sectional view when the liquid crystal type switch in the tenth embodiment is pressed. (A) to (b) are examples of display modes displayed on the touch panel according to the tenth embodiment. (A) to (b) are examples of display modes displayed on the touch panel according to the tenth embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the pachinko machine in tenth embodiment. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM of the voice lamp control device according to the tenth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM of the voice lamp control device according to the tenth embodiment. It is a figure shown. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in tenth embodiment. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing a command determination process 9 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device according to the tenth embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the SW liquid crystal display setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in tenth embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the SW liquid crystal display processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in tenth embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 8 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 10th Embodiment.

Hereinafter, the first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. It is provided with an inner frame 12 that is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) in order to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning openings 63, 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back surface side. A ball game is performed by a ball flowing down the front surface of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 includes a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 6) that launches a ball into the front region of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front region of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) etc. are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. Metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, and the front frame with the side on which the hinge 19 is provided as an opening / closing axis. The 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface. The lock of the inner frame 12 and the lock of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is formed by assembling decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open so as to project forward, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a by the inclination. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is used by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed by the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) described later, or changing the effect content of the super reach. Be manipulated.

On the other hand, the third symbol display device 81 is configured so that when the normal reach effect is started and the normal reach is developed into the super reach, the selection screen of the effect mode of the super reach is displayed during the normal reach. If the frame button 22 is operated by the player while the selection screen is displayed, the effect content at the time of super reach is changed.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change and control the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect during the game. Illuminations 29 to 33 having a light emitting means such as an LED are provided on the peripheral edge of the window 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination unit 29 to 33 lights up by lighting or blinking the built-in LED at the time of jackpot or reach production. Or, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is built in, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying when the prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs is provided.

Further, on the lower side of the illuminated portion 32 on the right side, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back surface side so that the back surface side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a sticking space K1 on the front surface of the game board 13 (FIG. The certificate stamp or the like attached to (see 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more glitter, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin having chrome plating is attached to a region around the illuminated portions 29 to 33.

A ball lending operation unit 40 is arranged below the window unit 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which balance information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the balance is displayed as numerical value as balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine, does not require a ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 is not required. A decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the above to make the component configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines and cash machines that use card units.

In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface in the central portion thereof. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive the ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is arranged, and driving of the ball launching unit 112a is permitted inside the operation handle 51. Touch sensor 51a for this purpose, push button type stop switch 51b that stops firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and variable resistor that detects the amount of rotation operation of the operation handle 51 by the change of electrical resistance. (Not shown) and is built-in. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the operation amount, depending on the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. The ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes, and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball pulling lever 52 for operating the ball stored in the lower plate 50 when the ball stored in the lower plate 50 is discharged downward is provided in the lower portion of the front surface of the lower plate 50. The ball pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened, and the bottom opening is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as "Senryobako") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. An operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and an ashtray 53 is attached to the left side of the lower plate 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in front view, a large number of nails and windmills for ball guidance, rails 61, 62, a general winning opening 63, and a first. The ball entry port 64, the variable winning device 65, the variable display device unit 80, and the like are assembled and configured, and the peripheral edge portion thereof is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in the through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are wood screws from the front side of the game board 13. It is fixed by etc. Further, the front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back so that the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by a ball. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a substantially circular area (a winning opening or the like is arranged and the launched ball is arranged) formed on the front surface of the game board 13 by being divided by two rails 61 and 62 and an arc member 70. The area where it flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 6) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage. Will be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a predetermined momentum hits the return rubber 69 and has momentum. Is dampened and bounced back toward the center. Further, a resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side is used as a base between the lower right tip of the inner rail 61 and the upper right tip of the outer rail 62. It is fixed by driving it into the plate 60.

In the pachinko machine 10, a special symbol (first symbol) is drawn when the ball enters the first entrance 64, and when the ball passes through the second entrance 67, a normal symbol (first symbol) is drawn. 2 symbols) will be drawn. In the special symbol lottery performed for entering the first ball entrance 64, whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is determined, and if it is determined to be a special symbol jackpot, the jackpot type is determined. Is also determined. When the jackpot of the special symbol is reached, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special gaming state, and the special winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed, or until 10 balls are won. ) It is released, and the opening is repeated 5 times (5 rounds). As a result, a large number of balls are won in the specific winning opening 65a, so that a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than in the normal case. There are two types of special symbols, "Big hit A" and "Big hit B". After the end of the special game state, as added value after the end of the big hit, the game according to these big hit types Value (game value) is given to the player.

Further, when the special symbol (first symbol) is drawn, the variable display of the special symbol is started on the first symbol display device 37, and after a predetermined time (for example, 11 seconds to 60 seconds) has elapsed, the special symbol is displayed. A special symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. If a ball enters the first entry port 64 while the variable display is being performed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of entry is suspended up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed on the first symbol. It is shown by the device 37 and also shown by the third symbol display device 81. When the variation display is completed in the first symbol display device 37, if the number of reserved balls for the first entry port 64 remains, the next special symbol lottery is performed and the variation display according to the lottery is performed. Is started. The special winning opening 65a, which is opened and closed when the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special gaming state, is provided immediately below the first entry opening 64. Therefore, during the special gaming state, the player hits a ball in an attempt to win a prize in the special winning opening 65a, so that many balls also enter the first entry opening 64. Therefore, in most cases, the number of reserved balls for the first entry port 64 becomes the maximum (4 times) while the pachinko machine 10 is in the special gaming state.

On the other hand, in the lottery of the normal symbol performed for the passage of the ball at the second entrance 67, the winning or not judgment of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is performed. When it hits a normal symbol, the electric accessory attached to the first entry port 64 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second), and the ball can easily enter the first entry port 64. Become in a state. That is, when the ball hits the normal symbol, the ball easily enters the first entry port 64, and as a result, the lottery of the special symbol is easily performed.

Further, when the lottery of the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed, the variable display of the normal symbol is started on the second symbol display device 83, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds, 30 seconds, etc.) has elapsed, the normal symbol is displayed. The normal symbol showing the lottery result is stopped and displayed. If a ball passes through the second entrance 67 while the variable display is being performed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of passes is suspended up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is the number of the reserved balls 37. It is also indicated by the second symbol holding lamp 84. When the variation display is completed in the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls for the second entry port 67 remains, the next normal symbol lottery is performed and the variation display according to the lottery is performed. Is started.

As described above, there are two types of special symbols, "big hit A" and "big hit B".

In both cases of "big hit A" and "big hit B", the number of rounds is 16 rounds in a special gaming state (16R big hit), and if it is "big hit A", the big hit ends as an added value after the big hit ends. From later until the next special symbol hits the jackpot, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the high probability state of the special symbol (during the probability change of the special symbol). Further, in "Big hit B", the winning probability of the normal symbol increases from the end of the big hit to the end of the lottery of the special symbol 100 times.

Here, the "high probability state of the special symbol" means a state in which the jackpot probability of the special symbol is increased, that is, the probability state of the so-called special symbol (during the probability change of the special symbol), in other words, the special game state (16R jackpot). ) Is a state of the game that is easy to shift to. On the other hand, the case where it is not the "high probability state of the special symbol" is called the "low probability state of the special symbol", which means that the jackpot probability is lower than the probability variation state of the special symbol, that is, the jackpot probability of the special symbol is normal. Indicates a state (normal state of a special symbol). Further, the "normal symbol time-saving state" (normal symbol time-saving medium) refers to a game state in which the probability of hitting the normal symbol is increased and the ball can easily enter the first entry port 64. On the other hand, the time when it is not "the time saving state of the normal symbol" is called "the normal state of the normal symbol", which indicates that the hit probability of the normal symbol is the normal state, that is, the state where the hit probability is lower than that during the time saving. ..

Hereinafter, the period during which the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot of the special symbol is referred to as the probability variation state (probability variation period) of the special symbol. In addition, the period from the end of the jackpot of the special symbol to the period when the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol, that is, from the end of the jackpot B to the end of the lottery of the special symbol a predetermined number of times (100 times). , Ordinary design is called a short-time period.

As described above, in the jackpot of the special symbol in the present embodiment, the number of rounds at the time of the jackpot and the probability variation period of the special symbol are common regardless of the type of jackpot, and the "time reduction of the normal symbol" is made according to the type of the jackpot. The period of "state" is changed. On the other hand, the number of rounds may be changed according to the type of jackpot, or the number of rounds may be changed only for a part of the type of jackpot. In addition, for example, instead of changing the period during which the "normal symbol time is shortened" depending on the type of jackpot, the time for opening the electric accessory (not shown) attached to the first entry port 64, or once. The number of times the electric accessory is opened may be changed by hitting the normal symbol of. Further, in the present embodiment, after the jackpot ends, the "special symbol high probability state" and the "normal symbol time saving state" are set, but after the "special symbol high probability state" ends, the "normal symbol time saving state" is reached. May be configured to be.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot type is "big hit B", the time saving state of the normal symbol is continued from the end of the "big hit B" until the lottery of the special symbol is completed 100 times, but the time saving state is continued. The period may be set arbitrarily.

If a new special symbol jackpot A is reached while the "special symbol high-probability state" is continuing, the "special symbol high-probability state" will be further special after the end of the new special symbol jackpot. It will continue until the big hit of the design.

A first symbol provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter, abbreviated as "LED") 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light emitting means, on the upper right side of the game area when viewed from the front (upper right side in FIG. 2). A display device 37 is arranged. The first symbol display device 37 displays according to each control performed by the main control device 110, which will be described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a display or fluctuate by indicating whether or not a lottery of special symbols performed in association with entering the first ball opening 64 (starting winning) is being executed by the lighting state. As a stop symbol after the end, a special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol is shown by the lighting state, or the fluctuation of the balls entered in the first entry port 64 is not executed. The number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls), is indicated by the lighting state.

If a ball enters the first entry port 64 while the special symbol (first symbol) is variablely displayed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of entry is suspended up to four times. The number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the ball entering the first ball entry port 64 is configured to be held up to 4 times, but the maximum number of times of holding is not limited to 4 times and is 3 times or less. , Or it may be set to 5 times or more (for example, 8 times).

The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds during the jackpot and an error. The LED 37a is configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of each LED are different, and depending on the combination of the emission colors, various gaming states (high probability state of a special symbol) of the pachinko machine 10 are used with a small number of LEDs. Or, it is possible to display (such as during the time reduction of ordinary symbols). Further, the LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, and if it is a jackpot, the jackpot type (big hit A, jackpot B, jackpot C). A special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to the above is shown.

Further, in the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are arranged in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win a prize. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter, simply abbreviated as “display device”) and a second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs. .. In the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 performs decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when a ball enters the first ball entry port 64 (starting prize), the first symbol display device 37 executes a variable display of a special symbol (first symbol) with that as a trigger. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large liquid crystal display having an size of 8 inches, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 described later, for example, three symbols of left, middle, and right are used. The column is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the game state displayed by the control of the main control device 110 is displayed by the first symbol display device 37, whereas the third symbol display device 81 displays the first symbol display device 37. A decorative display is made accordingly. In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a drawing for explaining a display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 4A is a diagram schematically showing an area division setting and an effective line setting of the display screen. FIG. 4B is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

The third symbol is composed of 10 types of main symbols with numbers from "0" to "9". Each main symbol is composed of a rear symbol consisting of a wooden box with numbers from "0" to "9", of which the main symbols with odd numbers (1,3,5,7,9) are , A large number is added to almost the front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main symbols with even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) have attached symbols that imitate characters such as furoshiki and helmets, which are almost full on the front of the wooden box. Even numbers are added to the lower right side of the attached symbol so that they are small in green and displayed on the front side of the attached symbol.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 6) described later is a big hit, a variable display in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed. , The jackpot is configured to occur after the fluctuation display is finished. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, a variable display is performed in which the same main symbol is not aligned.

For example, if the lottery result of the special symbol is "big hit B", the variable display is performed in which the main symbols to which the even numbers "0, 2, 4, 6, 8" are added are aligned. Further, in the case of "big hit A", a variable display is performed in which the main symbols to which the odd numbers "1,3,5,7,9" are added are aligned. Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, combinations of predetermined main symbols indicating small hits (for example, on the effective line L1, the combinations of the main symbols are "3" and "4" in order from the left symbol row Z1. "1") is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 4A, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into upper and lower halves, and the lower two-thirds are the main display area Dm for variable display of the third symbol, and the rest. The upper 1/3 of is a sub-display area Ds for displaying the advance notice effect, the character, the number of reserved balls, and the like.

The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 on the left, middle, and right, and three symbol columns Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-mentioned third symbols are displayed in a specified order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in the ascending or descending order of the numbers in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the variable display is performed by scrolling from top to bottom with periodicity for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. In particular, in the left symbol row Z1, the numbers of the main symbols appear in descending order, and in the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3, the numbers of the main symbols appear in ascending order.

Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbol is displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three rows for each symbol row Z1 to Z3. The middle part of this main display area Dm is set as the effective line L1, and the third symbol stops on the effective line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1 → the right symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2 in each game. Is displayed. When the third symbol is stopped, if the combination of jackpot symbols (in the present embodiment, the same combination of main symbols) is aligned on the effective line L1, the jackpot moving image is displayed as a jackpot.

On the other hand, the sub-display area Ds is provided horizontally above the main display area Dm, and is further divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. Of these, the small area Ds1 is an area for displaying the number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls) whose fluctuation has not been executed among the balls entered in the first entry port 64, and is the small area Ds2. And Ds3 are areas for displaying the advance notice effect image.

On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 4B, a total of nine main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub-display area Ds, the moving image is displayed in the small area Ds3 on the right, suggesting to the player that the transition to the jackpot is easier than usual. In the central small area Ds2, a predetermined character (a boy with a headband in this embodiment) usually performs a predetermined action, and sometimes a special action different from the predetermined action is performed, or another character appears. A notice will be produced by issuing it.

On the other hand, if a ball enters the first entry port 64 while the variable display is being performed by the third symbol display device 81 (first symbol display device 37), the number of entry times is up to four times. It is held, and the number of held balls is shown by the first symbol display device 37 and also in the small area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds. In the small area Ds1, one reserved ball number symbol is displayed for each reserved ball number symbol, and the reserved ball number is displayed according to the display number of the reserved ball number symbol. That is, when one reserved ball number symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the reserved ball number is one, and when four reserved ball number symbols are displayed, the reserved ball number is Indicates that it is 4 balls. Further, when the reserved ball number symbol is not displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the reserved ball number is 0, that is, there is no reserved ball.

In the present embodiment, the ball entering the first ball entry port 64 is configured to be held up to 4 times, but the maximum number of held balls is not limited to 4 times, but 3 times. It may be set to the following or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls symbol in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls is different by a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is different by the number of reserved balls. (For example, a color or a lighting pattern) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four hold lamps indicating the number of hold balls for the maximum number of hold balls, and the number of hold balls may be displayed according to the number of hold lamps in the lit state.

Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 5, the display mode of the SW (switch) effect performed in the third symbol display device 81 will be described. FIG. 5A is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of the SW effect in the present embodiment. The SW effect is selected and displayed as a kind of advance notice display mode during the variable display of the variable pattern in which the main symbol for notifying the lottery result of the special symbol is variablely displayed. When a variation pattern of a special symbol is selected, this SW effect is selected according to the type of the selected variation pattern, and is set to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. NS. Specifically, it is selected and set in the voice lamp control device 113 by the process of S1404 of the command determination process (FIG. 21, S1311) executed by the MPU 221.

When the SW effect is set, the frame button 22 is imitated on the third symbol display device 81 as shown in FIG. 5 (a) while the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is variablely displayed (dynamically displayed). The symbol is displayed, and the characters "Repeat hit !!" are displayed to notify the player that the frame button 22 is pressed. Then, an indicator is displayed in the center of the third symbol display device 81, and the memory of the indicator lights up and rises based on the number of times the player presses the frame button 22, which is the maximum value scale. If the indicator rises (lights up) to the scale marked "Victory" (see FIG. 5B), it indicates to the player that the changing special symbol will be a big hit (notice). In this case, the main symbol is reduced and displayed in a variable manner in the upper right corner of the third symbol display device 81 with only the numbers of the symbols.

In this SW effect, the time to be displayed within the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern is determined in advance, and when that time elapses, the display mode is automatically changed according to the fluctuation pattern of the main symbol.

In the main control device 110, when a ball enters the first ball entry port 64 (starting prize), a special symbol is drawn by using it as a trigger, and then the special symbol (first symbol) is displayed in the first symbol display device 37. The variable display of the symbol) is executed. Further, as shown in FIG. 5A, a fluctuation pattern command and a stop type command are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113, and as a result, in the third symbol display device 81, the first symbol display device The variation display of the third symbol is performed according to the variation display of 37.

The flow to the jackpot will be explained. When the variation display of the third symbol is performed on the third symbol display device 81, the high-speed variation display of the third symbol is first started, and then a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds to 60 seconds). After that, the display is switched to the medium-speed fluctuation display of the third symbol, and further, the display is switched to the low-speed fluctuation display of the third symbol. Here, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, a stop display is performed in which the main symbols (third symbol) having the same number are aligned, the variable effect ends, and then the big hit effect is started. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, a stop display is performed in which the main symbols (third symbol) of the same number are not aligned, the variation effect ends, and if there is a pending start prize, The next special symbol lottery will be held, and the next variable production will start.

Returning to FIG. 2, the description will be continued. The second symbol display device 83 performs variable display by indicating by a lighting state whether or not a lottery of ordinary symbols performed when the ball passes through the second entry port 67 is being executed. As a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, a normal symbol (second symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the normal symbol is indicated by a lighting state.

More specifically, in the second symbol display device 83, every time the ball passes through the second entrance 67, the symbol "○" and the symbol "x" as the second symbol are alternately lit. Variable display is performed. In the pachinko machine 10, when the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is stopped at a predetermined symbol (the symbol “○” in the present embodiment), the electric accessory attached to the first entry port 64 is operated for a predetermined time. It is configured to be in a state (opened), and as a result, a ball can easily enter the first ball entry port 64. The number of times the ball has passed through the second entry port 67 is held up to four times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display device 37 and is also lit and displayed by the second symbol hold lamp 84. NS. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holding lamps, and are symmetrically arranged below the third symbol display device 81.

The variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the present embodiment, and the first symbol display device 37. And a part of the third symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to 4 times as in the case of the 1st ball entrance 64, and the number of times the ball passes through the second ball opening 67 is 3 times or less, or 5 times or more. It may be set to (for example, 8 times). Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol hold lamp 84.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first ball entry port 64 into which a ball can enter is arranged. When a ball enters the first entrance 64, the first entry switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first entry switch is turned on. A special symbol is drawn by the main control device 110, and the display according to the lottery result is indicated by the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37. In addition, the first entry port 64 is also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters.

A variable winning device 65 is arranged below the first entry opening 64, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery of the special symbol performed by the main control device 110 becomes a big hit, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on so as to be the stop symbol of the big hit after a predetermined time (variation time) has elapsed. At the same time, the stop symbol of the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the game state shifts to a special game state (a jackpot of 5 rounds) in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than in the normal state. As this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls are won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a lapse of a predetermined time, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated 5 times (5 rounds). The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and a larger amount of prize balls than usual is paid out to the player as a game value (game value). Is done.

Specifically, the variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for driving the opening / closing forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And have. The specific winning opening 65a is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or it is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate downward on the front surface to temporarily form an open state in which the ball can easily win a prize in the specific winning opening 65a. It operates so as to alternate between the state and the state.

The special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. A large opening that opens and closes separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED 37a corresponding to the big hit is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and the specific winning opening is opened. A special gaming state is a game state in which a large opening port provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time when the ball wins a prize in the specific winning opening 65a while the opening 65a is open. It may be formed.

Attachment spaces K1 and K2 for attaching certificate stamps, identification labels, etc. are provided at the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate stamps, etc. attached to the attachment space K1 are the front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. Balls that do not enter any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a are guided through the out opening 66 to a ball discharge path (not shown). A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, a random number generator used for various lottery, and for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit, etc. is installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the launch control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is to be peeled off in order to open the board boxes 100 and 102, or if the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are used. Cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 6) are provided. ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls is appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the launch control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 6). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

<About the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. 7. FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built in. In order to instruct the operation of the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller in only one direction.

In the main control device 110, a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting in the first symbol display device 37, a display setting in the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting in the third symbol display device 81. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 7, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. These counters and the like are used for a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting on the first symbol display device 37, a display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting on the third symbol display device 81. It is used in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform such as.

To set the display of the special symbol lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the jackpot type of the special symbol are selected. The first hit type counter C2 used for, the stop type selection counter C3 used for selecting the out-of-order stop type in the special symbol, and the first initial value random number used for setting the initial value of the first random number counter C1. The counter CINI1 and the variation type counter CS1 used for selecting the variation pattern are used. Further, the second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of ordinary symbols, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 10), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 18). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol holding ball storage area 203a consisting of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), and each of these areas has a first ball entry port. Each value of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored according to the timing of entering the ball 64. Further, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b including one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), and balls are left and right in each of these areas. The value of the second random number counter C4 is stored in accordance with the timing of passing through any of the second entrances (through gates) 67.

Each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 299), reaches the maximum value (for example, 299 in the case of a counter capable of taking a value of 0 to 299), and then becomes 0. It is configured to return to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter capable of taking a value of 0 to 299, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once for each execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 10), and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 18).

The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the special symbol holding ball of the RAM 203 is held at the timing when the ball wins the first entry port 64. It is stored in the storage area 203a. The value of the random number that becomes the jackpot of the special symbol is set by the special symbol jackpot random number table (not shown) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the random number counter C1 per first is special. If it matches the value of the random number that becomes the jackpot set by the symbol jackpot random number table, it is determined to be the jackpot of the special symbol. In addition, this special symbol jackpot random number table is for a low probability time of a special symbol (a period in which the special symbol is in a low probability state) and a high probability time (special symbol) with a higher probability of becoming a jackpot of a special symbol than the low probability time. It is divided into two types, one for the period in which the probability is high, and the number of random numbers that are the jackpots contained in each is set differently. In this way, by making the number of random numbers to be a big hit different, the probability of being a big hit is changed between the low probability time of the special symbol and the high probability time of the special symbol. The special symbol jackpot random number table (not shown) for the high probability of the special symbol and the special symbol jackpot random number table (not shown) for the low probability of the special symbol are in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. It is provided in.

The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol is a big hit, and adds one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). It is configured to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value from 0 to 99). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the special symbol of the RAM 203 is held at the timing when the ball wins the first entry port 64. It is stored in the sphere storage area 203a.

Here, if the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is not a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, that is, if it is a random number that is out of the special symbol, the first The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the symbol display device 37 is the one when the special symbol is removed.

On the other hand, if the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, it corresponds to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37. The display mode is the one at the time of a big hit of a special symbol. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol holding ball storage area 203a.

As shown in FIG. 9C, the first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. In this first hit random number counter C1, there is one random number value that becomes a jackpot of the special symbol when the probability of the special symbol is low, and the random number value "7" is the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a for the low probability. It is stored in. As described above, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that will be the jackpot is 1 while the total number of random numbers is 300, so the probability of the special symbol being the jackpot is "1/300".

On the other hand, when the special symbol has a high probability, there are 10 random numbers that serve as jackpots for the special symbol, and the values "0 to 9" are stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a for the high probability. .. As described above, when the probability of the special symbol is high, the total number of random numbers that will be the jackpot is 10 while the total number of random numbers is 300, so the probability of the special symbol being the jackpot is "1/30".

Further, the value of the first type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. Then, as shown in FIG. 9B, in the first hit type counter C2, when the random number value is "0 to 49", the jackpot type is "big hit A". Further, when the value is "50 to 99", the jackpot type is "big hit B".

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured so that two types of hit types (big hit A and big hit B) are determined by the value of the random number indicated by the first hit type counter C2. From the value (random number value) of the first hit type counter C2, the random number value for determining the jackpot type of the special symbol is set by the special symbol jackpot type table (not shown), and this table is set. It is provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110.

The stop type selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 99, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In the present embodiment, the stop type selection counter C3 selects the stop type at the time of disconnection displayed by the third symbol display device 81, and after the reach occurs, the final stop symbol shifts by one before and after the reach symbol. "Reach other than front and back" (for example, 98,99), and "reach other than front and back" (for example, range of 90 to 97) where the final stop symbol stops outside the front and back of the reach symbol after the same reach occurs. Three stop (effect) patterns are selected with "complete deviation" (for example, in the range of 0 to 89) in which reach does not occur. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the special symbol holding ball of the RAM 203 is stored at the timing when the ball wins the first ball entry port 64. It is stored in the area 203a.

From the value (random value) of the stop type selection counter C3, the random number value for determining the stop type of the special symbol is set by the stop type selection table (not shown), and this table is the main control. It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. Further, in the present embodiment, this table is divided into a special symbol for high probability and a special symbol for low probability, and a range of random values set for each stop type of deviation according to the table. Is changing. This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the special symbol or the low probability state of the special symbol.

For example, in a high-probability state, a table for high-probability times has a wide range of random numbers from 0 to 89 corresponding to the stop type of "completely off" so that the reach effect is not selected more than necessary because a big hit is likely to occur. Is selected, and "completely off" is easily selected. In this table, the "reach outside the front and rear" is narrowed to 98,99 and the "reach other than the front and rear" is also narrowed to 90 to 97, making it difficult to select "reach outside the front and rear" and "reach other than the front and rear". Further, in the low probability state, in order to secure the ball entry time to the first entry port 64, the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop type of "completely off" is narrow as 0 to 79, when the probability is low. The table for is selected, and it becomes difficult to select "completely off".

In this stop type selection table, the range of random value corresponding to the stop type of "reach other than front and rear deviation" is widened to 80 to 97, and "reach other than front and rear deviation" can be easily selected. Therefore, in the low probability state, it is possible to perform many reach displays with a long effect time, so that the ball entry time to the first entry port 64 can be secured, and the variation display by the third symbol display device 81 continues. It will be easier to do. Also in the latter table, the range of random values corresponding to the stop type of "reach before and after" is set to 98,99.

The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The variable type counter CS1 determines a rough display mode such as so-called normal reach and super reach. Specifically, the determination of the display mode is the determination of the fluctuation time of the symbol variation. Based on the fluctuation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the reach type and the detailed symbol variation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are determined by the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. NS. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the main process (see FIG. 18) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. A fluctuation pattern table (not shown) storing a random number value for determining one fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation from the value (random value) of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. There is.

In the variation pattern table, for example, as variation patterns for disconnection, "disengagement (for long time)", "disengagement (for short time)", "disengagement normal reach", "disengagement super reach", "disengagement special reach" Various types are specified, and as fluctuation patterns for jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot C, "shared normal reach", "shared super reach", and "shared special reach" are specified, and as fluctuation patterns for jackpot C. , "Special reach" is stipulated, and "shared normal reach", "shared super reach", and "shared special reach" are stipulated as fluctuation patterns for both hit and miss. Then, from the various fluctuation patterns defined in the fluctuation pattern table, the fluctuation pattern is selected according to the predicted lottery result and the predicted stop type (in the case of a jackpot, the jackpot type).

The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter in which, for example, 1 is added in order in the range of 0 to 239, the maximum value (that is, 239) is reached, and then the counter returns to 0. Further, when the second hit random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second hit random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated periodically, for example, for each timer interrupt process, and it is detected that the ball has passed through either the left or right second entry port (through gate) 67. It is acquired at the time of this, and is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

Then, as shown in FIG. 9D, the value of the random number that hits the normal symbol is set by the random number table 202c per normal symbol (see FIG. 9D) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller. When the value of the second hit random number counter C4 matches the value of the random number that is the hit set by the random number table per normal symbol, it is determined to be a hit of the normal symbol. In addition, this random number table per normal symbol is used for the low probability of the normal symbol (the period during which the normal symbol is in the normal state) and for the high probability of hitting the normal symbol (for the normal symbol). It is divided into two types, one for (a period in which the time is shortened) and the other, and the number of random numbers that are big hits included in each is set differently. By making the number of random numbers to be hit different in this way, the probability of being hit is changed between the low probability of the normal symbol and the high probability of the normal symbol.

As shown in FIG. 9D, when the probability of the normal symbol is low, there are 24 random numbers that hit the normal symbol, and the range is "5 to 28". These random number values are stored in a random number table per ordinary symbol for low probability. As described above, when the probability of a normal symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that become a jackpot is 24 while the total number of random numbers is 240, so the probability of a jackpot of a special symbol is "1/10".

When the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol and the ball passes through the second entry port 67, the value of the random number counter C4 per second is acquired, and the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. The fluctuation display of is executed for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of "5-28", it is determined that the player has won, and after the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) is completed. ), The symbol "○" is lit and displayed, and the first ball entry port 64 is opened only for "0.2 seconds x 1 time". In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, the first ball entry port 64 is opened only "0.2 seconds x 1 time" when the normal symbol hits. , The opening time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "0.5 seconds x 2 times".

On the other hand, when there is a high probability of a normal symbol, there are 200 random values that are big hits of the normal symbol, and the range is "5 to 204". These random number values are stored in the random number table per ordinary symbol for high probability. As described above, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random numbers is 200 while the total number of random numbers is 240, so the probability of the special symbol being a jackpot is "1 / 1.2".

When the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, when the ball passes through the second entry port 67, the value of the random number counter C4 per second is acquired, and the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. Fluctuation display is executed for 3 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that the player has won, and after the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) is completed. ), The symbol "○" is lit and displayed, and the first ball entry port 64 is opened "1 second x 2 times". In this way, when the probability of the normal symbol is high, the time of variable display is very short, "30 seconds → 3 seconds", as compared with the case of the low probability of the normal symbol, and further, the first entrance 64 is released. Since the period is very long, "0.2 seconds x 1 time → 1 second x 2 times", it becomes easy for the ball to enter the first ball entry port 64. A table (not shown) storing a random number value for determining whether or not a normal symbol is hit from the value (random number value) of the second hit random number counter C4 is provided in the ROM 202. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, the first ball entry port 64 is opened only "1 second x 2 times" when the normal symbol hits, but it is opened. The time and number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "3 seconds x 3 times".

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 10). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 18).

As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and in the main control device 110, the jackpot lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displayed according to the values of the counters and the like. It is possible to execute the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device 83.

Returning to FIG. 7, the description will be continued. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 8, the RAM 203 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, I / O, and the like. It has a work area (work area) in which the value of is stored.

The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power supply is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when the power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power on due to power failure elimination; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. The writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 18) when the power is cut off, and the restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 17) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured so that a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 16) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 7, the RAM 203 includes a special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b, a special symbol holding ball number counter 203c, and a normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d. It has a counter 203e and other storage areas.

The special symbol holding ball storage area 203a has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), and each of these areas has a random number counter C1 per first. , Each value of the first hit type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball wins the first ball opening 64 (starting prize), each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding number). Among the vacant areas (1st area to 4th area on hold), the areas with the smallest area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in order. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the time-old winning prize is stored, and the data corresponding to the time-oldest winning prize is stored in the reserved first area. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the special symbol lottery is performed in the main control device 110, each value of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a shifts to the execution area. Then, based on the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area, a determination such as a lottery of a special symbol is performed.

When the data is shifted from the hold 1st area to the execution area, the hold 1st area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed in which the winning data stored in the other holding areas (holding 2nd area to holding 4th area) is packed into the holding area (holding 1st area to holding 3rd area) whose area number is 1 smaller. Will be done. In the present embodiment, in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the data is shifted only in the holding area (second holding area to fourth holding area) in which the winning data is stored.

Like the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). A second random number counter C4 is stored in each of these areas.

More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through either the left or right second entry port 67, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding first area to holding). Among the vacant areas of the 4th area), the areas with the smallest area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in order. That is, similarly to the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the lottery for winning the normal symbol is performed in the main control device 110, the value of the counter C4 stored in the hold first area of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203b is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area (moved), a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed.

When the data is shifted from the hold 1st area to the execution area, the hold 1st area becomes empty. Therefore, as in the case of the special symbol hold ball storage area 203a, the winning prizes stored in the other hold areas The shift process is performed to pack the data into the holding area that is one smaller than the area number. Also, the data shift is performed only in the holding area where the winning data is stored.

The special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is a variable display (third symbol display) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entry (starting prize) into the first entry port 64. It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of waiting times) of the variable display performed by the device 81 up to 4 times. The initial value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is set to zero, and each time a ball enters the first entry port 64 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, the maximum value is 1 It is added (see S404 in FIG. 13). On the other hand, the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is decremented by 1 each time a new variation display of the special symbol is executed (see S205 in FIG. 11).

The value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (holding number N of the variation display in the special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command (see S206 in FIG. 11 and S405 in FIG. 13). The hold ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 each time the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c is changed.

The voice lamp control device 113 has a variable display hold ball held in the main control device 110 by a hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 each time the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c is changed. You can get the value of the number itself. As a result, the number of reserved balls in the variable display managed by the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is the actual number of reserved balls in the variable display held in the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it deviates from the deviation, the deviation can be corrected by the next received hold ball number command.

The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command, and each time the number of reserved balls changes, the display control device 114 is notified of the number of reserved balls. Send a ball count command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number symbol in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d determines the number of reserved balls (number of waiting times) of the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball at the second entry port 67. It is a counter that counts up to 4 times. The initial value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is set to zero, and each time a ball passes through the second entry port 67 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to a maximum value of 4. (See S704 in FIG. 15). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time the variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S605 in FIG. 14).

When the ball passes through either the left or right second entry port 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of holdings M of the variation display in the normal symbol) is less than 4, a random number per second. The value of the counter C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b (S705 in FIG. 15). On the other hand, if the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is 4 when the ball passes through either the left or right second entry port 67, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b. Not done (S703: No in FIG. 15).

The time saving medium counter 203e is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state, and if the value of the time saving medium counter 203e is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state. If the value of the time-saving / medium-time counter 203e is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol. The initial value of the time saving / medium counter 203e is set to zero, and each time a special symbol is drawn by the main control device 110 and it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot, a value corresponding to the jackpot type is set. Will be done. That is, when a special symbol becomes a big hit, a new value is set according to the big hit type regardless of the value of the time saving / medium counter 203e.

Specifically, when it is determined that the jackpot type is "big hit B", the time saving medium counter 203e is set to 100 (see S214 in FIG. 11). After that, 1 is subtracted every time the variation effect of the special symbol is completed until the value of the time saving / medium counter 203e becomes 0 (S217 in FIG. 11).

When a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed, the value of the time saving / medium counter 203e is referred to, and if the value is 1 or more, the lottery for the normal symbol is based on the random number table per normal symbol for high probability. On the other hand, if the value of the time saving / medium counter 203e is 0, a lottery of ordinary symbols is performed based on the random number table per ordinary symbol for low probability time (see S610 and S611 in FIG. 14).

The other storage area 203z is an area in which various data and the like necessary for other games are stored.

An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 is centered on the lower side of the opening / closing plate of the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol hold lamp 84, and the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the front side, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205. To send.

Further, various switches 208 including a group of switches and sensors (not shown) and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, which will be described later, are connected to the input / output port 205, and the MPU 201 is output from the various switches 208. Various processes are executed based on the signal and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as, I / O, etc. are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured so that the power failure signal SG1 is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 24) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball, the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. The ball launching unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are allowed to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle is detected by the touch sensor 51a that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the amount of rotation of 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output in an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an output of lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variation effect (variation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and continuous notice effect. The arithmetic unit MPU 221 has a ROM 222 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 221 and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed, or at the time of super reach. The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the content of the effect, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to a command from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and displays and controls an error command including the type of the error. It is transmitted to the device 114. The display control device 114 controls the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message image according to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

The SW effect pattern table 222a is stored in the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113. Further, in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113, a prize information storage area 223a, a special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b, a fluctuation start flag 223c, a stop type selection flag 223d, a SW press count counter 223e, and an effect counter At least 223f, a SW effective time storage area 223g, and other storage areas 223z are provided.

The winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), and each of these areas stores prize information. In the pachinko machine 10, when the main control device 110 wins a start prize, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 acquired according to the start prize. Therefore, various information (whether or not, stop type, fluctuation pattern) obtained when a special symbol lottery corresponding to the start winning is performed is predicted (estimated) by the main control device 110, and the predicted various information is obtained. , The main control device 110 notifies the voice lamp control device 113 by the winning information command.

When the winning information command is received, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts various information (win / fail, stop type, fluctuation pattern) notified by the winning information command as winning information, and the winning information is the winning information. It is stored in the storage area 223a. More specifically, the extracted winning information is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (1st to 4th) among the vacant areas of the 4 areas (1st to 4th areas). Will be done. That is, the smaller the area number, the more the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored in the first area.

The special symbol reservation ball number counter 223b is a variation effect (variation display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), similarly to the special symbol reservation ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110. Therefore, it is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of standbys) of the fluctuation effect held in the main control device 110 up to four times.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to acquire the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b manages the reserved ball number. It has become.

Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the number of reserved balls in the variation display is added by entering the ball into the first entry port 64, or in the main control device 110, the variation display in the special symbol is executed. When the number of reserved balls is subtracted, a hold ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 acquires the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 from the hold ball number command, and specially It is stored in the symbol reserved ball number counter 223b (see S1409 in FIG. 21). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b according to the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so that the special symbol hold ball number counter of the main control device 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with 203c.

The value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is used for displaying the reserved ball number symbol in the third symbol display device 81. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of reserved balls indicated by the command in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b in response to the reception of the reserved ball number command, and also stores the stored special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of, a display hold ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

When the display control device 114 receives this display hold ball number command, the hold ball number value indicated by the command, that is, the hold ball number corresponding to the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is changed while synchronizing with the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110. Therefore, the number of reserved sphere symbols displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the special symbol reserved sphere counter 203a of the main control device 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of reserved balls for which the variable display is reserved.

The variation start flag 223c is turned on when a variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1402 in FIG. 21), and is turned off when the variation display is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S1702 in FIG. 22). When the variation start flag 223c is turned on, the display variation pattern command is set based on the variation pattern extracted from the received variation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S1302) of the main process (see FIG. 20) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

The stop type selection flag 223d is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1405 in FIG. 21), and is turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S1707 in FIG. 22).

The SW press count counter 223e is a counter for counting the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed. The SW effect count counter 223e is set to the SW effect, and a value larger than 0 is stored in the SW effective time storage area 223g, that is, when the frame button 22 is pressed during the SW effective time, the value is incremented by 1. NS. Specifically, 1 is added in the processing of S1606 of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (FIG. 23, S1307) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. On the other hand, in the processing of S1602 and S1614, the initial value is reset to 0. The value of the SW press count counter 223e is configured to be mainly used for setting the lottery probability in the SW effect.

The effect counter 223f is a counter value used for drawing an effect executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, selecting an effect, and the like. The effect counter 223f is a counter value updated in the range of 0 to 198, and is updated to the upper limit value of 198, and then updated to the initial value of 0 when further updated. Although not shown, they are added and updated one by one in the main process (see FIG. 20) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113.

The SW effective time storage area 223g is a storage area for storing an effective period in which the operation of the frame button 22 is determined to be effective. When the SW effective time is stored, it is subtracted and updated based on the passage of time of the SW effective time. When the effective time showing a value larger than 0 seconds is stored in the SW effective time storage area 223 g, it is determined that the SW effective time is in progress.

The other storage area 223z is a storage area in which various data and the like necessary for other games are stored.

The RAM 223 also has a command storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores a command received from the main control device 110 until a process corresponding to the command is performed. The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 21) of the voice lamp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process causes the command determination process to be performed. The command is parsed and processing is performed according to the command.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 changes the display (variation) of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81. It controls the production) and continuous notice production. The details of the display control device 114 will be omitted because they have already known configurations.

<Regarding the control process by the main control device 110 in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 10 to 18. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and a timer that is started periodically (at intervals of 2 msec in this embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process that is activated by inputting a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are first described, and then the start-up process is performed. And the main process will be explained.

FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, the read process of various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main control device 110 is read, the state of the switch is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Further, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second hit random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second per random number counter C4 are each added by 1, and their counter values are the maximum values (in the present embodiment). When it reaches 299, 99, 99, 239), it clears to 0, respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Next, a process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37 and a special symbol variation process for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are executed (S104), and then the special symbol variation process is executed (S104). The start winning process associated with winning the first ball opening 64 (starting winning) is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 11 to 13.

After the start winning process is executed, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106), and the through gate is passed along with the passage of the ball at the second entry port 67. The process is executed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation processing and the through-gate passage processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 14 and 15. After executing the through-gate passage process, the launch control process is executed (S108), and other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (S109) to end the timer interrupt process. In the launch control process, the ball is launched on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the launch is not operated. It is a process of determining on / off of. The main control device 110 instructs the launch control device 112 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on.

Next, the special symbol variation processing (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation processing (S104). This special symbol variation processing (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 10), and the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device. This is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol performed in 81.

In this special symbol variation processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently in the jackpot (S201). Among the special symbol jackpots, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol. Includes the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S201: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

Unless the special symbol is in the jackpot (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If not (S202: No), the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (the number of times the variable display is held in the special symbol N) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is larger than 0 (S204), and if the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is 0 (S204: No), this process ends as it is.

On the other hand, if the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is subtracted by 1 (S205) and changed by calculation. A hold ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c is set (S206). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 18) described later, which is executed by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c from the hold ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. ..

After setting the hold ball number command by the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol hold ball storage area 203a is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the hold 1st area to the hold 4th area of the special symbol hold ball storage area 203a is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, within each area, such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the first symbol display device 37 executes a special symbol variation start process for starting the variation display (S208). The special symbol change start processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the variation display executed by the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S209). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed by the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), and this fluctuation time. If (S209: No) has not elapsed, this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S209, if the fluctuation time of the variable display being executed has elapsed (S209: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S210). The stop symbol is set in advance by the special symbol variation start process (S208) described later with reference to FIG. When this special symbol change start process is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. More specifically, whether or not it is a big hit of a special symbol is determined according to the value of the random number counter C1 per first, and if it is a big hit of a special symbol, it depends on the value of the first hit type counter C2. It is decided whether it will be a jackpot A or a jackpot B.

In the present embodiment, when the jackpot A is reached, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, and when the jackpot B is reached, the red LED is turned on. If it is off, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. The display of each LED is turned off when the next fluctuation display is started, but it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation is stopped.

After the processing of S210 is completed, when the variation display being executed by the first symbol display device 37 is started, the lottery result (current lottery result) of the special symbol performed by the special symbol variation start processing is displayed. It is determined whether the special symbol is a big hit (S211). If the result of this lottery is a jackpot of a special symbol (S211: Yes), it is determined what type of jackpot is among the two types of jackpots of special symbols (big hit A, jackpot B) (S212), and the jackpot type. If is a jackpot A, the gaming state after the jackpot is set to a high-probability gaming state (probability variation) (S213). If the jackpot type is jackpot B, 100 is set in the time saving / medium counter 203e (S214). Then, the start of the jackpot of the special symbol is set (S215), and this process is terminated. When the start of the jackpot of the special symbol is set by the process of S216, when the jackpot control process (S1004) of the main process (see FIG. 18) is executed, it branches to S1101: Yes and the opening command is set. Will be done. As a result, the jackpot effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

In the process of S211 if the result of this lottery is out of the special symbol (S211: No),
It is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203e is 1 or more (S216), and if the value of the time saving counter 203e is 1 or more (S216: Yes), the value of the time saving counter 203e is subtracted by 1 (S217). ), End this process. On the other hand, if the value of the time saving / medium counter 203e is 0 (S216: No), the processing of S221 is skipped and the main processing is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 12, the special symbol variation start processing (S208) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation start processing (S208). This special symbol change start process (S208) is a process executed in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 11) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 10), and is an execution area of the special symbol hold ball storage area 203a. Based on the values of various counters stored in, a lottery (win / fail judgment) of "big hit of special symbol" or "missing of special symbol" is performed, and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are used. This is a process for determining the effect pattern of the variable effect (variable effect pattern).

In the special symbol fluctuation start processing, first, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is acquired. (S301).

Next, it is determined whether the gaming state is in the probable change (S302). If the probability is changing (S302: Yes), whether or not it is a special symbol jackpot based on the value of the first hit random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301 and the special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability. The lottery result of (S304) is acquired. Specifically, the value of the first hit random number counter C1 is compared one by one with the 30 random number values stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability. As described above, 10 random numbers of "0 to 9" are set as the big hit random numbers of the special symbol, and the value of the random number counter C1 per first matches the random number values that hit these. If so, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. After obtaining the lottery result of the special symbol, the process proceeds to S306.

On the other hand, in the processing of S302, if the probability change is not in progress (S302: No), the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol, so that the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the processing of S301 and the low probability time Based on the special symbol jackpot random number table for, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is acquired (S304). Specifically, the value of the first hit random number counter C1 is compared with the random number values of 3 stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for low probability one by one. As a random number value that becomes a big hit of a special symbol, one of "7" is set, and when the value of the random number counter C1 per first and the random number value that becomes a hit of these match, the special symbol Judge that it is a big hit. After obtaining the lottery result of the special symbol, the process proceeds to S305.

Then, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the processing of S303 or S304 is a jackpot of the special symbol (S305), and if it is determined to be a jackpot of the special symbol (S305: Yes). Based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301, the display mode at the time of big hit is set (S306). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the processing of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the special symbol jackpot type table, and the jackpots of the three types of special symbols (big hit A, Of the jackpot B and jackpot C), it is determined what the jackpot type is. As described above, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 49", it is determined that it is a jackpot A (16R jackpot, probability variation of a special symbol), and it is in the range of "50 to 99". If there is, it is determined that the jackpot B (16R jackpot, low probability state of special symbol, time saving period of normal symbol 100 times).

In the process of S306, the display mode (lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (big hit A, jackpot B). Further, the jackpot type (big hit A, jackpot B) is set as the stop type so that the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of big hit is determined (S307). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S307, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 stops at the jackpot symbol. The fluctuation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the fluctuation time of the symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. The relationship between the numerical value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation time is defined in advance by a table or the like.

For example, as the fluctuation pattern for disconnection, "disengagement (for long time)", "disengagement (for short time)", "disengagement normal reach", "disengagement super reach", and "disengagement special reach" are specified. , "Shared normal reach", "shared super reach", and "shared special reach" are defined as the variation patterns for jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot C, and the variation patterns for jackpot C are "special". Various types of "reach" are specified, and various types of "shared normal reach", "shared super reach", and "shared special reach" are specified as fluctuation patterns for both hit and miss.

In the process of S305, when it is determined that the special symbol is out of alignment (S305: No), the display mode at the time of deviation is set (S308). In the process of S308, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the outlier symbol, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol hold ball storage area 203a is set. Based on this, as the stop type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, it is set whether the reach is out of front / back, the reach is out of front / back, or the reach is completely out.

Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is in a probabilistic state of a special symbol, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for high probability. Then, set the stop type. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 89", a complete deviation is set, and if it is in the range of "90 to 97", a reach other than the front and rear deviation is set, and "98". If it is ", 99", set the reach that is out of front and back. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol, the stop type is set by comparing the value of the stop type selection counter C3 with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for low probability. do. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79", a complete deviation is set, and if it is in the range of "80 to 97", a reach other than the front and rear deviation is set, and "98". If it is ", 99", set the reach that is out of front and back.

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of disconnection is determined (S309). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S308, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation such as normal reach and super reach is confirmed based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. To determine.

When the process of S307 or the process of S309 is completed, next, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined by the process of S307 or the process of S309 is set (S310). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the set stop type is set (S311). These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the process of S1001 of the main process (FIG. 18). NS. The voice lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command as it is to the display control device 114. When the processing of S312 is completed, the process returns to the special symbol variation processing.

Next, for convenience of explanation, first, the start winning information processing (S105) will be described, and then the delay look-ahead processing (S105) will be described. First, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing this start winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 10), determines whether or not there is a prize (starting prize) in the first ball opening 64, and when there is a starting winning. , The process for holding the value indicated by the various random number counters and the process for executing the pre-reading of the lottery result in the special symbol from the values indicated by the various held random number counters.

When the start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won a prize (starting prize) in the first entry port 64 (S401). Here, the ball entering the first ball entry port 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (the number of times the variable display is held in the special symbol N) is acquired (S402). .. Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S403).

Then, whether or not there is a prize in the first ball opening 64 (S401: No), or even if there is a prize in the first ball opening 64, the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is less than 4. If not (S403: No), the process proceeds to S415. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first ball opening 64 (S401: Yes) and the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the number of special symbol reserved balls The value (N) of the counter 203c is added by 1 (S404). Then, a hold ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c changed by the calculation is set (S405).

The reserved ball number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 18) described later, which is executed by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c from the hold ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. ..

After setting the hold ball number command by the processing of S405, the values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above are set to RAM 203. The special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is stored in the first free holding area (holding first area to holding fourth area) (S406). In the process of S406, the value of the special symbol hold ball counter 203c is referred to, and if the value is 0, the hold first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the second area on hold is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the third area on hold is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the fourth area on hold is set as the first area.

Next, the hit / fail determination result at the start of fluctuation is determined based on the values of various counters acquired in the process of S406 (S407). Here, the game state (probability change or normal) at the start of the fluctuation is discriminated, and the hit / fail determination result is determined. It is determined whether or not the result of the hit / miss determination executed in the process of S407 is a big hit (S408). When it is determined that the hit / fail determination result is a big hit (S408: Yes), the big hit winning command is set (S409). On the other hand, when it is determined that the winning / failing determination result is out of order (S408: No), the out of order winning command is set (S410).

The winning information command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 18) described later, which is executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the winning information command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the winning / failing, the stop type, and the fluctuation pattern from the winning information command, and stores the information as the winning information in the winning information storage area 223a.

Next, the normal symbol variation processing (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation processing (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 10), and is associated with the variation display of the second symbol performed by the second symbol display device 83 and the first ball entry port 64. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory.

In this normal symbol variation processing, first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently being hit (S601). As for the hitting of the normal symbol (second symbol), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory attached to the first entry port 64 is performed while the display indicating the hit is being made on the second symbol display device 83. Includes during and during. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is hit (S601: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S601: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602), and the second symbol display device If the display mode of 83 is not changing (S602: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times the variable display is held in the normal symbol M) is acquired (S603). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S604), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S604: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203d is not 0 (S604: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203d is subtracted by 1 (S605).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b is shifted (S606). In the process of S606, the data stored in the hold 1st area to the hold 4th area of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203b is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, within each area, such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b is acquired (S607).

Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving counter 203e of the RAM 203 is 1 or more (S608). The time saving medium counter 203e is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state. If the value of the time saving medium counter 203e is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state. If the value of the time saving counter 203e is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol.

When the value of the time saving / medium counter 203e is 1 or more (S608: Yes), it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently being hit (S609). Among the special symbol jackpots, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol. Includes the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is in the jackpot (S609: Yes), the process proceeds to S611. In the present embodiment, during the big hit of the special symbol, the lottery of the ordinary symbol is less likely to be a hit. This is because during the jackpot of the special symbol (that is, during the special gaming state), the player hits the ball in an attempt to win the special winning opening 65a, so that the electric accessory attached to the first entry opening 64 is released. This is to prevent the ball that is to be won in the special winning opening 65a from entering the first winning opening 64 as much as possible. Since the special winning opening 65a is provided immediately below the first entry opening 64, even if the ball is suppressed from entering the first entry opening 64 during the jackpot of the special symbol, the first winning opening 65a is provided. Many balls enter the ball entry port 64. As a result, in most cases, the number of reserved balls for the first entry port 64 becomes the maximum (4 times) while the pachinko machine 10 is in the special gaming state.

In the processing of S609, if the special symbol is not in the jackpot (S609: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state. Based on the value of the second hit random number counter C4 and the random number table per normal symbol for high probability, the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S610). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the random number table per ordinary symbol for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5-204", it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0-4,205-239", it is determined. It is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (see FIG. 8B).

In the process of S608, when the value of the time saving / medium counter 203e is 0 (S608: No), the process proceeds to the process of S611. In the processing of S611, the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit of the special symbol, or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, so that the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the processing of S607 is low. Based on the random number table per ordinary symbol for probability time, the lottery result of whether or not the ordinary symbol is won is acquired (S611). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the random number table per ordinary symbol for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5-28", it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0-4, 29-239", it is determined. It is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (see FIG. 8B).

Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the ordinary symbol acquired by the processing of S610 or S611 is a hit of the ordinary symbol (S612), and if it is determined to be a hit of the ordinary symbol (S612: Yes). , The display mode at the time of hit is set (S613). In the process of S613, after the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol “◯” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol).

Then, it is determined whether the value of the time saving medium counter 203e is 1 or more (S614), and if the value of the time saving medium counter 203e is 1 or more (S614: Yes), the special symbol is currently being hit. Whether or not it is determined (S615). As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S615: Yes), the process proceeds to S617. In the present embodiment, during the jackpot of the special symbol, in order to prevent the ball from entering the first entry port 64 as much as possible, even if the ball hits the normal symbol, it is the same as the case where the normal symbol is missed. The number of times the electric accessory is opened and the opening time are set.

In the processing of S615, if the special symbol is not in the jackpot (S615: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state. The opening period of the electric accessory associated with 64 is set to 1 second, the number of times of opening is set to 2 (S616), and the process proceeds to S619. In the process of S614, when the value of the time saving / medium counter 203e is 0 (S614: No), the process proceeds to the process of S617. In the processing of S617, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the opening period of the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is set to 0. . In addition to setting to 2 seconds, the number of times of opening is set to 1 (S617), and the process proceeds to S619.

In the process of S612, when it is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (S612: No), the display mode at the time of deviation is set (S618). In the process of S618, after the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol “x” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of disconnection is completed, the process proceeds to S619.

In the process of S619, it is determined whether the value of the time saving / medium counter 203e is 1 or more (S619), and if the value of the time saving / medium counter 203e is 1 or more (S619: Yes), the variation in the second symbol display device 83. The display fluctuation time is set to 3 seconds (S620), and this process ends. On the other hand, if the value of the time saving / medium counter 203e is 0 (S619: No), the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display in the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds (S621), and this process is terminated. In this way, except during the jackpot of the special symbol, when the normal symbol has a high probability, the variable display time is very short, "30 seconds → 3 seconds", as compared with the low probability of the normal symbol. Since the release period of the first entry port 64 is very long, "0.2 seconds x 1 time → 1 second x 2 times", the ball can easily enter the first entry port 64.

In the process of S602, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602: Yes), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the variation display executed by the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (S622). The fluctuation time here is a time preset by the process of S620 or the process of S621 before the variation display is started in the second symbol display device 83.

In the process of S622, if the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S622: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S622, if the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display being executed has elapsed (S622: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S623). In the process of S623, if the lottery of ordinary symbols is a win and the display mode is set by the process of S613, the "○" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lights up) on the second symbol display device 83. Is set to be displayed). On the other hand, if the lottery of the normal symbol is removed and the display mode is set by the process of S618, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lit) on the second symbol display device 83. Is set to. When the stop display is set by the process of S623, when the second symbol display update process (see S1007) of the main process (see FIG. 18) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is displayed. When the process is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lit) on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in the process of S613 or the process of S618.

Next, when the variable display being executed by the second symbol display device 83 is started, is the lottery result of the normal symbol (current lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation process a hit of the normal symbol? Is determined (S624). If the result of the lottery this time is a hit of a normal symbol (S624: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory attached to the first entry port 64 is set (S625), and this process is terminated. When the start of opening / closing control of the electric accessory is set by the process of S625, the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is executed when the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S1005) of the main process (see FIG. 18) is executed next. Is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the process of S616 or the process of S617 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S624, if the result of the lottery this time is out of the normal symbol (S624: No), the process of S625 is skipped and the present process is terminated.

Next, the through-gate passage process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing this through gate passing process (S107). This through gate passage process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 10), determines whether or not the ball has passed through the second entry port 67, and if the ball has passed, the ball has passed. This is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the second random number counter C4.

In the through gate passing process, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the second entry port 67 (S701). Here, the passage of the ball at the second entry port 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the second entry port 67 (S701: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times the variable display is held in the normal symbol M) is acquired (S702). .. Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S703).

Whether the ball has passed through the second entry port 67 (S701: No), or even if the ball has passed through the second entry port 67, the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 4. If it is not less than (S703: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the second entry port 67 (S701: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S703: Yes), the number of normal symbol reserved balls The value (M) of the counter 203d is added by 1 (S704). Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above is set to the first of the free hold areas (hold 1st area to hold 4th area) of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. It is stored in the area of (S705), and this process is terminated. In the process of S705, the value of the normal symbol hold ball counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the hold first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the second area on hold is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the third area on hold is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the fourth area on hold is set as the first area.

FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control during execution and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power failure occurrence information in the RAM 203 (S801) as a setting of the power failure occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt process. do.

The above NMI interrupt process is also executed in the payout launch control device 111, and the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control during execution. Then, the NMI interrupt process is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 17, a start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the power is turned on to the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started by resetting when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, the initial setting process associated with the power-on is executed (S901). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a weight process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the control device on the sub side (peripheral control device such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be in an operable state. (S902). Then, the access of the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S904), and if it is turned on (S904: Yes), the process shifts to S912. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905), and if it is not stored (S905: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power cutoff did not end normally, the process is also shifted to S912 in this case as well.

If the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S907: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power is cut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and the process is shifted to S912 even in such a case. As will be described later in the process of S1014 in FIG. 18, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of this RAM determination value, the effectiveness of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of S912, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 which is a control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side (S912). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start payout control of the game ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes the initialization process (S913, S914) of the RAM 203.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized at the time of turning on the power, for example, when the hall is open for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erasing switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S913, S914) is executed. In addition, the initialization process (S913, S914) of the RAM 203 is executed in the same manner when the power failure occurrence information is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.). .. In the RAM initialization process (S913, S914), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S913), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S914). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to the process of S910.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), the power failure occurrence information is stored (S905: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal (S90: No). S907: Yes), the information on the occurrence of the power failure is cleared while holding the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S908). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side to the gaming state when the drive power is cut off is transmitted (S909), and the process proceeds to S910. When the payout control device 111 receives the payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

In the process of S910, the effect permission command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Next, the interrupt is permitted (S911), and the process proceeds to the main process described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 18, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-mentioned start-up process will be described. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, each process of S1001 to S1007 is executed as a periodic process having a cycle of 4 ms, and the counter update process of S1010 and S1011 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main process, first, during the execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 10), the output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is sent to each control device (peripheral) on the sub side. The external output process to be transmitted to the control device) is executed (S1001). Specifically, the presence or absence of the winning detection information detected by the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 10) is determined, and if the winning detection information is present, the number of acquired balls corresponds to the payout control device 111. Send a prize ball command. Further, the hold ball number command set in the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 11) and the start winning processing (see FIG. 13) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the winning information command set in the starting winning process is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command, the stop type command, and the like necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the opening command, the number of rounds command, and the ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 27) are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch control device 112.

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1002). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1003), and then, when the special symbol is in the jackpot state, the jackpot effect is executed or variable. A jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (S1004). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round in the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have won in the specific winning opening 65a. Then, when any of these conditions is satisfied, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeatedly executed for a predetermined number of rounds. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process, but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

Next, the electric accessory opening / closing process for controlling the opening / closing of the electric accessory associated with the first ball entry port 64 is executed (S1005). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory is set by the process of S625 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 14), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started. The opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S616 or the processing of S617 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed.

Next, the first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1006). In the first symbol display update process, when a variation pattern is set by the process of S308 or the process of S310 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 19), the variation display according to the variation pattern is displayed in the first symbol display. Start at device 37. In the present embodiment, among the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, from the start of the fluctuation until the fluctuation time elapses, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off. At the same time, turn on the green LED, if the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED, and if the blue LED is on, turn off the blue LED. At the same time, turn on the red LED.

The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED is displayed. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

Further, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S308 or the process of S310 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 19) ends, the first symbol display device The change display executed in 37 is terminated, and the stop symbol (first symbol) is displayed as the first symbol in the display mode set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 19). A stop display (lighting display) is displayed on the device 37.

Next, the second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1007). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S620 or the process of S621 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 14), the variation display is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. Start. As a result, in the second symbol display device 83, variable display is performed in which the “◯” symbol and the “x” symbol as the second symbol are alternately lit. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the process of S623 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 14), the second symbol display device 83 is executed. The stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set by the process of S613 or the process of S618 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 14) after ending the variable display. (Lighting display).

After that, it is determined whether or not the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008), and if the power outage occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: No), the power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 SG1 is not output and the power supply is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the main process this time (S1009). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1009: Yes), the process is shifted to S1001, and each process after S1001 described above is repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main process this time (S1009: No), the first is within the period until the predetermined time is reached, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is reached. 1 The initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1010, S1011).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1010). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. .. Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1002 (S1011).

Here, since the execution time of each process of S1001 to S1007 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated at random, and similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can also be updated at random.

Further, in the process of S1008, if the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: Yes), the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process shown in FIG. 16 has been executed, the process when the power is cut off after S1012 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1012), and a power off command indicating that the power is cut off is issued to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). Is transmitted (S1013). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is saved (S1014), the access of the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1015), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203.

The process of S1008 is performed at the end of a series of processes corresponding to the state change of the game performed in S1001 to S1007, or at the end of one cycle of the processes of S1010 and S1011 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main control device 110, the power off occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power cut state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. It can be started from the process of S1001. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1001 as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process. Therefore, in the process when the power is cut off, the stack pointer is used in the initial setting process (S901) without saving the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 to the stack area or saving the value of the stack pointer. By setting a predetermined value (initial value), the process of S1001 can be started. Therefore, the control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

<Regarding the control process by the voice lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 to 24. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on and a main process that is executed after the start-up process.

First, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, the initial setting process associated with the power-on is executed (S1201). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is turned on, the power-off processing of S1318 (see FIG. 20) is caused by a momentary voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called "instantaneous power failure") in this startup processing. ) Is started in the middle of execution (S1202). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 20, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the power cutoff command from the main control device 110 (see S1315 in FIG. 20), the voice lamp control device 113 executes the power cutoff process of S1318. The power off processing flag is turned on before the power off processing is executed, and the power off processing flag is turned off after the power off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power off processing of S1318 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power off processing flag.

If the power off processing flag is off (S1202: No), the start-up process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power is turned off in S1318. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started by resetting only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110). be. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1203).

Confirmation of data corruption in RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S1206. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area can be checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data corruption in the RAM 223, and conversely, if it is not "55AAh", the data corruption in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If the data corruption of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1203: Yes), the process proceeds to S1204 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data corruption in RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1203: No), the process proceeds to S1208.

If the start-up process is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power off). (From), it is determined that the data of the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1203: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1204. On the other hand, the start-up process this time was started after the execution of the power-off process of S1318 was completed after a momentary power failure occurred, or was reset only to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. Since the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1203: No), and the data shifts to S1208.

If the power off processing flag is on (S1202: Yes), the start-up process this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and during the execution of the power off process in S1318, the voice lamp control device 113 The MPU 221 of the above was reset and started. In such a case, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct because the power off processing is being executed. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process is shifted to S1204 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the process of S1204, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S1204). As a check method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether or not it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", then "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". By this read / write check of RAM 223, all the storage areas of RAM 223 are cleared to 0.

If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1205: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data (S1206). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1205: No), the abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified (S1207), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the indicator lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You may do it.

In the process of S1208, it is determined whether or not the power off flag is turned on (S1208). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process in S1318 is executed (see S1317 in FIG. 20). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S1318 is executed, the process of S1208 is reached with the power-off flag turned on because the start-up process is instantaneous. This is a case where the power is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power cutoff process of S1318 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1208: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared in order to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1209), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1210), and then an interrupt is interrupted. Set the permission (S1211) and move to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main control device 110.

On the other hand, the process of S1208 is reached with the power off flag turned off because the start-up process of this time was started after, for example, the power supply was completely shut off, so that the process of S1208 via the processes of S1204 to S1206 was started. This is a case where the processing is reached, or only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S1208: No), the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, S1209, is skipped, the process is shifted to S1210, the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1210), and then interrupt permission is set. Then (S1211), the process shifts to the main process.

The reason for skipping the clearing process of S1209 is that when the processing of S1208 is reached via the processing of S1204 to S1206, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the processing of S1204. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the voice lamp control device 113 This is because the control of can be continued.

Next, with reference to FIG. 20, the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main process was started or since the process of S1301 this time was executed (S1301), and 1 msec or more has elapsed. If not (S1301: No), the process proceeds to S1311 without performing the processes of S1302 to S1310. In the process of S1301, it is determined whether or not 1 msec has elapsed because S1302 to S1310 are mainly processes related to display (effect), and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). , S1311, the variable display setting process, the command determination process of S1312, and the process of updating the counter values of S1313 and S1314 are preferably executed in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S1312 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of reception of the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and by executing the processing of S1311 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process. Based on the above, settings related to variable effects can be made without delay.

If 1 msec or more has passed in the process of S1301 (S1301: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S1303 to S1312 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1302). ). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the indicator lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1308 described later (S1303), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1304). The power-on notification process notifies that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Will be. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that the power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process shifts to the process of S1305 without performing the notification by the power on notification process.

In the process of S1305, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the hold quantity display update process is executed (S1306). In the customer waiting effect processing, when a predetermined time elapses when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player, a setting is made to switch the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen, and the setting is displayed as a command. It is transmitted to the device 114. In the hold quantity display update process, a process of turning on the hold lamp (not shown) is performed according to the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b.

After that, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S1307). In this frame button input monitoring / effect processing, the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player is pressed in order to enhance the effect is monitored, and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is a process for setting to perform an effect. The details of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S1307) will be described later with reference to FIG. 23.

When the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is completed, the lamp editing process is executed (S1308), and then the sound editing / output processing is executed (S1309). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the like are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the process of S1309, the liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1310), and the process proceeds to the process of S1311. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp editing process of S1308 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. The sound editing / output processing of S1309 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

In the process of S1311, a command determination process for performing a process according to a command received from the main control device 110 is performed (S1311). Details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, after this command determination process (FIG. 21, S1311), the variable display setting process is executed (S1312). In the variation display setting process, a display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to execute the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the processing of S1312 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1315). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S1315 (S1315: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing in-progress flag are turned on (S1317), and the power-off process is executed (S1318). After executing the power off processing, the power off processing flag is turned off (S1319), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power cutoff process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. In addition, the memory of the power failure occurrence information is also deleted.

On the other hand, if the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1315 (S1315: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1316), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1316: No), the process returns to the process of S1301 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1316: Yes), the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, so that the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, he / she can call a clerk in the hall or the like and ask for repair of the pachinko machine 10. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

Next, the command determination process (S1311) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 21. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S1311). This command determination process (S1311) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 20) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main control device 110. .. Further, in this process, when the reserved ball number command is received from the main control device 110, the third symbol display device 81 also determines the start of the continuous advance notice effect.

In the command determination process, first, the first unprocessed command received from the main control device 110 is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110. It is determined whether or not the command has been performed (S1401). When the variation pattern command is received (S1401: Yes), the variation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S1402), and the variation pattern type is extracted from the received variation pattern command (S1403). After that, the SW effect scenario is selected based on the extracted fluctuation pattern and the SW effect pattern table (222a), and the SW effective time set in the scenario is set (S1404). After that, it returns to the main process. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when the variation display setting process (see FIG. 22) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern type.

On the other hand, if the variation pattern command has not been received (S1401: No), then it is determined whether or not the stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1405). Then, when the stop type command is received (S1405: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1406), the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1407), and the main Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when the variable display setting process (see FIG. 22) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variation effect.

On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S1405: No), then it is determined whether or not the hold ball number command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1408). Then, when the hold ball number command is received (S1408: Yes), the value included in the received hold ball number command, that is, the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c of the main controller 110 (special symbol). The number of holdings N) of the fluctuation display in the above is extracted and stored in the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1409). Further, in the process of S1409, a display holding ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the value of the updated special symbol holding ball number counter 223b is set. After the processing of S1409 is completed, the process returns to the main processing.

Here, the hold ball number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 when the ball wins the first ball opening 64 (starting prize) or when a special symbol lottery is performed, so that the starting winning is won. Is detected, or every time a special symbol lottery is performed, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is set by the processing of S1409 to the special symbol reserved ball number counter of the main control device 110. It can be adjusted to the value of 203c. Therefore, even if the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, the start winning prize is detected or special. At the time of the symbol lottery, the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 can be modified to match the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c of the main control device 110. When the process of S1408 is executed, a display hold ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b is set. As a result, in the display control device 114, the reserved ball number symbol corresponding to the reserved ball number is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In the process of S1408, when the reserved ball number command is not received (S1408: No), then it is determined whether or not the winning information command is received from the main control device 110 (S1410). Then, when the winning information command is received (S1410: Yes), the winning information indicated by the received winning command is stored in the winning information storage area 223a (S1411). Here, in the winning information storage area 223a, winning information such as a hit / fail determination result of each reserved ball and a jackpot type is stored for each reserved ball.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1410 that the winning command has not been received (S1410: No), the process corresponding to the other command is executed (S1419).

Next, with reference to FIG. 22, the variation display setting process (S1312) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing this variation display setting process (S1312). This variation display setting process (S1312) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 20) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and the variation effect is executed in the third symbol display device 81. A display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110.

In the variation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the variation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is on (S1501). Then, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is not on (that is, it is off) (S1501: No), the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110, so the process of S1506 is started. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is on (S1501: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223c is turned off (S1502), and then the fluctuation pattern is processed in S1403 of the command determination process (see FIG. 21). The variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the command is acquired from RAM 223 (S1503).

Then, based on the acquired variation pattern type, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1504). By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

Next, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted (S1505). In the process of S1505, the data stored in the first area to the fourth area of the winning information storage area 223a is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted such as 1st area → execution area, 2nd area → 1st area, 3rd area → 2nd area, 4th area → 3rd area. After shifting the data, the process proceeds to S1506.

In the process of S1506, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223d provided in the RAM 233 is on (S1506). When it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S1506: No), the stop type command has not been received from the main controller 110, so this variation display Finish the setting process and return to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is on (S1506: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d is turned off (S1507), and then in the process of S1407 of the command determination process (see FIG. 20), The stop type in the variation effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1508).

In the process of S1509, a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated based on the set stop type, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1509). .. When the display control device 114 receives the display stop type command, the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled.

Next, with reference to FIG. 23, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S1307) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment will be described. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S1307).

In the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (FIG. 23, S1307), first, it is determined whether or not the value stored in the SW effective time storage area 223g is greater than 0, that is, during the SW effective time (S1601). It should be noted that this SW effective time indicates that when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, it is a time for determining that the operation is valid. In the process of S1601, when it is determined that the SW is out of the effective time (S1601: Yes), the SW press count counter 223e is reset to 0, which is the initial value (S1602). After that, this process ends. The SW press count counter 223e is a counter value for counting the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed during the SW effective time. In this way, when the SW is outside the valid time, the number of times the SW is pressed during the SW effective time can be accurately counted by resetting the SW pressing counter 223e to the initial value.

On the other hand, in the process of S1601, when it is determined that the SW is in the effective time (S1601: No), the value of the SW effective time storage area 223 g is subtracted by the elapsed time and updated (S1603). It is determined whether the frame button 22 is pressed (S1604). If it is determined that the frame button 22 is not pressed (S1604: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1604, when it is determined that the frame button 22 is pressed (S1604: Yes), the SW effective time is acquired from the SW effective time storage area 223 g (S1605).

The value of the SW press count counter 223e is added by 1 to update. Next, the lottery probability setting process is executed (S1607). Here, in the lottery probability setting process (S1607), a process of setting the lottery probability in the lottery of the effect to be displayed based on the pressing of the frame button 22 is executed based on the current SW effective time.

Here, the lottery probability setting process (S1607) will be described with reference to FIG. 24. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing this lottery probability setting process (S1607). In the lottery probability setting process (FIG. 24, S1607), first, it is determined whether the SW effective time is 1 second or less remaining (S1701). When it is determined that the remaining SW effective time is 1 second or less (S1701: Yes), the lottery probability is set to 1/2 (S1702). Here, when the lottery probability is set to 1/2, the value from 0 to 99 among the values of the effect counter 223f (0 to 199) is set as the winning value.

It is determined whether the value of the SW press count counter 223e is 20 or more (S1703). When it is determined that the value of the SW press count counter 223e is 20 or more (S1703: Yes), the lottery probability is set to 1/1 (S1704). Here, all the values of the effect counter 223f are set as hit values. After that, this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1703, when it is determined that the SW press count counter 223e is less than 20, (S1703: No), this process is terminated.

Next, in the process of S1701, when it is determined that the SW effective time is not 1 second or less, it is determined whether the SW effective time is 2 seconds or less (S1705). When it is determined that the SW effective time is 2 seconds or less (S1705: Yes), the lottery probability is set to 1/4 (S1706). Here, among the values of the effect counter 223f, the values from 0 to 49 are set as the winning values. It is determined whether the value of the SW press count counter 223e is 10 or more (S1707). When it is determined that the value of the SW press count counter 223e is 10 or more (S1707: Yes), the lottery probability is set to 1/2 (S1708). Here, the same process as the process of S1702 is executed. After that, this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1707, when it is determined that the value of the SW press count counter 223e is less than 10 (S1707: No), this process is terminated.

Further, in the process of S1705, when it is determined that the SW effective time is not 2 seconds or less (S1705: No), the lottery probability is set to 1/5 (S1709). Here, in the process of setting the lottery probability to 1/5, a value from 0 to 39 among the values of the effect counter 223f is set as a winning value. After that, this process ends.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the display mode is changed when the frame button 22 is pressed according to the remaining time of the SW effective time (in the present embodiment, the indicators shown in FIGS. 5A to 5B are displayed. The lottery probability of executing the lottery of whether or not to raise) is set. The lottery probability is set so that the probability of winning increases as the SW effective time decreases. As a result, when the frame button 22 is continuously operated during the SW effective time to raise the indicator shown in FIG. 5A, and the remaining time of the SW effective time is large, the winning lottery probability Is set low, so the indicator can be difficult to raise. On the other hand, when the SW effective time is reduced, the winning lottery probability is set high, so that the indicator can be easily set to rise. Therefore, the player can enjoy the effect of operating the frame button 22 by fully utilizing the SW effective time.

Further, in the present embodiment, if the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed exceeds a predetermined number of times. It is configured to set a high winning lottery probability. As a result, the hit probability is set high for the player who continuously presses the frame button 22 in a short period of time, and the player can easily operate the frame button 22 to make an advantageous display. I can remind you. Therefore, the player can enjoy playing the game by operating the frame button 22. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets tired of the game at an early stage.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 5A, the indicator is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the player operates the frame button 22 to raise the indicator, which is shown in FIG. As shown in (b), when the indicator is raised to the scale indicated as victory, an example of the SW effect for notifying the player that the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special symbol is a big hit has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this example. For example, a special symbol (third symbol) is set as a jackpot A and a jackpot B is set as a symbol that is difficult to identify, and the jackpot is notified by getting doublet. After that, the effect of continuously hitting the frame button 22 for a certain period of time is executed depending on whether the jackpot is A or B, and a lottery is executed every time the frame button 22 is operated. When the lottery is won, it may be configured by a SW effect that notifies the player whether it is a jackpot A or a jackpot B. Even in such a case, as in the present embodiment, by changing the lottery probability according to the SW effective time, it is possible to make the player press the frame button 22 by effectively utilizing the SW effective time. can.

Further, in the configuration of the present embodiment, since the lottery is executed every time the frame button 22 is pressed, the number of times the frame button 22 is determined to be a hit can be randomized. In some cases, it may be determined to be a hit at the first time, so it is possible to perform an effect that gives the player unexpectedness. Therefore, various patterns can be entertained by the player, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored at an early stage.

Returning to FIG. 23, the description will be continued. When the lottery probability setting process (S1607) is executed, the value of the effect counter 223f is acquired based on the lottery probability set in the process of the lottery probability setting process (S1607), and the lottery is executed (S1608). It is determined whether the lottery result is a win (S1609). If the lottery result is incorrect (S1609: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the lottery result is a hit (S1609: Yes), it is determined whether the hit / fail determination result of the special symbol currently changing is a big hit (S1610). When it is determined that the hit / fail determination result is a big hit (S1610: Yes), it is determined whether or not to make one notification (S1611). Here, it is determined that the value of the acquired effect counter is any of 0 to 5. If it is determined that one notification is to be made (S1612: Yes), a hit gauge effect command for display is set (S1612). After that, the value of the SW effective time counter 223g is reset to 0, which is the initial value, and the value of the SW pressing count counter 223e is reset to 0 (S1613). After that, this process ends.

In this way, if the lottery for executing the production is executed and the winner is won, the lottery for one notification is executed, and if the lottery for one notification is won, the indicator is raised to MAX and displayed. The hit gauge production command is set. Therefore, the player can be shown an effect in which the indicator suddenly becomes MAX (see FIG. 5B). Therefore, since it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected effect, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game at an early stage.

On the other hand, in the process of S1611, when it is determined that the one-shot notification lottery is out of order (S1611: No), the value of the SW press count counter 223e is equal to or more than the upper limit value (30 times or more in this embodiment). (S1614). When it is determined that the value of the SW press count counter 223e is equal to or greater than the upper limit value (S1614: Yes), the process of S1612 is executed. As a result, as shown in FIG. 5 (b), the indicator rises to the scale indicated by the victory, and it is notified that the jackpot is a big hit.

On the other hand, in the process of S1614, when the SW press press counter 223e determines that it is less than the upper limit value (S1614: No), the process of S1615 is executed. Further, in the process of S1610, when it is determined that the hit / fail determination result is incorrect (S1610: No), the process of S1615 is executed. In the process of S1615, a display gauge effect command indicating the scale of the indicator corresponding to the value of the SW press count counter 223e is set (S1615).

In the present embodiment, the value of the SW press count counter 223e is set to scale 1 for 1 to 5, scale 2 for 6 to 9, scale 3 for 10 to 15, scale 4 for 16 to 19, and scale 5 for 20 to 29. NS. In the present embodiment, the indicator is configured to be raised in correspondence with the value of the SW press count counter 223e, but the present invention is not limited to this, and up to the scale before the jackpot (scale 5 in the present embodiment) is displayed. It may be configured to increase by one each time the lottery of the SW effect is won. With this configuration, the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed can be set to rise at random. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a different production pattern each time. In the present embodiment, the process executed by the display control device 114 is already known, and therefore detailed illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

<About the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 25 to 29. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above, the configuration in which the SW effective time can be effectively used by configuring the lottery probability of the SW effect to be changed according to the SW effective time has been described.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, when the SW effective time is equal to or less than a predetermined time, the value of the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed (SW pressing number counter 223e) is equal to or more than the predetermined number of times. For example, it differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in that it is configured to extend the SW effective time. The same elements as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

<About the electrical configuration in the second embodiment>
In the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment, the SW lottery extension flag 223h is added to the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 with respect to the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. There is. Since the other configurations are the same as those of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The SW lottery extension flag 223h is a flag indicating that the SW effective time has been extended and set. The SW lottery extension flag 223h is set to off in the initial state when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the process of S1636 of the lottery probability setting process 2 (FIG. 28, S1630) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, when the SW effective time is extended and set, it is set to ON. Further, it is set to off in the processing of S1620 and S1640 of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (FIG. 27, S1320).

<Regarding the control process by the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment>
Next, the control process executed by the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 26 to 29. In the second embodiment, the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is changed from the first embodiment. As for other processes, the same processes as those in the first embodiment are executed, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding the control process by the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment>
Next, the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 26 to 29. In the second embodiment, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (FIG. 23, S1307) is changed to the frame button input monitoring / effect process 2 (FIG. 27, S1320) with respect to the first embodiment. As for other processes, the same processes as those in the first embodiment are executed, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 27, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 2 (S1320) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 2 (S1320). The frame button input monitoring / effect processing 2 (FIG. 27, S1320) in the second embodiment is a lottery probability setting process (FIG. 27, S1307) with respect to the frame button input monitoring / effect process (FIG. 23, S1307) in the first embodiment. 24, S1607) has been changed to the lottery probability setting process 2 (FIGS. 28, S1630), and the processes of S1620 and S1640 have been added, respectively. As for other processes, the same processes as those in the first embodiment are executed, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the process of S1602, when the SW effective time is 0, the process of S1620 is executed after setting the SW press count counter 223e to 0. In the process of S1620, the SW extension flag 223h is set to off (S1620). After that, this process ends.

Further, when the process of S1606 is executed, the lottery probability setting process 2 is executed (S1630). The lottery probability setting process 2 (S1630) will be described with reference to FIG. 28. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the lottery probability setting process 2 (S1630).

In the lottery probability setting process 2 (FIG. 28, S1630), first, it is determined whether the SW effective time is 3 seconds or less (S1631). When it is determined that the SW effective time is longer than the remaining 3 seconds (S1631: No), the lottery probability is set to 1/10 (S1632). Here, among the values of the effect counter 223f, values from 0 to 66 are set as winning values.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the SW effective time is 3 seconds or less remaining (S1631: Yes), it is determined whether the SW lottery extension flag 223h is off (S1633). If it is determined that the SW lottery extension flag 223h is ON (S1633: No), the process of S1638 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the SW lottery extension flag 223h is off in the process of S1633 (S1633: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the SW press press counter 223e is 30 or more (S1634). When it is determined that the value of the SW press count counter 223e is less than 30 (S1634: No), the process of S1638 is executed.

On the other hand, in the process of S1634, when it is determined that the value of the SW press count counter 223e is 30 or more (S1634: Yes), 5 seconds are added to the SW effective time set in the SW effective time storage area 223g. And set (S1635). The SW lottery extension flag 223h is set to ON (S1636). A display valid time extension command is set (S1637). By this command, as shown in FIG. 6B, the indicator increases to the right so that the indicator indicating the SW effective time displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can determine that the SW effective time has increased. It is displayed in different colors. Since the added amount is displayed on the indicator in a display mode having a different color or pattern as shown by b, the player can easily recognize that the SW effective time has been extended. Further, as shown in FIG. 6B, the third symbol display device 81 displays a character "extension service !!" that notifies the player that the SW effective time has been added and extended. As a result, the player can easily recognize that the SW effective time has increased.

In the process of S1638, the lottery probability is set to 1/3 (S1638). After that, this process ends. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the SW effective time is 3 seconds or less remaining, the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed up to that point is determined, and if it is the predetermined number or more, the SW effective time is extended. As a result, the player who frequently presses the frame button 22 can enjoy operating the frame button 22 more because the SW effective time is extended and the period for operating the frame button 22 is further increased. Can be done. On the other hand, for the player who does not operate the frame button 22 so much, the SW effective time is not extended and the SW effective time ends. Therefore, it is possible to produce an effect that matches the player's playing style.

In the present embodiment, the SW effective time is extended when the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed is a predetermined number of times or more, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the result of determining whether or not the special symbol is changing is a big hit. In some cases, it may be set to be longer than in the case of disengagement. In this case, the lottery may be performed regardless of the number of times the SW is pressed or with a predetermined lottery probability based on the number of times the SW is pressed, and the SW effective time may be extended when the lottery is won. With this configuration, even a player who plays a game without operating the frame button 22 operates the frame button 22 with the expectation that the winning / failing judgment result will be a big hit by extending the SW effective time. Can be done. Therefore, the taste of the game can be improved and the player can be more entertained.

Returning to FIG. 27, the description will be continued. When the process of S1613 is executed, the process of S1640 is executed. In the process of S1640, the SW lottery extension flag 223h is set to off (S1640). As a result, since the SW lottery extension flag is set to off after the SW effect is completed, it is possible to suppress a problem that the SW effective time is extended many times.

Next, with reference to FIG. 29, the lottery probability setting process 3 (S1650) will be described as a modified example of the second embodiment. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the lottery probability setting process 3 (S1650) in the modified example of the second embodiment. In the lottery probability setting process 3 (FIG. 29, S1650) in the modified example of the second embodiment, the process of S1637 is changed to the process of S1657 with respect to the lottery probability setting process 2 (FIG. 28, S1630) in the second embodiment. has been changed. The processes from S1651 to S1656 and S1658 of the lottery probability setting process 3 (FIG. 29, S1650) are executed in the same manner as the processes of S1631 to S1636 and S1638 of the lottery probability setting process 2 (FIG. 28, S1630). ..

In the process of S1657, a variable display command instructing the SW effective time display to be set to 1/5 is set. As a result, the display control device 114 changes the indicator of the SW effective time according to the decrease of the SW effective time, and the variable speed is set to 1/5. As a result, the variable speed (decrease speed) of the indicator indicating the SW effective time is set to be slow even if the indicator is not displayed to be increased as in the second embodiment, so that the player can extend the SW effective time. I can recognize that.

<About the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 30 to 37. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above, the configuration in which the SW effective time can be effectively used by configuring the lottery probability of the SW effect to be changed according to the SW effective time has been described.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, when the frame button 22 is pressed to display the SW effect and the SW effect is completed, the remaining time of the SW effective time is added to a plurality. It differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in that it is configured to provide the player with a special effect (in this embodiment, a mission effect) set by the remaining time of the SW effective time in the SW effect of the times. .. The same elements as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

<About the display mode of the SW effect of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 30A to 30B, an example of the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the SW effect of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment will be described. In FIG. 30A, there is a comment (character) indicating the degree of expectation of the special symbol in which the SW effect in the third embodiment is set and the frame button 22 is operated by the player during the SW effective time and is changing. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode when it is displayed. At the lower right of the third symbol display device 81, a symbol schematically showing the frame button 22 and an indicator M capable of identifying the remaining time of the SW effective time are displayed. The portion indicated by a of the indicator indicates the remaining time of the SW effective time. Further, on the left side of the display mode of the indicator M, a time indicator T indicating the total status of the remaining time of the SW effective time when the frame button 22 is pressed and the SW effect is completed is displayed. The remaining time of the SW effective time is totaled, and the indicator rises clockwise according to the totaled time.

FIG. 30B is a diagram showing a display mode when the total value of the remaining time of the SW effective time reaches the upper limit value and the mission effect is executed corresponding to the total time. When the remaining time reaches the upper limit, the characters "Mission rush" are displayed, and the characters "Reach with 7 within 3 minutes !!" are displayed to indicate the mission content. As a result, the player can recognize that the hit / fail determination result of the special symbol becomes a big hit when the reach display mode is set with the seven symbols. The remaining time of the SW effective time is the time indicated by a displayed by the indicator M when the frame button 22 is pressed, and the player can easily recognize how much SW effective time remains. Can be made to.

As a result, the player presses the frame button 22 at an early timing in order to end the SW effect with as much SW effective time as possible when the SW effect is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to allow the player to participate in the game more, and it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets bored with the game at an early stage.

<About the electrical configuration in the third embodiment>
The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment is displayed on the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 with respect to the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. And indicator setting data 222e are added respectively.

The display lottery table 222c is a data table for determining whether or not to execute a predetermined effect in the SW effect. FIG. 31 (c) is a schematic view schematically showing the display lottery table 222c. The value of the effect counter 223f is assigned to each of the winning and losing of the effect lottery according to the result of determining whether or not the special symbol is changing. As shown in FIG. 31 (c), when the hit / fail determination result of the special symbol is a big hit, it is configured so that it is easier to be determined as a hit than when it is a miss.

The comment selection table 222d is a data table for selecting the display content of the comment notice (see FIG. 30A) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the SW effect shown in FIG. 32A.

As shown in FIG. 32B, the indicator setting table 222e is a data table for determining the display mode of the time indicator T corresponding to the total time of the remaining time of the SW effective time. A variable amount for changing the display of the indicator is set according to the total time of the remaining time. The color of the time indicator T is changed up to the angle set by the indicator angle, and the player can recognize the total value of the remaining time.

Further, a remaining time storage area 223i and a mission flag 223j are added to the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, respectively.

The remaining time storage area 223i is a storage area in which the remaining time of the SW effective time is stored. When the comment notice is set and the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the remaining time of the SW effective time at that time is stored in the remaining time storage area 223i.

The mission flag 223j is a flag indicating that the mission effect is being executed. When the mission effect is set, this mission flag 223j is set to on.

Since the other configurations are the same as those of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 33, the variation pattern selection table of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 33A is a diagram schematically showing a variation pattern selection table for selecting a variation pattern of a special symbol in a normal time (other than a mission effect). A value of the effect counter 223f is set for each variation pattern, and when the value and the acquired value of the effect counter 223f match, a comment notice, which is a SW effect, is set. FIG. 33B is a variation pattern selection table for selecting a variation pattern of a special symbol when a mission effect is set. Even when the mission effect is set, there is no substitute for the variation time of the selected variation pattern, and only the display mode displayed by the third symbol display device 81 is configured to be the mission effect content. The SW effect is not selected during the mission effect.

<Control processing by the voice lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment>
Next, the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 34 to 37. In the control process executed in the third embodiment, the command determination process (FIG. 21, S1311) is added to the command determination process 2 (FIG. 34, S1330) with respect to the first embodiment, and the frame button input monitoring / effect process is performed. (FIG. 23, S1307) has been changed to frame button input monitoring / effect processing 3 (FIG. 36, S1340), respectively. As for other processes, the same processes as those in the first embodiment are executed, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the command determination process 2 (S1330) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 34. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the command determination process 2 (S1330). In the command determination process 2 (FIG. 34, S1330) in the third embodiment, the processes of S1402 to S1404 are deleted from the command determination process (FIG. 21, S1311) in the first embodiment, and the process of S1420 is added. Has been done. As for other processes, the same processes as those in the first embodiment are executed, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 35, the variation pattern selection process (S1420), which is one process in the command determination process 2 (FIG. 34, S1330) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment. Will be described. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing this fluctuation pattern selection process (S1420).

In the variation pattern selection process (FIG. 35, S1330), first, the variation start flag 223c is set to ON (S1421). It is determined whether the mission flag 223j is set to ON (S1422). When it is determined that the mission flag 223j is on (S1422: Yes), the variation pattern is selected from the variation pattern selection table for the mission (see FIG. 33B) based on the received command (S1423). .. After that, this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S1422, when it is determined that the mission flag 223j is off (S1422: No), the fluctuation pattern is extracted from the received command (S1424). Here, the variation pattern is selected (extracted) from the variation pattern selection table shown in FIG. 33 (a). Based on the extracted fluctuation pattern and the value of the effect counter 223f, the notice of the SW effect is determined, and the SW effective time is set (S1425). Here, it is determined whether or not the acquired value of the effect counter 223f matches the value of the effect counter 223f set in the selected fluctuation pattern, and if they match, the comment notice which is the SW effect is selected.

Next, with reference to FIG. 36, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 3 (S1340) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 3 (S1340).

In the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 3 (FIG. 36, S1340), first, it is determined whether the SW effective time is 0 (S1661). When it is determined that the SW effective time is 0 (S1661: Yes), it is determined whether the mission flag 223j is on (S1662). When it is determined that the mission flag 223j is on (S1662: Yes), the remaining time set in the remaining time storage area 223i is subtracted by the elapsed time (S1663). It is determined whether the value stored in the remaining time storage area 223i is 0 (S1664). When it is determined that the value stored in the remaining time storage area 223i is 0 (S1664: Yes), the mission flag 223j is set to off (S1665). On the other hand, when it is determined that the mission flag is off in the processing of S1662 (S1662: No), and when it is determined that the value stored in the remaining time storage area 223i in the processing of S1664 is not 0 (S1664: No). No), this process ends.

Further, in the process of S1661, when it is determined that the SW effective time is not 0 (S1661: No), the SW effective time is subtracted (S1666). It is determined whether the frame button 22 is pressed (S1667). If it is determined that the frame button 22 is not pressed (S1667: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1667, when it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed (S1667: Yes), the display SW pressing command is set (S1668). By this command, the display control device 114 is notified that the frame button 22 has been pressed, and the display mode displayed by the display control device 114 is changed.

The remaining time of the SW effective time is stored in the remaining time storage area 223i (S1669). A comment to be displayed is selected from the comment selection table 222d (see FIG. 32 (a)) based on the value of the effect counter 223f and the result of the hit / fail determination (S1670). A display comment display command is set based on the comment selected in the process of S1670. By this command, the display control device 114 is notified of the comment displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The SW effective time stored in the SW effective time storage area 223g is set to 0 (S1672). After that, the mission setting process is executed (S1673), and this process ends.

This mission setting process (S1673) will be described with reference to FIG. 37. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing this mission setting process (S1673).

In the mission setting process (FIG. 37, S1673), first, it is determined whether the remaining time stored in the remaining time storage area 223i is a value larger than 0 (S1731). When it is determined that the remaining time is a value larger than 0 (S1731: Yes), it is determined whether the remaining time is equal to or greater than the upper limit value (180 seconds or more in this embodiment) (S1732). When it is determined that the remaining time is equal to or greater than the upper limit value (S1732: Yes), the time indicator T is set to MAX (S1733). The mission flag 223j is set to on (S1734). A display command indicating the display of the set indicator is set (S1735).

On the other hand, in the process of S1732, when it is determined that the remaining time is less than the upper limit value (S1732: No), the value of the effect counter 223f is acquired and the display lottery table 222c (see FIG. 31C) is executed. (S1736). It is determined whether the lottery result in S1736 is a win (S1737: Yes), and the process of S1733 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1737 that the lottery result of the process of S1736 is out of order (S1737: No), the time indicator T based on the remaining time is set (S1738). After that, the process of S1735 is executed to end this process. If it is determined that the remaining time is 0 in the process of S1731, the time indicator is set to 0 (S1739), and then the process of S1735 is executed.

In this way, when the SW effect is executed, the remaining time of the SW effective time is added and stored at the timing when the frame button 22 is pressed, and the special effect is executed at that time. Furthermore, by executing the display lottery, even if the total remaining time does not exceed the upper limit, by winning the display lottery, the indicator showing the total remaining time is displayed on MAX (maximum) for a special effect. Was configured to be set. As shown in FIG. 31 (c), this display lottery is set so that it can be easily determined as a hit when the hold memory contains a big hit, so that a special effect (mission effect) is achieved. The player can expect that it will be a big hit by executing. Therefore, it is possible to facilitate the game by operating the frame button 22 with the remaining SW effective time as much as possible, and it is possible to encourage the player to participate in the SW effect. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets tired of the game at an early stage.

<About the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 38 to 45. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above, the configuration in which the SW effective time can be effectively used by configuring the lottery probability of the SW effect to be changed according to the SW effective time has been described.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, a plurality of selection display modes are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the player operates the frame button 22 to select one of them. In this case, in order to prevent the frame button 22 from being continuously operated and it is not possible to know what kind of candidate was present other than the selected display mode, the frame button within a predetermined time after the selected display mode is displayed. When 22 is operated to make a selection decision, the first embodiment is configured so that the selected display mode and other displayed candidates are distinguished and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the form. The same elements as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

<About the display mode of the SW effect of the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment>
With reference to FIG. 38, in the opening display which is the start of the jackpot game in the fourth embodiment, the effect of the display mode in which the weapon to be used in the effect display during the jackpot game is selected will be described. FIG. 38A shows an example of the selection display mode of the weapon selected by the player in the opening display mode in the case of a big hit. In the present embodiment, in addition to the frame button 22, operation buttons (not shown) that enable left and right selection operations are provided on both sides of the frame button 22. The operation buttons are electrically connected to the input / output port 225 of the voice lamp control device 113 like the frame button 22.

In the present embodiment, in the jackpot game, the effect of fighting the enemy is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the round display during the jackpot game, and when the main character wins the battle, the jackpot type is jackpot A. Is executed to notify the player. The player can select the weapon used by the main character in the battle. In the example of FIG. 38 (a), a saber, a cannon, and dynamite are displayed, and a cursor indicating selection is displayed below the saber and the dynamite. When you operate the operation buttons, the cursor moves left and right to switch the weapon selection. Then, when the frame button 22 is pressed, the weapon on which the cursor is displayed is selected.

Here, if the frame button 22 is continuously pressed at the start of the jackpot game, or if the frame button 22 is pressed by mistake as an operation button, the weapon selection is executed in a short time. There was a problem that it was not possible to know what was displayed in other candidates. In such a case, for example, if the expectation of being a jackpot A is set to be different depending on the type of weapon candidate that can be selected, what was the display of the candidate is a game. It is very important information for the person.

Therefore, if the selection is decided within a short time (within 1 second in the present embodiment) after the selection display mode is displayed, as shown in FIG. 38 (b), the selection is decided and others. It is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 so that it can be distinguished from the displayed candidate.

With this configuration, it is possible to confirm what kind of candidates are displayed even if the player decides the selection within a short time without carefully confirming the selection display mode. Further, when the player selects after a certain period of time, the candidate is not displayed, so that the candidate is always displayed on the third symbol display device 81, which is troublesome. ..

<About the electrical configuration in the fourth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 39, the electrical configuration in the fourth embodiment will be described. In the fourth embodiment, the opening display mode selection table 222f is added to the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 with respect to the first embodiment. Since the other configurations are the same as those of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The opening display mode is a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the start of the jackpot. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 38A, in the opening display, the selection display mode of the weapon used in the battle effect during the jackpot game is selected as the opening display mode.

<Regarding the control process in the fourth embodiment>
Next, the control process executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 40 to 45.

First, in the first embodiment, the detailed processing of the jackpot control processing (S1004) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 40. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing this jackpot control process.

In the jackpot game process (FIG. 40, S1004), first, it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of the jackpot game (S1101). When it is determined that it is the start timing of the jackpot game (S1101: Yes), the opening command is set (S1102), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1101, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the jackpot (S1101: No), it is determined whether the jackpot game is in progress (S1103). If it is determined that the jackpot game is not in progress (S1103: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot game is in progress (S1103: Yes), it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1104).

When it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round (S1104: Yes), the wide opening direction 65 is opened (S1105), and a round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is set (S1106). After that, this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round (S1104: No), it is determined whether the closing condition of the large opening 65 is satisfied (S1107). The closing condition of the large opening 65 determines whether the opening time (30 seconds) has elapsed or whether 10 game balls have won a prize in the large opening 65. When it is determined that the closing condition of the large opening 65 is satisfied (S1107: Yes), the large opening 65 is closed (S1108).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the closing condition of the large opening 65 is not satisfied (S1107: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1109). When it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1109: Yes), the ending command is set (S1110), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S1109: No), this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 41 to 45, the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described. In the control process in the fourth embodiment, the command determination process (FIG. 21, S1311) is combined with the command determination process 3 (FIG. 41, S1350) with respect to the first embodiment, and the frame button input monitoring / effect process (FIG. 23). , S1307) have been changed to the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 4 (FIGS. 43, S1360), respectively. Since other processes have the same configuration as that of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the command determination process 3 (S1350) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 41. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the command determination process 3 (S1350). In the command determination process 4 (FIG. 41, S1350) in the fourth embodiment, each process from S1412 to S1413 is added to the command determination process (FIG. 21, S1311) in the first embodiment. For other processes, the same processes as those in the first embodiment are executed.

In the process of S1410, when it is determined that the winning command has not been received (S1410: No), it is determined whether or not the opening command has been received (S1412). If it is determined that the opening command has been received (S1412: Yes), the opening process is executed (S1413). After that, this process ends. This opening process (S1413) will be described with reference to FIG. 42. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing this opening process (S1413).

In the opening process (FIG. 42, S1413), first, the opening effect display mode is selected from the opening effect display mode selection table 222f (see FIG. 39) based on the value of the effect counter 223f (S1511). Set a display command indicating the selected opening effect display mode. By this command, the selected opening display mode is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, with reference to FIG. 43, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 4 (S1360) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 4 (S1360).

In the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 4 (FIG. 43, S1360), first, it is determined whether the SW effective time is 0 (S1681). If it is determined that the SW effective time is 0 (S1681: Yes), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1681 when it is determined that the SW effective time is a value larger than 0 (S1681: No), the SW effective time is subtracted and updated (S1682). It is determined whether the frame button 22 is pressed (S1683). When it is determined that the frame button 22 is pressed (S1683: Yes), it is determined whether the frame button 22 is operated within 1 second (S1684). When it is determined that the frame button 22 is pressed within 1 second (S1684: Yes), a display command for displaying selection candidates on the third symbol display device 81 is set (S1685). On the other hand, if it is determined that the frame button 22 is not pressed within 1 second (S1684: No), the process of S1686 is executed.

In the process of S1686, a display command indicating a candidate selected by the cursor is set (S1686). After that, the SW effective time is reset to 0 (S1687), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1683, when it is determined that the frame button 22 is not pressed (S1683: No), it is determined whether the operation button (not shown) has been operated (S1688). When it is determined that the operation button has been operated (S1688: Yes), a display command for moving and displaying the cursor in the direction corresponding to the operation is set (S1689). On the other hand, in the process of S1688, when it is determined that the operation button 22 is not operated (S1688: No), this process is terminated.

In this way, when the frame button 22 is operated within 1 second after the SW effective time is set, it is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 so that the selection candidates displayed in the opening display mode can be seen. Is set. Therefore, even if the player mistakenly operates the device, it is possible to identify what is displayed in the selected display mode.

Next, with reference to FIG. 44, the customer waiting effect processing (S1305) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing this customer waiting effect processing (S1305).

In the customer waiting effect processing (FIG. 44, S1305), first, it is determined whether or not the demo screen display is being executed on the third symbol display device 81 (S1521). If it is determined that the demo screen display is displayed (S1521: Yes), the process during the demo screen display is executed (S1522). The process during display of the demo screen will be described with reference to FIG. 45. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the process (S1522) during display of the demo screen.

In the process of displaying the demo screen (FIG. 45, S1522), first, it is determined whether the frame button 22 is pressed (S1531). When it is determined that the frame button 22 is pressed (S1531: Yes), the display of the setting screen is set (S1532). A display command for notifying the display control device 114 of the display of the set setting screen is set (S1533).

Here, the setting screen is an operation button for the battle effect displayed during the jackpot game by the player, as shown in FIG. 39 (b), the ground battle fighting in the background of the ground and the underwater battle fighting in the background of the sea. This is a setting screen for operating and the frame button 22 to set according to the player's preference. With this configuration, it is possible to display a display mode that suits the player's taste during the jackpot game, and the player can be more entertained. In addition, the production can be diversified, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored at an early stage.

On the other hand, in the process of S1531, when it is determined that the frame button 22 is not pressed (S1531: No), the progress counter is incremented by 1 (S1534). Although not shown, the progress counter is a counter set in the other storage area 223z of the RAM of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and is used to count the elapsed time since the demo screen is displayed. It is a thing.

It is determined whether the progress counter is the upper limit value (5 minutes in this embodiment). When it is determined that the value of the progress counter is the upper limit value (S1535: Yes), the progress counter is reset to the initial value (S1536), and the battle effect setting is set to the default (ground battle in this embodiment). (S1537). A display command indicating the content set in the process of S1537 is set (S1538). After that, this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1535, when it is determined that the progress counter is less than the upper limit value (S1535: No), this process is terminated. The progress counter is reset to the initial value of 0 when the demo screen setting is canceled.

In this way, when the demo screen is set, the elapsed time is measured. Then, when the elapsed time reaches a predetermined time, the setting set in the pachinko machine 10 is set as the default. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 determines that the game has ended, and the frame button 22 resets the setting information set in the pachinko machine 10 to the default setting. Therefore, when a new player starts the game, the game is played in the state set by default, and the player can play the game with peace of mind.

In the present embodiment, when the setting is input to the pachinko machine 10, the setting screen is displayed based on the fact that the frame button 22 is pressed in the state of the demo screen. It may be configured so that the pachinko machine 10 is provided with an interface for setting.

<About the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 46 to 50. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above, the configuration in which the SW effective time can be effectively used by configuring the lottery probability of the SW effect to be changed according to the SW effective time has been described.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment, the number of times the frame button 22 is operated over a plurality of fluctuations in a predetermined period is stored, and when the number of times reaches the predetermined number of times, the background is set. It differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in that it is configured to change the mode. The same elements as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

<About the mode switching timing chart in the fifth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 46, a timing chart for switching the background mode using the frame button 22 executed in the fifth embodiment will be described. In FIG. 46 (a), the frame button 22 is pressed 50 times during the number of times the special symbol is changed from 10 to 20 times after the power is turned on to the jackpot game or the pachinko machine 10 (after the initial setting is made). The timing chart when the background mode is switched from the beach mode to the underwater mode based on the pressing is shown. In the configuration of the second embodiment, a predetermined background change lottery is executed at the timing when the number of times the special symbol is changed is between 10 and 20 times and the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed reaches 50 times. When the lottery is won, the background mode is set to switch from the beach mode to the underwater mode. Even if the lottery is missed, the lottery is executed again at the timing when the 51st time is pressed, and it is decided whether or not to change the background.

Further, the timing chart shown in FIG. 46B shows a modified example of the second embodiment. In the present embodiment, the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed is counted while the number of times the special symbol is changed is 10 to 20, and the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed at the timing when the number of times the special symbol is changed is 20 times. If the number of SW presses is 50 or more, the background change lottery is executed, and if it is won, the mode is switched to the underwater mode. Is configured to continue beach mode.

The period for counting the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed may be notified so that the player can understand it, or a random period may be provided by lottery so that the player does not know. good. In addition, when a big hit is stored in the winning / failing judgment result of the reserved ball of the reserved special symbol, the background mode can be switched by pressing the frame button 22 more than a predetermined number of times in a predetermined period. It may be configured as. Further, without notifying the jackpot A and the jackpot B, it is difficult to understand whether the current state is the probabilistic gaming state or the normal gaming state, and when the jackpot is in the probabilistic gaming state, in a predetermined period. , The background mode may be switched when the frame button 22 is operated more than a predetermined number of times.

Further, in the present embodiment, the lottery for whether or not to switch the background mode is executed, but the lottery is not limited to this, and the background mode may be changed without fail if the background mode is pressed more than a predetermined number of times.

With this configuration, by pressing the frame button 22 across a plurality of fluctuations of the special symbol, the player is given information that is advantageous to the player, such as the result of the hit / miss judgment and the current game state. It can be configured so that the taste of the game can be improved.

<About the electrical configuration in the fifth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 47, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment will be described. In the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment, the contents of ROM 222 and RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 110 are changed with respect to the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Since the other configurations are the same as those of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 47A, the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment has a background change lottery table 222g added to the first embodiment.

The background change lottery table 222g is a data table for executing a lottery for whether or not to switch the background mode. FIG. 47 (c) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the background change lottery table 222g. Depending on whether the winning information that is a big hit is stored in the winning information of the reserved ball stored in the winning information storage area 223a, the value of the production counter 223f is assigned according to whether the background mode is changed or not. ing. The probability of being drawn by changing the background is set higher in the case where the winning information contains the information that is a big hit than in the case where the information is not stored.

As a result, when the background mode is changed, the player can play the game with the expectation that a big hit will be stored in the reserved special symbol. Therefore, by continuously pressing the frame button 22, the information on the result of the hit / fail determination of the reserved ball can be identified, so that the player may be reminded to participate in the game by using the frame button 22 more. can. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

Further, as shown in FIG. 47B, a fluctuation number counter 223k and a background change counter 223m are added to the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment, respectively.

The fluctuation number counter 223k is a counter for counting the number of fluctuations of the special symbol after the jackpot game or after the power is turned on. The fluctuation number counter 223k is added and updated one by one in the process of S1430 of the command determination process 4 (S1370) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment. Although not shown, the initial value is reset to 0 based on the reception of the opening command. Also, when the power is turned on, the initial value of 0 is set in the initial setting.

The background change counter 223m is a counter for counting the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed during a predetermined period (in the present embodiment, the number of times the special symbol is changed is between 10 and 20 times). .. The background change counter 223m is updated by adding 1 in the process of S1692 of the background change process (FIG. 50, S1690) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment. Although not shown, the initial value of 0 is reset when the opening command is received. When the power is turned on, the initial value of 0 is set by the initial setting.

<Regarding the control process in the fifth embodiment>
Next, the control process executed by the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 48 to 50. In the fifth embodiment, the command determination process (FIG. 21, S1311) is combined with the command determination process 4 (FIG. 48, S1370) and the frame button input monitoring / effect process (FIG. 23, S1307) with respect to the first embodiment. Is changed to the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 5 (FIG. 49, S1380). As for other processes, the same processes as those in the first embodiment are executed, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the command determination process 4 (S1370) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 48. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the command determination process 4 (S1370). In the command determination process 4 (FIG. 48, S1370) in the fifth embodiment, the process of S1430 is added to the command determination process (FIG. 21, S1311) in the first embodiment. As for other processes, the same processes as those in the first embodiment are executed, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

After the process of S1404 is executed, the value of the fluctuation counter 223k is incremented by 1 and updated (S1430). In this way, since the value of the fluctuation count counter 223k is updated based on the reception of the fluctuation pattern command, the fluctuation count of the special symbol can be accurately counted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 49, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 5 (S1380) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 5 (S1380). The frame button input monitoring / effect processing 5 (FIG. 49, S1380) in the fifth embodiment is a background change process (S1690) with respect to the frame button input monitoring / effect process (FIG. 23, S1307) in the first embodiment. Has been added. As for other processes, the same processes as those in the first embodiment are executed, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

If it is determined that the SW effective time is 0 in the process of S1601 (S1601), the background change process is executed (S1690). Here, the background change process (S1690) will be described with reference to FIG. 50.

In the background change process (FIG. 50, S1690), first, it is determined whether the frame button 22 is pressed (S1691). When it is determined that the frame button 22 is pressed (S1691: Yes), the value of the background change counter 223m is added by 1 (S1692). It is determined that the value of the background change counter 223m is equal to or greater than the upper limit value (50 or more in this embodiment) (S1693).

If it is determined that the value is less than the upper limit (S1693: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the background change counter 223m is equal to or higher than the upper limit value (S1693: Yes), the value of the effect counter 223f is acquired and the background is changed from the background change lottery 222g (see FIG. 47 (c)). The lottery is executed (S1694). It is determined whether the lottery result executed in the process of S1694 is a win (with background change) (S1695). If it is determined that the lottery result is out of order (no background change) (S1695: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the lottery result is a win (S1695: Yes), the corresponding background mode is set (S1696). In the present embodiment, since the background modes of the beach mode and the underwater mode are set, the other background mode that is different from the currently set background is set. A display command indicating the set background mode is set (S1697). By this command, the display control device 114 switches the background displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

<About the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 51 to 58. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above, the configuration in which the SW effective time can be effectively used by configuring the lottery probability of the SW effect to be changed according to the SW effective time has been described.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment, the hit / fail judgment result of the special symbol stored on hold from the winning information storage area 223a is discriminated, and the discriminating result straddles the fluctuation of a plurality of special symbols. It differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in that the SW effect to be executed is configured to be executed. The same elements as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

<About setting the SW effective time in the sixth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 51, the setting of the SW effective time of the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 51 is a diagram showing an example in which the SW effective time is set when the third reserved ball is established in a state where the special symbol is changing and two reserved balls are stored. The hit / fail determination result of the third reserved ball is a big hit, and the SW effective time is set over the fluctuation of the special symbol of the third reserved ball from the fluctuation of the special symbol of the first reserved ball. Further, the SW effect shown in FIGS. 52 to 54 is set together with the setting of the SW effective time. As the SW effect, an indicator is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as shown in FIG. 52A, and the frame button 22 is pressed to raise the indicator.

While the special symbol corresponding to the first reserved ball shown in FIG. 51 is changing, the display mode as shown in FIG. 52A is displayed. In this case, the special symbol (third symbol) is reduced and displayed in the upper right of the display area of the third symbol display device 81. Then, as shown in FIG. 52 (b), the effect of continuously pressing the frame button 22 is continuously displayed even when the stop display is performed after the fluctuation time of the special symbol corresponding to the first reserved ball has elapsed. NS.

After that, even when the fluctuation of the second reserved ball shown in FIG. 51 is started, the effect of pressing the frame button 22 is executed as shown in FIG. 53 (a). During this period, the indicator M indicating the remaining time of the SW effective time is gradually decreased and displayed. FIG. 53B shows a display mode of the SW effect when the second holding ball is stopped and displayed. As will be described in detail later, the ceiling of the indicator is set for each change of the special symbol, and the ceiling is displayed so as to be raised based on the pressing of the frame button 22.

FIG. 54A shows a display mode of the SW effect when the special symbol corresponding to the third reserved ball shown in FIG. 51 is changing. When the frame button 22 is pressed, as shown in FIG. 54 (b), the indicator rises to the maximum value MAX and is displayed, and the player is notified in advance that the hit / fail judgment result is a big hit. NS.

As described above, in the configuration of the present embodiment, the SW effect is displayed across the fluctuations of a plurality of special symbols, so that it is possible to suppress the disappointment of the fluctuations of the special symbols whose hit / fail judgment results are out of order. Then, it is possible to have an expectation for a big hit against the subsequent fluctuation of the special symbol. Further, since the SW effect is set across a plurality of fluctuations, it is possible to give a margin to the SW effect, and it is possible to perform various effects.

<About the electrical configuration in the sixth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 55, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, a display lottery table 222c and a maximum value selection table 222h are added to the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 with respect to the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, respectively. There is.

Since the display lottery table 222c (see FIG. 31C) has the same configuration as that already described in the third embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The maximum value selection table 222h is a selection table for setting the maximum value of each fluctuation indicator in the SW effect. FIG. 55 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the maximum value selection table 222h. The scale of the maximum value is selected based on the value of the effect counter 223f for each fluctuation according to the result of the hit / fail determination.

Further, as shown in FIG. 55 (b), a SW effect flag 223n is added to the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the sixth embodiment. The SW effect flag 223n is a flag indicating that the SW effect is set. This SW effect flag 223n is set to ON when the SW effect is set in the process of S1458 of the winning command reception process (FIG. 57, S1450) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the sixth embodiment. Will be done. Further, it is set to off in the process of S1740 of the frame button input monitoring / effect process 6 (FIG. 58, S1530).

Since the other configurations are the same as the configurations of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding the control process in the sixth embodiment>
Next, the control process executed by the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 56 to 58. In the sixth embodiment, the command determination process (FIGS. 21, S1311) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is assigned to the command determination process 5 (FIG. 56, S1390) with respect to the first embodiment. The input monitoring / effect processing (FIG. 23, S1307) has been changed to the frame button input monitoring / effect process 6 (FIG. 58, S1530), respectively. As for other processes, the same processes as those in the first embodiment are executed, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the command determination process 5 (S1390) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 56. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the command determination process 5 (S1390). In the command determination process 5 (FIG. 56, S1390) in the sixth embodiment, the process of S1411 is changed to the process of S1450 with respect to the command determination process (FIG. 21, S1311) in the first embodiment. As for other processes, the same processes as those in the first embodiment are executed, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 57, a winning command receiving process (S1450), which is one process in the command determination process 5 (FIG. 56, S1390) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the sixth embodiment. Will be described. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the winning command reception process (S1450).

In the winning command receiving process (FIG. 57, S1450), first, the winning information of the received winning command is stored in the winning information storage area 223a (S1451). It is determined whether the SW effect flag 223n is on. If it is determined that the SW effect flag 223n is on (S1452: Yes), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the SW effect flag 223n is off (S1452: No), the number of reserved balls is 3 or more, and the hit / fail judgment results of the first reserved ball and the second reserved ball are out of order. Determine (S1453). When it is determined that the number of reserved balls is less than 3, or at least one of the first reserved ball and the second reserved ball is a big hit (S1453: No), this process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1453, when it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls is 3 or more and the hit / fail determination results of the first reserved ball and the second reserved ball are different (S1453: Yes), the effect counter 223f The value is acquired, and the SW lottery for whether or not to execute the SW effect is executed from the display lottery table 222c (S1454). In the process of S1454, it is determined whether the lottery result is a win (S1455). When it is determined that the lottery result is a win, the SW effective time corresponding to the reserved ball supported by the SW effect is set (S1456). A command for displaying the selected SW effect is set (S1457). The SW effect flag 2233n is set to ON (S1458). On the other hand, in the process of S1455, if it is determined that the lottery result is out of order (S1455: No), this process is terminated.

In this way, when a winning command indicating that a reserved ball has been established is received, the SW effect is set across a plurality of fluctuations based on the number of reserved balls and the result of determining whether or not the reserved ball has been held. .. As a result, the player can enjoy a plurality of fluctuations as one effect, and the result of the hit / miss judgment is out of order, and the fluctuation of the special symbol can also be enjoyed.

In the present embodiment, the SW effect is set when the number of reserved balls is three or more, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of reserved balls may be two or one. With this configuration, even with a small number of reserved balls, a plurality of fluctuations can be enjoyed as one effect.

Next, with reference to FIG. 58, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 6 (S1530) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 6 (S1530). The frame button input monitoring / effect processing 6 (FIG. 58, S1530) in the sixth embodiment has S1707, S1740, and S1750 with respect to the frame button input monitoring / effect process (FIG. 23, S1307) in the first embodiment. Each process has been added, and the processes of S161 to S1615 have been deleted.

After the process of S1602 is executed, the process of S1740 is executed. In the process of S1740, the SW effect flag 223n is set to off (S1740). After the process of S1606 is executed, the process of S1707 is executed. In the process of S1707, it is determined whether the currently displayed SW effect indicator has risen to the maximum value set for the fluctuation (S1707). When it is determined that the indicator is the maximum value (S1707: Yes), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the indicator is not the maximum value, the process of S1607 is executed.

Further, in the process of S1609, when it is determined that the lottery result is a hit (S1609: Yes), the value of the indicator is set based on the value of the SW press count counter 223e, and the display indicating the display of the indicator is displayed. A gauge effect command is set (S1750).

<About the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 59 to 63. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above, the configuration in which the SW effective time can be effectively used by configuring the lottery probability of the SW effect to be changed according to the SW effective time has been described.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment, the indicator M indicating the remaining time of the SW effective time is displayed with the instruction display mode s indicating the pressing timing of the frame button 22, and the player is presented with the frame button 22. It differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in that it is configured to execute an effect of instructing the timing of pressing. The same elements as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

<About the display mode of the SW effect in the 7th embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 59 to 60, a display mode of the SW effect displayed by the third symbol display device 81 in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 59A is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the SW effect of the present embodiment. A symbol schematically showing the frame button 22 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the position indicated by the indicator M in the instruction display mode s to the player who says "Stop the indicator in a circle !!" A display mode is displayed that prompts the player to operate the frame button 22 at a timing variable up to. In this case, the special symbol is reduced and displayed in the upper right corner of the display area.

The indicator M is a left side area a of the instruction display area s (the remaining time of the SW effective time is smaller than that of the instruction display area s), an instruction area b corresponding to the instruction display area s, and a right side area c of the instruction display area s. The remaining time of the SW effective time is larger than that of the instruction display area s). Then, when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, it is determined which area the indicator M corresponds to, that is, which area the remaining time of the SW effective time corresponds to.

FIG. 59B is a display mode showing an example in which a comment display is displayed when the frame button 22 is pressed in the instruction area b. When the frame button 22 is pressed in the instruction area b, the comment content having a higher expectation for the jackpot than the other display areas is selected.

Further, as shown in FIG. 60A, the SW effect is set to an enlarged effect in which the instruction display area is enlarged and displayed when the indicator M approaches the vicinity of the instruction display area s. As shown in FIG. 60A, the indicator M is enlarged and displayed as compared with the normal time, and the variable speed of the indicator M is also set to be slower than the normal time. Then, as shown in FIG. 60B, when the indicator M is located in the instruction display area, the characters "press !!" are displayed to guide the player to press the frame button 22. As a result, the player can press the frame button 22 at the timing when the indicator M changes in the instruction display area s. Further, in the present embodiment, this enlarged effect is configured to be easier to select when the result of determining whether or not the special symbol during the variable display is a big hit than when it is a big hit, so that the SW effect is expected to be a big hit. You can enjoy it.

<About the electrical configuration in the 7th embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 61, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment will be described. In the seventh embodiment, the display lottery table 222c and the comment selection table 222d are added to the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, respectively, with respect to the first embodiment. Since the display lottery table 222c has the same configuration as that already described in the third embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The comment selection table 222d is a data table for selecting a comment for the SW effect. As shown in FIG. 61 (b), comment contents are set for each left side area a (a zone), instruction area b (b zone), and right side area c (c zone). Further, for each SW effect, with or without an enlarged effect is set.

<Regarding the control process in the seventh embodiment>
Next, the control process executed by the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 62 to 63. In the seventh embodiment, the command determination process (FIGS. 21, S1311) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is assigned to the command determination process 6 (FIG. 62, S1560) with respect to the first embodiment. The input monitoring / effect processing (FIG. 23, S1307) has been changed to the frame button input monitoring / effect process 7 (FIG. 63, S1550), respectively. As for other processes, the same processes as those in the first embodiment are executed, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the command determination process 6 (S1560) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 62. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing the command determination process 6 (S1560). In the command determination process 6 (FIG. 62, S1560) in the seventh embodiment, the process of S1404 is changed to the process of S1460 with respect to the command determination process (FIG. 21, S1311) in the first embodiment. As for other processes, the same processes as those in the first embodiment are executed, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

After executing the process of S1403, the process of S1460 is executed. In the process of S1460, the SW effect is selected from the comment selection table 222d (see FIG. 61B), and the corresponding SW effective time is set (S1460).

Next, with reference to FIG. 63, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 7 (S1550) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 7 (S1550).

In the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 7 (FIG. 63, S1550), first, it is determined whether the SW effective time is 0 (S1551). If it is determined that the SW effective time is 0 (S1551: Yes), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the SW effective time is a value larger than 0 (S1551: No), the SW effective time is subtracted (S1552). A display command corresponding to the SW effective time is set (S1553). By this command, the indicator M is changed based on the remaining time of the SW effective time.

It is determined whether the frame button 22 is pressed (S1554). When it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed (S1554: Yes), a comment corresponding to the current SW effective time is set (S1555). Here, the corresponding comment is selected from the comment selection table 222d based on the timing at which the frame button 22 is pressed. A display command indicating the set comment is set (S1556).

On the other hand, in the process of S1554, when it is determined that the frame button 22 is not pressed (S1554: No), it is determined whether or not the effect is enlarged (S1557). When it is determined that the effect is magnified (S1557: Yes), it is determined whether it is the timing to execute the magnified effect (S1558). When it is determined that it is the timing to execute the enlargement effect (S1558: Yes), a display command indicating the enlargement display is set. On the other hand, when it is determined that the effect is no enlargement (S1557), and when it is determined that the timing is not the timing of the enlargement effect (S1558: No), this process ends.

In this way, by displaying the indicator M indicating the remaining time of the SW effective time and instructing the player to press the frame button 22 using the indicator M, the player presses the frame button 22. You can enjoy the game you used more. Further, when the frame button 22 can be operated at the timing instructed by the player, a display mode (game value) having a higher value than usual is easily given to the player, so that the player can instruct more. The game can be performed with the aim of pressing the frame button 22 at the timing when the frame button 22 is pressed.

Further, in the present embodiment, since the effect that the indicator M is enlarged is executed, the player who does not press the frame button 22 even if the display is displayed by the SW effect is also changing. It is possible to notify the degree of expectation for the result of determining whether the special symbol is correct or not. Therefore, the taste of the game can be further improved.

<About the pachinko machine 10 in the eighth embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 64 to 70. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above, the configuration in which the SW effective time can be effectively used by configuring the lottery probability of the SW effect to be changed according to the SW effective time has been described.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the eighth embodiment, the battle effect is executed in the round display mode during the jackpot game, and the frame button 22 is normally displayed to the player in the 15th round display mode. The SW effect to be pressed is displayed, but in the opening display mode, the SW effect in the 15th round can be set not to be set by pressing the frame button 22 a predetermined number of times. It is different from the pachinko machine 10. The same elements as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

<About the display mode of the SW effect in the eighth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 64 to 65, a display mode of the SW effect displayed by the third symbol display device 81 in the eighth embodiment will be described. FIG. 64A is a diagram showing an opening display mode indicating that the jackpot game is started. In the present embodiment, the player is notified by the battle effect whether the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B during the jackpot game.

As shown in FIG. 64 (b), in the round display mode of the 15th round, a display mode instructing the player to operate the frame button 22 is displayed. Then, when the player presses the frame button 22, a display mode in which the victory or defeat of the battle effect is determined is displayed, and when the main character wins in the battle effect, the jackpot A in the 16th round, which is the final round, is shown in FIG. 64 (c). A display mode indicating that is displayed.

On the other hand, when the player presses the frame button 22 a predetermined number of times or more during the opening display mode shown in FIG. 64 (a), as shown in FIG. 65 (a), in the round display mode of the 15th round, the SW effect is produced. It is not displayed, and the display mode indicating the explosion is displayed, and then the display mode for notifying the victory or defeat of the battle effect is displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 65 (b), a display mode for notifying the jackpot type is displayed in the final round.

With this configuration, a player who does not like the SW effect can be set to prohibit the display of the SW effect by operating the frame button 22 at the start of the jackpot game. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a production that is more tailored to the player. Further, in the opening display mode, since the display mode such as the setting is not displayed and can be set by operating the frame button 22, it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of searching for the setting that is not notified, and for a longer time. It is possible to encourage the player to play the game.

FIG. 65 (c) shows a timing chart for the setting for prohibiting the SW effect in the present embodiment. When the period of the opening display mode is started, the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed is counted. Here, when the player presses the frame button 22 30 times or more, the setting of the SW effect set in the 15th round is prohibited.

<About the electrical configuration in the eighth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 66, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment will be described. In the eighth embodiment, the skip flag 223p of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is added to the first embodiment. Since the other configurations are the same as those of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The skip flag 223p is a flag indicating that the setting of the SW effect in the 15th round is prohibited in the battle effect during the jackpot game. This skip flag 223p is set during the opening display of the jackpot game in the processing of S1589 of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 8 (FIGS. 70, S1580) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the eighth embodiment. When the frame button 22 is pressed 30 times or more, it is set to ON. Although not shown, it is set to off based on the end of the jackpot game.

<Regarding the control process by the pachinko machine 10 in the eighth embodiment>
Next, the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 67 to 70. In the eighth embodiment, the command determination process (FIG. 21, S1311) is combined with the command determination process 7 (FIG. 67, S1570) and the frame button input monitoring / effect process (FIG. 23, S1307) with respect to the first embodiment. Is changed to the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 8 (FIG. 70, S1580). As for other processes, the same processes as those in the first embodiment are executed, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the command determination process 7 (S1570) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 67. FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing the command determination process 7 (S1570). In the command determination process 7 (FIG. 67, S1570) in the eighth embodiment, the processes S1412, S1414, S1470, and S1480 are added to the command determination process (FIG. 21, S1311) in the first embodiment. There is. Since the other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the process of S1410, when it is determined that the winning command has not been received (S1412: No), it is determined whether or not the opening command has been received (S1412). If it is determined that the opening command has been received (S1412: Yes), the opening process 2 is executed (S1470). After that, this process ends.

The opening process 2 (S1470) will be described with reference to FIG. 68. FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing the opening process 2. In the opening process 2 (FIG. 68, S1470), the SW effective time is first set to 30 seconds (S1471). A display command for instructing the opening display is set (S1472). In this way, the SW effective time is set along with the execution of the opening process. The SW effective time set in this case is 10 seconds. In the present embodiment, the SW effective time is set to 10 seconds, which is the length of the opening display mode, but the SW effective time is not limited to 10 seconds, and may be a part of the length of the opening display mode. Further, in the present embodiment, the period is set by pressing the frame button 22 in the opening display mode, but the period is not limited to this, and may be the first round or other rounds.

Further, it is set so that the SW effect is not displayed for the player who is playing the game by pressing the frame button 22 before the start of the 15th round or before the SW effect of the 15th round is displayed. It may be configured as follows. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the SW effect from becoming meaningless to the player.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 67. In the process of S1412, when it is determined that the opening command has not been received (S1412: No), it is determined whether or not the round command has been received (S1414). If it is determined that the round command has been received (S1414: Yes), the round process is executed (S1480), and then this process ends.

Here, the round processing (S1480) will be described with reference to FIG. 69. FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing this round processing (S1480).

In the round processing (FIG. 69, S1480), first, it is determined whether the received round command is a command indicating the 15th round (S1481). When it is determined that the command indicates the 15th round, it is determined whether the skip flag 223p is off (S1482). When it is determined that the skip flag 223p is off (S1482: Yes), a 15-round display mode with SW effect is set (S1483). Next, the SW effective time corresponding to the display mode is set. A display command corresponding to the set display mode is set (S1485).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the skip flag 223p is on in the processing of S1482 (S1482: No), a 15-round display mode without SW effect is set (S1486). After that, the process of S1485 is executed to end this process. Further, in the process of S1481 when it is determined that the received round command is a command other than the 15th round (S1481: No), the round display mode corresponding to the number of rounds is set (S1487). After that, the process of S1485 is executed to end this process.

By setting the skip flag 223p to ON in this way, a round display without a SW effect setting is set. Therefore, when the player operates the frame button 22 in the opening display mode, it is possible to prohibit the setting of the SW effect, and it is possible to provide the player with an effect that matches the player's preference.

Next, with reference to FIG. 70, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 8 (S1580) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the eighth embodiment will be described. FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 8 (S1580).

In the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 8 (FIG. 70, S1580), first, it is determined whether the SW effective time is 0 (S1581). When it is determined that the SW effective time is 0 (S1581: Yes), the SW press count counter is set to 0 (S1582), and this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the SW effective time is not 0 (S1581: No), the SW effective time is subtracted and updated (S1583). It is determined whether the frame button 22 is pressed (S1584). If it is determined that the frame button 22 is not pressed (S1584: No), this process ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed (S1584: Yes), the value of the SW press count counter 223e is incremented by 1 and updated (S1585). It is determined whether the opening display is in progress (S1586). When it is determined that the opening display is in progress (S1586: Yes), it is determined whether the number of SW presses is 30 or more (S1587). When it is determined that the number of SW presses is 30 or more (S1587: Yes), the skip flag 223p is set to ON (S1588), the SW effective time is reset (S1589), and then this process is terminated. .. On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of times the SW is pressed is less than 30 times (S1588: No), this process is terminated.

Further, in the process of S1586, when it is determined that the opening display is not in progress (S1586), the effect to be displayed is selected based on the jackpot type (S1590). A display command indicating the selected effect is set (S1591). The SW effective time is reset (S1592), and this process ends.

In this way, in the configuration in which the SW effect is displayed, the player uses the frame button 22 to perform a predetermined operation at the timing before the SW effect is executed, so that the display of the SW effect is prohibited ( Can be canceled). Therefore, the player can set the effect according to the player's preference.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the opening display mode, the display / non-display of the SW effect is set by performing a predetermined operation on the frame button 22, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the special symbol changes. When a SW effect is selected in a pattern or the like, the display of the SW effect is prohibited (display / non-display setting) by performing a predetermined operation on the frame button 22 before the SW effect is displayed. It may be configured as follows. With this configuration, it is possible to execute an effect tailored to the player.

Next, a modified example of the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 71. FIG. 71 (a) is a diagram showing an opening display mode displayed by the third symbol display device in the jackpot game. In the present embodiment, the player operates an operation button (not shown) composed of the cross keys to move the cursor displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the BGM is output during the jackpot game. Select the type of.

Here, also in the present embodiment, the display mode of the battle effect is displayed as the round display mode during the jackpot game as in the eighth embodiment described above. As shown in FIG. 71 (b), when the frame button 22 is pressed and the type of BGM is selected in the opening display mode, the SW effect of the 15th round is displayed. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 71 (c), if the player does not select BGM in the opening display mode, the SW effect of the 15th round is not set. In this way, by configuring the operation in the opening display mode to set the presence or absence of the SW effect, it is possible to display the effect according to the player's preference. Further, in the present embodiment, the setting of the SW effect can be executed without displaying the dedicated display mode for setting the SW effect, the setting screen, or the like, so that the control load can be reduced. Further, by displaying such a setting screen, it is possible to suppress a problem that the production during the big hit is interrupted.

In the present embodiment, the jackpot effect has been described as an example, but such a setting may be made in the effect of the variation pattern of the special symbol or the advance notice effect selected in association with the effect. ..

<About the pachinko machine 10 in the ninth embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 72 to 84. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above, only the frame button 22 is provided, and the player presses the frame button 22 during the SW effective time set according to the effect of the game to display the third symbol. The configuration for varying the effect content displayed on the device 81 has been described.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the ninth embodiment, in addition to the frame button 22, a rotating body switch 600 having a display unit is provided in the pachinko machine 10, and the player turns the rotating body switch 600. It differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in that it is configured to change the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the rotating body switch 600 by operating the pachinko machine. The same elements as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

The configuration of the rotating body switch 600 provided in the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 72 to 75. As shown in FIG. 72, the rotating body switch 600 is provided on the upper portion of the upper plate 17 on the front side of the pachinko machine 10. The upper plate 17 is formed with a recess capable of storing the game ball, and the rotating body switch 600 has a leg portion attached to a flat portion other than the recess. The rotating body switch 600 is provided at a position where the player can operate the rotating body switch 600 with his / her left hand while operating the firing handle 51 with his / her right hand.

73 (a) to 73 (d) are four views of the rotating body switch 600. 73 (a) is a top view of the rotating body switch 600 as viewed from above, FIG. 73 (b) is a front view of the rotating switch 600 as viewed from the front, and FIG. 73 (c) is a rotating body. It is a side view of the switch 600 viewed from the right side, and 73 (d) is a perspective view of the rotating body switch 600.

FIG. 74 is an exploded perspective view of the rotating body switch 600. The rotating body switch 600 covers a projection unit 606 for projecting a display image on the lower portion, a display spherical surface 603 that acts as a screen for projecting an image projected from the projection unit 606, and a rotatable display spherical surface 603. It is composed of a rotating sphere 601 and a left leg portion 605L and a right leg portion 605R that are rotatably fixed to the projection unit 606.

The rotating sphere 601 is composed of a first hemisphere portion 601a having a hemispherical shape and a second hemisphere portion 601b having a shape symmetrical with the first hemisphere portion 601a. The first hemisphere portion has a spherical surface larger than the spherical surface of the display spherical surface 603, and has a spherical surface portion capable of covering the outer circumference of the display spherical surface 603. A shaft portion for rotatably fixing to the leg portion 605R is formed. This shaft portion is inserted into the cylindrical portion of the left side collar member 604L and the right side collar member 604R, which are formed in a cylindrical shape, in a state where the first hemisphere portion 601a and the second hemisphere portion 601b are intertwined, and the left leg. The portion 605L and the right leg portion 605R are inserted into a cylindrical shaft fixing portion formed so as to project toward the rotating sphere 601 and are rotatably fixed. The rotating sphere 601 is configured to be rotatable in a state where the display spherical surface 603 is fixed to the left leg portion 605L and the right leg portion 605R inside.

The rotating sphere 601 is made of a transparent resin material, and the display mode projected on the display spherical surface 603 is configured to be visible through the rotating sphere 601. A rotation sensor 802 for detecting the amount of rotation of the rotating sphere 601 is attached to the left leg portion 605L that rotatably fixes the rotating sphere 601 to determine whether the rotating sphere 601 has been rotated by the player. It is configured to be able to detect. The rotation sensor 802 is composed of a rotary encoder and is configured to detect the rotation angle of the rotating sphere 601. The display spherical surface 603 has protrusions for fixing formed on the left and right ends, and is fixed to the left leg portion 605L and the right leg portion 605R by a screw member 607.

Further, the rotating body switch 600 is composed of a limit switch provided at a connecting portion between the projection unit 606, the left leg portion 605L, and the right leg portion 605R when the rotating sphere 601 is pushed downward by the player. The push switch 801 is configured to be turned on, and is also configured to function as a push type switch.

In the present embodiment, the rotating body switch 606 is provided with a push-type switch in a mechanical configuration, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a touch sensor for detecting whether the player touches the rotating sphere 601 is provided to function as a switch. May be configured to configure.

FIG. 75 is a cross-sectional view for schematically explaining how the projection unit 606 projects an image on the display spherical surface 603. The projection unit 606 has an image projection unit configured in the same manner as the projector inside, and is configured to project a predetermined display mode on the display spherical surface 603 by projecting an image vertically upward. ..

Next, with reference to FIG. 76, a display mode of the effect using the rotating body switch 600 in which a predetermined display mode is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the display spherical surface 603 will be described. FIG. 76A is a diagram showing an example of a variable display mode of a special symbol of the effect set to use the rotating body switch 600. When the reach display mode is such that the left symbol and the right symbol of the special symbol are the same symbol, the special symbol is reduced and displayed on the upper right side of the display area. Then, in the other display area, a large rock is displayed, and a symbol "7" that hits the rock and a symbol "6" that is an off symbol are displayed. Then, above the display area, the characters "Rotate the sphere !!" are displayed to notify the player to rotate the rotating body switch 600.

When the rotating sphere 601 of the rotating body switch 600 is rotated, a display mode is displayed in which the rock displayed in the display area is rotated so that the design of the hand is "7" in front. .. The display mode for rotating the rock is configured so that the display mode can be changed based on the rotation of the rotating sphere 601 by a predetermined amount.

FIG. 76 (b) is a diagram showing a display mode displayed on the display spherical surface 603 when the variable display mode using the rotating body switch 600 shown in FIG. 76 (a) is displayed. On the display spherical surface 603, a display mode similar to the display mode displayed by the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. With such a configuration, the player can suppress a problem that the player is absorbed in the operation of the rotating body switch 600 and overlooks the content displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by rotating the rotating body switch 600, the mode of being displayed can be changed, so that the enjoyment of operating the rotating body switch 600 can be increased.

In the present embodiment, the content displayed on the display spherical surface of the rotating body switch 600 is the same as the content displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but the content is not limited to that, and the content is not limited to the third symbol display device 81. It may be configured to display a symbol such as a notice that is not displayed or text information.

<About the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the ninth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 77, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the ninth embodiment will be described. In the ninth embodiment, the press switch 801 electrically connected to the input / output port 225 of the voice lamp control device 113, the rotation sensor 802, and the projection unit 606 are added to the first embodiment, respectively.

The pressing switch 801 is a switch composed of a limit switch for detecting that the rotating body switch 600 has been pressed. When the press switch 801 is pressed, a signal is output to the voice lamp control device 113, and the signal is determined by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113.

The rotation sensor 802 is a sensor composed of a rotary encoder for detecting the amount of rotation of the rotating sphere 601. When the rotating sphere 601 is rotated by the player, the amount of rotation is output to the detected voice lamp control device 113.

The projection unit 606 is a display device provided on the rotating body switch 600, and is configured to project an image on the display spherical surface 603 of the rotating body switch 600. The projection unit 606 is configured to start outputting an image based on the display data when the display data is output from the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113.

As shown in FIG. 78, the sphere display data 222i and the sphere production scenario selection table 222j are added to the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the ninth embodiment, respectively, with respect to the first embodiment. ..

The sphere display data 222i is display data such as a character to be displayed on the projection unit 606 of the rotating body switch 600.

The sphere effect scenario selection table 222j is a selection table for selecting the type of effect related to the rotating body switch 600 by lottery. The sphere effect scenario selection table 222j is 1 in the process of S1492 of the sphere display scenario setting process (FIG. 81, S1490) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110. The process in which the scenario of is selected is executed.

Further, a display data buffer 223r, a scenario timer 223s, a rotation operation flag 223t, a rotation effective time 223v, and a pointer 223w are added to the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 for the first mobile phone.

The display data buffer 223r is an area in which the sphere display data table selected from the sphere display data 222i is stored. When the spherical display data table is stored in the display data buffer 223r, the image data to be displayed on the projection unit 606 is selected by the pointer 223w based on the passage of time, and the image data is transferred to the projection unit 606. ..

The scenario timer 223s is a timer for measuring the elapsed time for selecting image data based on the elapsed time from the spherical display data table in which the image data to be displayed on the projection unit 606 is set.

The rotation operation flag 223t is a flag for determining whether the rotation sphere 601 has been rotated. The rotation operation flag 223t indicates that the rotation sphere 601 has a predetermined rotation angle (360 degrees in the present embodiment) in the process of S1794 of the rotation operation determination process (FIG. 84, S1790) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. ) When it is determined that the rotation has been performed more than that, it is set to ON. Further, when the image is transferred in the process of S1775 of the sphere display process (FIG. 82, S1313), it is automatically set to off.

The rotation effective time 223v is a storage area for storing the time determined to be effective when the rotating sphere 601 is rotated. The rotation effective time 223v is updated by subtracting the elapsed time in the S1792 process of the rotation operation determination process (FIG. 84, S1790).

Since the other configurations are the same as those of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding the control process of the pachinko machine 10 in the ninth embodiment>
Next, the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 79 to 84.

First, with reference to FIG. 79, the main process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the ninth embodiment will be described. In the main process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the ninth embodiment, the command determination process (FIGS. 21, S1311) is changed to the command determination process 8 (FIG. 80, S1760) with respect to the first embodiment. It has been changed and a sphere display process (FIG. 82, S1313) has been added. Since the other configurations are the same as those of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the command determination process 8 (S1760) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 80. In the command determination process 8 (S1760) in the ninth embodiment, a sphere display scenario setting process (FIG. 81, S1490) is added to the command determination process (FIG. 21, S1311) in the first embodiment. As for other processes, the same processes as those in the first embodiment are executed, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 81, a sphere display scenario setting process (S1490), which is one process in the command determination process 8 (FIG. 80, S1760) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the ninth embodiment. ) Will be explained. FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing this sphere display scenario setting process (S1490).

In the sphere display scenario setting process (FIG. 81, S1490), first, it is determined whether the fluctuation pattern extracted from the fluctuation pattern command received from the main control device 110 is a fluctuation pattern with a sphere display effect (S1491). Here, in the ninth embodiment, whether or not to display an image on the spherical display unit 603 of the rotating body switch 600 is preset in the fluctuation pattern.

In the process of S1491 when it is determined that the extracted fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern with a sphere display effect (S1491: Yes), the type of the display data table of the display scenario corresponding to the variation pattern is selected as the sphere effect scenario selection table. Select from 222j and set the display data table in the sphere display data table buffer (S1492). Initialize and set the pointer for setting each display data set in the display data table (S1493).

Next, with reference to FIG. 82, the sphere display process (S1313) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the ninth embodiment will be described. FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing this sphere display process (S1313).

In the sphere display process (FIG. 82, S1313), first, it is determined whether or not the sphere display scenario is set (S1771). Whether or not the sphere display scenario is set is determined by whether or not the display data table is set in the sphere display data table buffer. When it is determined that the sphere display scenario is set (S1771: Yes), it is determined whether it is the timing to update the scenario timer 223s (S1772). The scenario timer 223s is a timer for updating the pointer of the set display data table according to the elapsed time. It is determined whether it is the display data update timing (S1773). When it is determined that it is the display data update timing (S1773: Yes), and when it is determined that the rotation operation flag 223t is on (S1774: Yes), the image data corresponding to the rotation operation is projected by the projection unit. Transfer to 606 (S1775). On the other hand, when it is determined that the rotation operation flag 223t is off (S1774: No), the corresponding image data without the rotation operation is transferred to the projection unit 606.

As described above, in the display data table of the sphere effect, the display data when the rotating body switch 600 is rotated and the display data when the rotating body switch 600 is not rotated are set in advance. Thereby, it is possible to easily execute the process of changing the display mode according to the operation of the rotating body switch 600. Further, in the present embodiment, even if the player rotates the rotating body switch 600 based on the lottery result of the special symbol, if the result of the hit / fail determination is different, the special symbol cannot be rotated to the winning symbol. If the display mode when the rotation operation is performed is set in advance, it is possible to display the display mode according to the judgment result by setting the set display data without having to judge the hit / fail judgment result each time. can.

Next, with reference to FIG. 83, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 7 (S1780) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the ninth embodiment will be described. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 7 (S1780). The frame button input monitoring / effect processing 7 (FIG. 83, S1780) in the ninth embodiment is a rotation operation determination process (FIG. 23, S1307) with respect to the frame button input monitoring / effect process (FIG. 23, S1307) in the first embodiment. 84, S1790) has been added. The rotation operation determination process (S1790) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 84.

FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing this rotation operation determination process (S1790). In the rotation operation determination process (FIG. 84, S1790), first, it is determined whether the rotation effective time 223v is a value larger than 0, that is, whether the rotation effective time 223v is set (S1791). The rotation effective time 223v is a time when the rotation sphere 601 is rotated and the operation is determined to be effective. When it is determined that the rotation effective time is in progress (S1791: Yes), the rotation effective time 223v is subtracted and updated (S1792). It is determined whether or not the rotating sphere 601 is rotated and operated by a predetermined angle or more (360 degrees or more in the present embodiment) determined in advance (S1793). When it is determined that the rotation operation has been performed by a predetermined amount or more (S1793: Yes), the rotation operation flag 223t is set to ON (S1794). On the other hand, if it is determined that the rotation has not been performed by a predetermined rotation amount or more, this process is terminated. If it is determined in the process of S1791 that the rotation is not in the effective time (S1791: No), this process is terminated.

In this embodiment, instead of the frame button 22 of the first embodiment, the rotating body switch 600 is pressed to perform the same function. In the configuration in which the rotating body switch 600 is pressed, the rotation effective time 223v is not set. As a result, by pressing the rotating body switch 600, even if the rotating body switch 600 rotates, it is prevented from being determined that the rotation operation has been executed against the intention of the player. ing.

As described above, in the configuration of the present embodiment, the rotating body switch 600 is provided with a function capable of displaying the display mode, and a rotating body is further provided around the rotating body switch 600 so that the display mode can be changed by the rotation operation. Therefore, it can be configured so that the player seems to participate in the game by the operation.

<About the pachinko machine 10 in the tenth embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 85 to 96. In the first embodiment described above, the configuration in which the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed by pressing the frame button 22 has been described.

On the other hand, in the ninth embodiment, the frame button 22 is changed to the liquid crystal switch 700 to execute various displays on the liquid crystal switch 700, and the liquid crystal display device provided on the liquid crystal switch 700 is provided. The touch panel type is different from the first embodiment in that a touch operation can be performed by pressing the touch panel. The same configurations as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<About the configuration of the liquid crystal switch 700 in the tenth embodiment>
First, the configuration of the liquid crystal switch 700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 85 to 87. In the tenth embodiment, the liquid crystal type switch 700 is provided on the upper right side of the upper plate 17 instead of the frame button 22 in the first embodiment. FIG. 85 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 to which the liquid crystal switch 700 is attached.

The structure of the liquid crystal switch 700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 86 to 87. FIG. 85 is a perspective view of the liquid crystal switch 700 as viewed from above. The liquid crystal type switch 700 is composed of a transparent resin member, has a transparent cover body 701 capable of covering the internal touch panel 702 with a substantially triangular cover body, and is fixed inside the transparent cover body 701 at a slight distance from the cover body. Detection composed of a touch panel 702 and a transmissive sensor that detects whether the cover body 701 is pressed by detecting a part of the pressed cover body when the cover body 701 is pressed. It is composed of a sensor 703 and a stopper member 704 that prohibits further rotation of the cover body 701 that rotates a predetermined amount in the pressing direction when the cover body 701 is pressed. The cover body 701 has a shaft portion 701Z for rotatably fixing to the front side of the pachinko machine 10, and has an urging member (not shown) composed of a spring member that always urges upward. Have. The cover body 701 has an inclined surface having a width slightly larger than the width of the touch panel 702 from the shaft portion 701Z, and is configured so that the player can visually recognize the display mode of the internal touch panel 702 through the inclined surface.

FIG. 87 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA of the liquid crystal switch 700. FIG. 87A shows a case where the liquid crystal type switch 700 is not pressed, and FIG. 87B is a diagram showing a case where the liquid crystal type switch 700 is pressed. As shown in FIG. 87 (a), the angle of the inclined surface of the cover body 701 and the angle at which the touch panel 702 is fixed do not match. However, as shown in FIG. 87 (b), when the cover body 701 is pressed and rotated until it comes into contact with the stopper member 704, the tilted surface of the cover body 701 and the touch panel 702 are brought into contact with each other in the same tilt angle. It is configured. With this configuration, when the cover body 701 is pressed to the maximum, the touch panel 702 can be touch-operated via the cover body 701.

Next, a display mode displayed on the touch panel 702 will be described with reference to FIG. 88. FIG. 88A shows a display mode in which a similar display mode is displayed on the touch panel liquid crystal when the special symbol variation effect of pressing the liquid crystal switch 700 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is a figure which showed an example.

In this way, the same content as the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is also displayed on the liquid crystal switch 700, so that the player looks at the liquid crystal switch 700 from the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to confirm the same contents as the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if the third symbol display device 81 is moved. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that the player overlooks the display content displayed by the third symbol display device 81 by pressing the liquid crystal type switch 700.

FIG. 88B is a diagram showing a display mode for prompting the player to perform a touch operation displayed on the touch panel 702. The third symbol display device 81 displays a display mode that allows the player to select the reach display mode displayed in the lower right display area of the touch panel 702. Then, an icon that allows the player to press and select A reach and B reach is displayed in the remaining display area of the touch panel 702. Then, the characters "Touch the icon !!" are displayed to notify that the icon is touched and selected.

The player can select by touching the cover body 701 in an attempt to touch the icon and touching the icon when the cover body 701 is pressed by the maximum amount. Since the player presses the cover body 701 together with the touch operation, the player can operate the cover body 701 without feeling the trouble of performing the two operations.

With reference to FIG. 89, it is a display mode showing an example of a case where the display mode displayed on the touch panel 702 is pinch-to-zoomed to enlarge the display mode. With the cover body 701 pressed, the display mode displayed on the touch panel 702 is brought into contact with a finger so as to touch two points in the vicinity of the display mode to be enlarged (see FIG. 89 (a)). After that, by operating so as to widen the distance between the fingers, the display mode can be enlarged to an arbitrary size of the player (see FIG. 89 (b)).

In this way, the displayed display mode can be enlarged or reduced to an arbitrary size of the player, so that the information that the player wants to know can be easily known.

<About the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the tenth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 90, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the tenth embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the tenth embodiment, a liquid crystal type switch 700 is provided instead of the frame button 22 with respect to the first embodiment. A pressing sensor 704 for detecting that the cover body 701 provided on the liquid crystal switch 700 has been pressed is connected to the input / output port 225 of the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the touch panel 702 provided on the liquid crystal switch 700 is connected to the input / output port 225. The touch panel 702 is configured to be able to output a signal for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 based on the fact that the display screen is touched by the player.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91 (a), the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the tenth embodiment contains the SW liquid crystal display data 222k and the SW liquid crystal scenario selection table with respect to the first embodiment. 222m is added.

The SW liquid crystal display data 222k is a data table in which a display data table in which display data for display on the touch panel 702 is set is stored. In this display data table, each data to be displayed is set according to the display time.

The SW liquid crystal scenario selection table 222m is a data table for selecting a display data table corresponding to the data to be displayed on the touch panel 702 according to the received fluctuation pattern.

As shown in FIG. 91B, the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the tenth embodiment has a display data buffer 223r, a scenario timer 223s, a pointer 223w, and a touch valid with respect to the first embodiment. A time storage area 223x has been added. Since the display data buffer 223r, the scenario timer 223s, and the pointer 223w have the same configurations as those described in the ninth embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The touch effective time storage area 223x is a storage area for storing the time for determining that the operation is valid when the touch panel 702 is touch-operated. The touch effective time storage area 223x is subtracted and updated in the processing of S1826 of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 8 (FIGS. 96, S1820) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the tenth embodiment. .. The touch effective time storage area 223x receives the fluctuation pattern in which the touch operation is set, and when the scenario is set, the effective time set in the scenario is automatically set.

<Regarding the control process executed by the voice lamp control device 113 in the tenth embodiment>
Next, the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 92 to 96.

The main process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 92. In the main process of the ninth embodiment, the command determination process (FIGS. 21, S1311) is combined with the command determination process (FIG. 92, S1800) and the frame button input monitoring / effect process (FIG. 23, S1800) with respect to the first embodiment. S1307) has been changed to frame button input monitoring / effect processing 8 (FIG. 96, S1820), and SW liquid crystal display processing (FIG. 95, S1810) has been added. Since other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the command determination process 9 (S1800) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 93. FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing the command determination process 9 (S1800). In the command determination process 9 (FIG. 93, S1800) in the tenth embodiment, the SW liquid crystal display setting process (FIG. 94, S1840) is added to the command determination process (FIG. 21, S1311) in the first embodiment. There is. Since the other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the SW liquid crystal display setting process (S1840) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 94. FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing the SW liquid crystal display setting process (S1840).

In the SW liquid crystal display setting process (FIG. 94, S1840), first, it is determined whether the extracted fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern with a SW effect (S1841). Here, in the tenth embodiment, whether or not to use the liquid crystal type switch 700 for the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is set in advance, and even the scenario to be selected is set.

When it is determined that the fluctuation pattern has a SW effect (S1841: Yes), the display data table which is the SW liquid crystal display data is displayed from the SW liquid crystal scenario selection table 222m based on the extracted fluctuation pattern. Data table buffer 223r Set to. The SW effective time and the touch effective time are set at a predetermined timing by this display data table. On the other hand, in the process of S1841, if it is determined that the SW effect is not set (S1841: No), this process is terminated.

Next, the SW liquid crystal display process (S1810) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 95. FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing the SW liquid crystal display setting process (S1810).

In the SW liquid crystal display process (FIG. 95, S1810), first, it is determined whether or not the display setting of the touch panel 702 (SW liquid crystal) is set. Whether or not the display of the touch panel 702 is set is determined by whether or not the display data table is set in the display data table buffer 223r. If the pointer 223w is updated up to the END data of the display data table, it is determined that the display data table is not set.

When it is determined that the display data of the touch panel 702 is set (S1811: Yes), the scenario timer 223s is updated (S1812). It is determined whether it is the timing to update the display data (S1813). Here, it is determined whether or not the display time set in the display data table has elapsed. When it is determined that it is time to update the display data (S1813: Yes), the set display data is converted into image data and transferred to the touch panel 702 (S1814).

On the other hand, in the process of S1811, if it is determined that there is no display setting of the touch panel 702 (S1811: No), or if it is determined that it is not the update timing of the display data (S1813: No), this process is performed. finish.

Next, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 8 (S1820) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 96. FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 8 (S1820).

In the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 8 (FIG. 96, S1820), first, it is determined whether the time stored in the SW effective time storage area 223g is greater than 0, that is, whether it is in the SW effective time (S1821). .. When it is determined that the SW effective time is in progress (S1821: Yes), the SW effective time is subtracted and updated (S1822). It is determined whether the cover body is pressed (S1823). Here, it is determined whether the pressing sensor 704 is on. When it is determined that the pressing sensor 704 is on, the image data for displaying the display data at the time of pressing the SW set in the set display data table is set (S1824). Here, the set image data is transferred and set to the touch panel 702 by the process of S1814 of the SW liquid crystal display process (FIG. 95, S1810). On the other hand, in the process of S1823, when it is determined that the pressing sensor 704 is off (S1823: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1821, when it is determined that the SW effective time is 0 (S1821: No), it is determined whether the touch effective time is 0 (S1825). When it is determined that the touch effective time is not 0, that is, it is during the touch effective time (S1825: Yes), the touch effective time is subtracted and updated (S1826). It is determined whether the pressing sensor 704 is on (S1827). When it is determined that the pressing sensor 704 is off (S1827: No), this process ends.

As described above, when the pressing sensor 704 is off, that is, when the cover body 701 is not pressed, the operation of the touch panel 702 is not accepted. This is configured so that when the cover body 701 and the display surface of the touch panel 702 come into contact with each other, the cover body 701 is electrically conductive and the touch operation through the cover body 701 can be discriminated, but the cover body 701 is not sufficiently pressed. This is to suppress the problem of recognizing the touch operation in the case of.

In the process of S1827, when it is determined that the pressing sensor 704 is on (S1827: Yes), it is determined whether or not a touch operation is performed (S1828). In the process of S1828, when it is determined that the touch operation is performed (S1828: Yes), it is determined whether the operation is a pinch-do-zoom operation (S1829). Whether it is a pinch-do-zoom operation determines whether two points on the display screen are in contact with each other. When it is determined that the pinch-do-zoom operation has been performed (S1829), the enlargement ratio based on the operation is set in the set display data table (S1830). After that, this process ends.

With this configuration, if the cover body 701 is not pressed, even if the player touches the cover body 701, there is no problem that the display screen expands against the player's intention, and the player can do so. It is easy to play and can be configured.

On the other hand, in the process of S1829, when it is determined that the operation is not a pinch-do-zoom operation (S1829: No), it is determined whether there is a valid selection (S1831). This determines whether the display area of the displayed icon is pressed when the icon to be selected by touch operation is displayed as shown in FIG. 88 (b). If the other area is touch-operated or the two icons are touch-operated, it is determined as an invalid selection.

When it is determined that there is a valid selection in the process of S1831 (S1831: Yes), the display data based on the selected icon is set from the display data table (S1832). The touch effective time is reset to the initial value of 0 (S1833). After that, this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1825, when it is determined that the touch effective time is 0 (S1825: No), this process is terminated.

In this way, since the touch effective time is reset when the icon is selected, it is possible to suppress a problem such as malfunction.

The pinch-do-zoom operation may be configured so that it can be performed even outside the touch effective time.

In the present embodiment, the touch panel 702 and the cover body 701 are configured to be electrically connected to each other to enable touch operation, but the present invention is not limited to this, and an object at a predetermined distance can be identified from the display screen of the touch panel 702. It may be configured to enable touch operation through the cover body 701.

Further, in the present embodiment, the pressing sensor 704 that detects that the cover body 701 has been pressed is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the touch panel 702 may be configured to identify that the cover body 701 has been pressed. good. The touch panel may be configured to determine that the pressing operation has been performed by the touch panel determining the finger or hand that presses the touch panel 702 and the cover body 701.

Further, in the present embodiment, the cover body 701 can be pressed even outside the SW effective time or the touch operation effective time, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a regulating member that regulates the rotation of the cover body 701 is provided outside the effective time. It may be configured to be operated by a solenoid or the like to notify the player of the effective time.

Further, in the above embodiment, the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are provided separately, but instead, the respective devices 113 and 114 may be integrated and provided as one device.

Further, in the above embodiment, first, a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113, and when the command is received by the voice lamp control device 113, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114 in the voice lamp control device 113. The command to be to be determined is determined, and then the command is transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114. On the other hand, first, a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the display control device 114, and when the command is received by the display control device 114, the display control device 114 determines a command to be transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. After that, the display control device 114 may be configured to send a command to the voice lamp control device 113.

In the above embodiment, each command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 gives a display instruction to the display control device 114. A command may be transmitted directly from the control device 110 to the display control device 114. Further, the voice lamp control device may be connected to the display control device, and a command for instructing the output of each voice and the lighting of the lamp may be transmitted from the display control device to the voice lamp control device.

In the above embodiment, the winning of the first ball opening 64 and the passage of the second ball opening 67 are each suspended up to four times, but the maximum number of reserved balls is limited to four times. However, it may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). In addition, the number of reserved balls in the variable display based on the winning of the first ball opening 64 is set by a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is divided into four areas by the number of reserved balls. It may be displayed in a different mode (for example, a color or a lighting pattern), and a light emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first symbol display device 37, and the light emitting member notifies the number of reserved balls. It may be configured as.

Further, as shown in the above embodiment, the variable display, which is a kind of dynamic display, is not limited to the one in which the symbol as the identification information is scrolled vertically on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and is vertically The symbol may be moved and displayed along a predetermined path such as a direction or an L shape. Further, the dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the variable display of the symbol, and for example, one or a plurality of characters are displayed together with the symbol or in a wide variety of motion display or change display separately from the symbol. It also includes the effect display. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above-described embodiment. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item, a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the jackpot until multiple times (for example, two or three times) a big hit state occurs including that. It may be carried out as). Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and is in a special gaming state on the condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, in addition to the slot machine and the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various game machines such as an array pachi, a sparrow ball, a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine.

As a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for variably displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols and then confirming the symbol is provided, and a handle for launching a ball is not provided. Things can be mentioned. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the symbol variation is started due to, for example, the operation of the operation lever, and for example, due to the operation of the stop switch or a predetermined amount. As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game is generated that gives the player a predetermined game value on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a predetermined game value. Is for paying out a large amount of balls to the lower saucer. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the ball can be treated as a game value in the game hall, which is a game value seen in the current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the locations where game machines are installed can be solved.

Further, it may be configured to combine all or a part of the configurations of each of the above embodiments.

Hereinafter, in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention, the concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments will be shown.

<Characteristic A group>
The main control means for executing the control of the game and the sub-control means for executing the control of the game according to the control signal from the main control means, and the main control means has the game based on the establishment of the starting condition. It has a winning / failing determination means for executing the winning / failing determination of the above, and a privileged game executing means for executing a privileged game that is advantageous to the player based on the result of the winning / failing determination. The means are an operation means that can be operated by the player, an acquisition means that acquires lottery information based on the operation of the operation means, and a determination means that executes a determination based on the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means. , A display means for displaying an operation effect display mode when a predetermined result is determined by the determination means, a period setting means for setting an effective period for enabling the operation of the operation means, and a predetermined determination means. The probability setting means for setting the probability determined as the result and the probability set by the probability setting means are changed according to the timing at which the operation means is operated within the valid period of 1 set by the period setting means. A gaming machine A1 characterized by having a probability determining means for determining.

According to the gaming machine A1, in the main control means, the winning / failing determination of the game is executed by the winning / failing determination means based on the establishment of the starting condition. Based on the hit / fail determination result being a predetermined result, the privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game execution means. In the slave control means, lottery information is acquired by the acquisition means based on the operation of the operation means that can be operated by the player. The determination is executed by the determination means based on the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means. When a predetermined result is determined by the determination means, the operation effect display mode is displayed on the display means. The validity period for enabling the operation of the operating means is set by the period setting means. The probability that the determination means determines a predetermined result is set by the probability setting means. The probability set by the probability setting means is determined by the probability determining means by varying it according to the timing at which the operating means is operated within the valid period of 1 set by the period setting means. As a result, even within the valid period of 1, the probability that a predetermined result will be obtained is changed depending on the timing of the operation, so that a random effect can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the production of the game, and it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets tired of the game at an early stage.

The gaming machine A1 has a counting means for counting the number of times the operating means is operated within the valid period of 1 set by the period setting means, and the probability determining means performs the operation within the valid period of 1. When the probability is determined at the timing when the means is operated, if the count value by the counting means is a predetermined number of times or more, the probability of being determined as the predetermined result is higher than the probability of being determined based on the timing. A gaming machine A2 characterized by being set.

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the number of times the operating means is operated within the valid period of 1 set by the period setting means is counted by the counting means. When the probability is determined at the timing when the operating means is operated within the valid period of 1, if the count value by the counting means is a predetermined number of times or more, the probability of being determined as a predetermined result is set to that timing by the probability determining means. It is set higher than the probability determined based on. Therefore, when the player operates the operation means many times, it is possible to feel that the operation effect display mode is easily displayed, and there is an effect that the player can be interested by operating the operation means.

The gaming machine A3 is characterized in that, in the gaming machines A1 or A2, the valid period is set by combining periods in which the probabilities determined by the probability determining means are different from each other.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A1 or the gaming machine A2, the validity period is set by combining the periods in which the probabilities determined by the probability determining means are different from each other. There is an effect that the probability can be changed and set according to the timing when the person operates the operating means.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the valid period is set to a non-probability period in which there is no probability that a predetermined result will be obtained by the probabilistic determining means based on the operation of the operating means. The gaming machine A4, characterized in that the above is set.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the non-probability period in which the probability-free period in which the probability of obtaining a predetermined result is not set by the probability-determining means is set as the valid period based on the operation of the operating means, more operating means are used by the player. It has the effect of being able to be operated.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to the gaming machine A4, the probability determining means is set so that the probability of being determined as a predetermined result increases as the remaining period of the valid period decreases. ..

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines A1 to the gaming machine A4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, as the remaining period of the valid period decreases, the probability of determining a predetermined result is set higher by the probability determining means. As a result, it is possible to configure the player to operate the operating means until the valid period is short, and there is an effect that the game can be performed using the operating means.

<Characteristic B group>
The main control means for executing the control of the game and the sub-control means for executing the control of the game according to the control signal from the main control means, and the main control means is based on the establishment of the starting condition, and the game is played. It has a winning / failing determination means for executing the winning / failing determination, and a privileged game executing means for executing a privileged game that is advantageous to the player based on the winning / failing determination result being a predetermined result. The means are an operation means that can be operated by the player, an acquisition means that acquires lottery information based on the operation of the operation means, and a determination means that executes a determination based on the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means. , The display means for displaying the operation effect display mode when the determination means determines a predetermined result, the period setting means for setting the valid period for enabling the operation of the operation means, and the operation means are operated. , A specific effect based on the storage means for storing the remaining period of the valid period when the predetermined result is determined and the total value of the remaining period stored in the storage means becomes a predetermined value or more. The gaming machine B1 is characterized by having a specific effect means for displaying the above on the display means.

According to the gaming machine B1, in the main control means, the winning / failing determination of the game is executed by the winning / failing determination means based on the establishment of the starting condition. Based on the hit / fail determination result being a predetermined result, the privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game execution means. In the slave control means, lottery information is acquired by the acquisition means based on the operation of the operation means that can be operated by the player. The determination is executed by the determination means based on the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means. When a predetermined result is determined by the determination means, the operation effect display mode is displayed on the display means. The validity period for enabling the operation of the operating means is set by the period setting means. When the operating means is operated and a predetermined result is determined, the remaining period of the valid period is stored by the storage means. Based on the fact that the total value of the remaining period stored in the storage means becomes a predetermined value or more, a specific effect is displayed on the display means by the specific effect means. As a result, when the valid period is set, the player can operate the operating means at an earlier timing to obtain a predetermined result, so that a larger remaining valid period can be stored. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested by operating the operation means, and there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets tired of the game at an early stage.

In the game machine B1, the main control means obtains the winning / failing determination information for which the winning / failing determination is executed by the winning / failing determination means based on the establishment of the acquisition condition, and the winning / failing determination information acquired by the acquiring means. The hit / fail judgment information storage means for storing the hit / fail judgment information, the advance / hit / fail judgment means for determining the hit / miss judgment information stored in the hit / miss judgment information storage means before the start condition is satisfied, and the pass / fail judgment means by the prior hit / miss judgment means. The specific effect means has a pre-signal generating means for generating a pre-signal for notifying the subordinate control means of the determination result, and the specific effect means has the pre-determined result in the hit / miss determination information storage means by the pre-signal. The specific effect is displayed on the display means even when the total value stored in the storage means is less than the predetermined value based on the determination that the hit / fail determination information is stored. A game machine B2 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in the main control means, the hit / fail determination information in which the hit / miss determination is executed by the hit / miss determination means is acquired by the acquisition means based on the establishment of the acquisition condition. The hit / fail determination information acquired by the acquisition means is stored in the hit / miss determination information storage means. The hit / fail judgment information stored in the hit / miss judgment information storage means is judged to be hit / miss before the start condition is satisfied by the advance hit / miss judgment means. A prior signal for notifying the slave control means of the result of the hit / fail determination by the prior hit / fail determination means is generated by the advance signal generation means. Even when the total value stored in the storage means is less than the predetermined value based on the determination that the hit / fail determination information having a predetermined result is stored in the hit / miss determination information storage means by the prior signal, a specific effect is produced. Is displayed on the display means by the specific effect means. As a result, the player can expect a predetermined result by the specific effect. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be played with the expectation that a more specific effect will be displayed.

The gaming machine B3 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine B1 or B2, the specific effect is displayed over a period in which a plurality of hit / fail determination results are shown.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B1 or B2, a specific effect is displayed over a period in which the winning / failing judgment result of a plurality of times is shown. Can be easily discriminated as one hit / fail judgment result, and there is an effect that a fresh effect can be provided.

A gaming machine B4, wherein in any of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the specific effect is displayed with a display time corresponding to a total value stored in the storage means.

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines B1 to B3, a specific effect is displayed at a display time corresponding to the total value stored in the storage means, so that the player is stored in the storage means. There is an effect that the total value of the remaining period of the valid period can be recognized.

<Characteristic C group>
The main control means for executing the control of the game and the sub-control means for executing the control of the game according to the control signal from the main control means, and the main control means is based on the establishment of the starting condition, and the game is played. It has a winning / failing determination means for executing the winning / failing determination, and a privileged game executing means for executing a privileged game that is advantageous to the player based on the result of the winning / failing determination. The means are an operation means that can be operated by the player, an acquisition means that acquires lottery information based on the operation of the operation means, and a determination means that executes a determination based on the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means. , The display means for displaying the operation effect display mode when the determination means determines a predetermined result, the period setting means for setting the valid period for enabling the operation of the operation means, and the operation means are operated. , The specific effect of displaying a specific effect on the display means based on the storage means for storing the elapsed period of the valid period when the predetermined result is determined and the total value of the elapsed period stored in the storage means. A gaming machine C1 characterized by having a directing means.

According to the gaming machine C1, in the main control means, the winning / failing determination of the game is executed by the winning / failing determination means based on the establishment of the starting condition. Based on the hit / fail determination result being a predetermined result, the privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game execution means. In the slave control means, lottery information is acquired by the acquisition means based on the operation of the operation means that can be operated by the player. The determination is executed by the determination means based on the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means. When a predetermined result is determined by the determination means, the operation effect display mode is displayed on the display means. The validity period for enabling the operation of the operating means is set by the period setting means. When the operating means is operated and a predetermined result is determined, the elapsed period of the valid period is stored in the storage means. Based on the total value of the elapsed period stored in the storage means, the specific effect is displayed on the display means by the specific effect means. As a result, when the validity period is set, the player can give a privilege by operating the operating means at an earlier timing to obtain a predetermined result. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested by operating the operation means, and there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets tired of the game at an early stage.

<Feature D group>
The main control means for executing the control of the game and the sub-control means for executing the control of the game according to the control signal from the main control means, and the main control means has the game based on the establishment of the starting condition. It has a winning / failing determination means for executing the winning / failing determination, and a privileged game executing means for executing a privileged game that is advantageous to the player based on the result of the winning / failing determination. The means is a display means in which a selection display mode for displaying a plurality of selection candidates that can be selected by the player is displayed, an operation means that can be operated by the player, and the operation means based on the operation in the selection display mode. The selection means for selecting at least one of the displayed selection candidates, the period setting means for setting the valid period for enabling the operation of the operation means, and the operation means are operated, and the selection candidate is selected. In this case, the discriminating means for discriminating the elapsed period of the set valid period, and the display means even after the selection candidate is selected when the discriminating means determines that the elapsed period is equal to or less than a predetermined period. The gaming machine D1 is characterized in that it has at least a history display means for displaying selection candidates other than the selection candidates selected in the selection means, which is displayed in the selection display mode.

According to the gaming machine D1, in the main control means, the winning / failing determination of the game is executed by the winning / failing determination means based on the establishment of the starting condition. Based on the hit / fail determination result being a predetermined result, the privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game execution means. In the slave control means, the display means displays a selection display mode in which a plurality of selection candidates that can be selected by the player are displayed. At least one of the selection candidates displayed in the selection display mode is displayed by the selection means based on the operation on the operation means that can be operated by the player. The validity period for enabling the operation of the operating means is set by the period setting means. When the operating means is operated and a selection candidate is selected, the elapsed period of the set valid period is determined by the determining means. When it is determined by the determination means that the elapsed period is less than or equal to a predetermined period, even after the selection candidate is selected, the selection candidate selected by at least the selection means among those displayed in the selection display mode on the display means. Selection candidates other than are displayed by the history display means. As a result, even when the operating means is operated in a short time after the selection display mode is displayed and it becomes difficult for the player to determine what the selection candidate was, the selection candidate can be confirmed. Therefore, it is possible for the player to play the game in an easy-to-understand manner, and there is an effect that the problem of getting bored with the game at an early stage can be suppressed.

<Feature E group>
The main control means for executing the control of the game and the sub-control means for executing the control of the game according to the control signal from the main control means, and the main control means has the game based on the establishment of the starting condition. It has a winning / failing determination means for executing the winning / failing determination, and a privileged game executing means for executing a privileged game that is advantageous to the player based on the winning / failing determination result being a predetermined result. The means is a period setting means for setting a valid period in which the operation of the operating means is determined to be valid, and a period setting thereof, over a period during which the game to be determined by the winning / failing determining means is executed a predetermined number of times. When the validity period is set by the means, the counting means for counting the number of times the operating means is operated and the number of times the counting means counts are equal to or more than a predetermined predetermined number of times. A gaming machine E1 characterized by having a gaming information giving means for giving specific gaming information to the player.

According to the gaming machine E1, in the main control means, the winning / failing determination of the game is executed by the winning / failing determination means based on the establishment of the starting condition. Based on the hit / fail determination result being a predetermined result, the privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game execution means. In the slave control means, the validity period in which the operation of the operation means is determined to be valid is set by the period setting means over the period during which the game to be determined by the hit / fail determination means is executed a predetermined number of times. When the valid period is set by the period setting means, the number of times the operating means is operated is counted by the counting means. Based on the number of times the counting means counts becomes a predetermined number of times or more, specific game information is given to the player by the game information giving means. As a result, even when the player does not obtain a determination result of a privileged game for a predetermined number of times, specific game information is given by continuously operating the operating means, and the game can be enjoyed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets tired of the game at an early stage.

In the gaming machine E1, the slave control means has an acquisition means for acquiring lottery information based on an operation by the operation means, and a lottery information determination means for determining the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means. When the lottery information determining means determines that the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means is a specific result based on the number of times the game information giving means is equal to or more than the predetermined number of times, the game information giving means said. A gaming machine E2 characterized in that specific gaming information is given to a player.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in the slave control means, the lottery information is acquired by the acquisition means based on the operation by the operation means. The lottery information acquired by the acquisition means is determined by the lottery information determination means. When the lottery information determining means determines that the lottery information acquired by the acquiring means is a specific result based on the number of times exceeding a predetermined number, the specific game information is given by the game information giving means. Granted to the player. As a result, the specific game information may not be given even when the operating means is operated more than a predetermined number of times, and the timing at which the specific game information is given can be randomized. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can provide a fresh game.

In the gaming machine E1 or the gaming machine E2, the counting value by the counting means is less than a predetermined number of times, based on the fact that the game information giving means is determined to be a specific result by the hit / fail determination result. The gaming machine E3 is also characterized in that the specific gaming information is given.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E1 or the gaming machine E2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, based on the determination of a specific result based on the result of the hit / fail determination, specific game information is given by the game information giving means even if the count value by the counting means is less than a predetermined number of times. Therefore, there is an effect that the timing at which specific game information is given can be made more random, and a novel impression can be given to the player.

In any of the game machines E1 to E3, the main control means acquires by the acquisition means for acquiring the pass / fail determination information in which the pass / fail determination is executed by the pass / fail determination means based on the establishment of the acquisition condition, and the acquisition means thereof. A hit / fail determination information storage means for storing the hit / miss determination information, a pre-hit / fail determination means for determining the hit / fail judgment information stored in the hit / miss judgment information storage means before the start condition is satisfied, and a prior The game information giving means has a pre-signal generating means for generating a pre-signal for notifying the sub-control means of the hit / fail determination result by the hit / fail determination means, and the game information giving means stores the hit / fail determination information by the prior signal. Based on the determination that the means has stored the hit / miss determination information having a predetermined result, the specific game information is given even if the count value by the counting means is less than the predetermined number of times. A game machine E4 characterized by being there.

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines E1 to the gaming machine E3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in the main control means, the hit / fail determination information in which the hit / miss determination is executed by the hit / miss determination means is acquired by the acquisition means based on the establishment of the acquisition condition. The hit / fail determination information acquired by the acquisition means is stored in the hit / miss determination information storage means. The hit / fail judgment information stored in the hit / miss judgment information storage means is judged to be hit / miss before the start condition is satisfied by the advance hit / miss judgment means. A prior signal for notifying the slave control means of the result of the hit / fail determination by the prior hit / fail determination means is generated by the advance signal generation means. Even if the count value by the counting means is less than a predetermined number of times, the specific game information is based on the determination that the hit / fail determination information having a predetermined result is stored in the hit / miss determination information storage means by the advance signal. Is given by the game information giving means. As a result, the player can expect a predetermined result based on the specific game information. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be played with the expectation that more specific game information will be displayed.

<Characteristic F group>
It has a main control means for executing game control and a subordinate control means for executing game control according to a control signal from the main control means, and the main control means is drawn based on the establishment of a start condition. The acquisition means for acquiring the information, the success / failure determination execution means for executing the winning / failing determination based on the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means based on the establishment of the lottery condition, and the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means are stored. The storage means to be used, the pre-win / fail determination means for determining the winning / failing of the lottery information stored in the storage means before the lottery condition is satisfied, and the determination result by the prior hit / fail determination means are notified to the slave control means. The sub-control means has a pre-signal generating means for generating a pre-signal for the purpose, and the sub-control means displays identification information indicating a hit / fail determination result by the hit / miss determination means based on a control signal from the main control means. Based on the display means, the dynamic display mode determining means for determining the dynamic display mode of the identification information, and the prior signal, the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determining means is determined in advance. A pre-determination means for determining the time until the hit / fail determination result of the identification information corresponding to the lottery information stored in the storage means is displayed based on the determination result by the pre-determination means. , The operating means that can be operated by the player and the valid period for which the operation by the operating means is determined to be valid are straddled over the period during which the hit / fail determination result is displayed a plurality of times within the time determined by the time determining means. A game machine F1 having a period setting means for setting.

According to the gaming machine F1, in the main control means, lottery information is acquired by the acquisition means based on the establishment of the starting condition. Based on the establishment of the lottery condition, the winning / failing determination is executed by the winning / failing determination executing means based on the lottery information acquired by the acquiring means. The lottery information acquired by the acquisition means is stored in the storage means. The lottery information stored in the storage means is determined to be successful or not before the lottery condition is satisfied by the advance winning / failing determination means. A prior signal for notifying the slave control means of the determination result by the prior hit / fail determination means is generated by the prior signal generation means. In the slave control means, identification information indicating the result of the hit / miss determination by the hit / miss determination means is displayed by the display means based on the control signal from the main control means. The dynamic display mode of the identification information is determined by the dynamic display mode determining means. Based on the prior signal, the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determining means is preliminarily determined by the pre-determining means. Based on the determination result by the prior determination means, the time until the hit / fail determination result of the identification information corresponding to the lottery information stored in the storage means is displayed is determined by the time determination means. The validity period for which the operation by the operation means that can be operated by the player is determined to be valid is set by the period setting means over the period in which the hit / fail judgment result is displayed a plurality of times within the time determined by the time determination means. ..

As a result, the validity period is set across the dynamic display mode in which the result of the hit / fail judgment is displayed a plurality of times, so that a more novel effect can be provided to the player. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the gaming machine at an early stage.

<Characteristic G group>
The main control means for executing the control of the game and the sub-control means for executing the control of the game according to the control signal from the main control means, and the main control means is based on the establishment of the starting condition, and the game is played. It has a winning / failing determination means for executing the winning / failing determination of the above, and a privileged game executing means for executing a privileged game that is advantageous to the player based on the result of the winning / failing determination. The means are an operating means that can be operated by the player, a period setting means for setting an effective period for validating the operation of the operating means, and a length of the effective period set by the period setting means depending on the size of the display area. The identification symbol display means for displaying the identification symbol indicating the value, the variable means for varying the size of the display area of the identification symbol so that the remaining valid period can be identified based on the passage of time, and the above-mentioned Based on the operation means being operated within the valid period, the game information giving means for giving game information to the player and the game information given by the game information giving means are determined from a plurality of game information. A storage means in which at least the first game information and the second game information different from the first game information are stored as the game information determined by the game information determining means to be performed and the given information determining means, and the valid period. Of the information period setting means for setting the first period in which the first game information is easily selected and the second period in which the second game information is easily selected, and the second period set by the information period setting means. The gaming machine G1 is characterized by having an identification information giving means for giving identification information that can be identified from the size of the display area of the identification symbol within the period.

According to the gaming machine G1, in the main control means, the winning / failing determination of the game is executed by the winning / failing determination means based on the establishment of the starting condition. Based on the hit / fail determination result being a predetermined result, the privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game execution means. In the slave control means, the validity period for enabling the operation of the operation means that can be operated by the player is set by the period setting means. An identification symbol indicating the length of the valid period set by the period setting means according to the size of the display area is displayed by the identification symbol display means. Based on the passage of time, the size of the display area of the identification symbol is changed by the variable means so that the remaining validity period can be identified. Game information is given to the player by the game information giving means based on the fact that the operating means is operated within the valid period. The game information given by the game information giving means is determined by the game information determining means from among a plurality of game information. As the game information determined by the given information determining means, at least the first game information and the second game information different from the first game information are stored by the storage means. Of the valid periods, the first period in which the first game information is easily selected and the second period in which the second game information is easily selected are set by the information period setting means. Identification information that can be identified from the size of the display area of the identification symbol within the second period set by the information period setting means is given by the identification information giving means. As a result, it is possible to notify that different game information can be easily obtained depending on the timing at which the player operates the operating means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can enjoy the game using the operation means more, and the problem that the player gets tired of the game at an early stage can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine G1, the slave control means provides an enlarged display means for displaying the second period identification information in a larger size than usual, based on the determination by the hit / fail determination means that the result is a predetermined result. A gaming machine D2 characterized by having.

According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G1, in the slave control means, the second period identification information is usually displayed by the enlarged display means based on the determination by the hit / fail determination means that the result is a predetermined result. Since the display is enlarged compared to the time, there is an effect that the player can expect the hit / fail determination result to be a predetermined result by expanding the second period identification information.

In the gaming machines G1 or G2, the identification information giving means is characterized in that when a predetermined lottery is executed and it is determined that the granting condition is satisfied, the identification information for the second period is given. Game machine G3.

According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G1 or G2, when it is determined that the granting condition is satisfied by executing a predetermined lottery, the second period identification information is given by the identification information giving means. Therefore, it is possible to randomly set the case where the second period information is given, and there is an effect that the player can be provided with a fresh game.

<Characteristic H group>
The main control means for executing the control of the game and the sub-control means for executing the control of the game according to the control signal from the main control means, and the main control means has the game based on the establishment of the starting condition. It has a winning / failing determination means for executing the winning / failing determination, and a privileged game executing means for executing a privileged game that is advantageous to the player based on the result of the winning / failing determination. The means has a display means for displaying identification information indicating a determination result by the hit / miss determination means according to a control signal from the main control means, and a plurality of dynamic display modes of the identification information displayed on the display means. A predetermined dynamic display mode is determined by the dynamic display mode determining means for determining one dynamic display mode from the display modes, the operating means that can be operated by the player, and the dynamic display mode determining means. Based on the above, based on the period setting means for setting the valid period for enabling the operation of the operating means and the operation of the operating means within the valid period set by the period setting means. It has an operation display means for displaying the operation display mode on the display means, and the period setting means is set before the first valid period in which the operation display mode is displayed and the first valid period. It is intended to set at least the second valid period, and to have a prohibiting means for prohibiting the setting of the first valid period or the setting of the operation display mode within the second valid period. Characteristic gaming machine H1.

According to the gaming machine H1, in the main control means, the winning / failing determination of the game is executed by the winning / failing determination means based on the establishment of the starting condition. Based on the hit / fail determination result being a predetermined result, the privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game execution means. In the slave control means, the identification information indicating the determination result by the hit / miss determination means is displayed on the display means according to the control signal from the main control means. The dynamic display mode of the identification information displayed on the display means is determined by the dynamic display mode determining means from among a plurality of dynamic display modes. Based on the determination of the predetermined dynamic display mode by the dynamic display mode determining means, the period setting means sets the valid period for enabling the operation of the operating means. Based on the operation of the operation means within the valid period set by the period setting means, the operation display mode is displayed on the display means by the operation display means. The first valid period in which the operation display mode is displayed and the second valid period set before the first valid period are at least set by the period setting means. Within the second valid period, the setting of the first valid period is prohibited or the setting of the operation display mode is prohibited by the prohibiting means. As a result, the setting of the first validity period or the setting of the operation display mode is prohibited, so that various games can be provided to the player. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets tired of the game at an early stage.

In the gaming machine H1, the prohibited means prohibits the setting of the first valid period or prohibits the setting of the operation display mode when a predetermined operation is executed by the operating means within the second valid period. The gaming machine H2, which is characterized in that it is to be played.

According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine H1, when a predetermined operation is executed by the operating means within the second valid period, the setting of the first valid period is prohibited or the operation display mode is set. Is prohibited by the prohibited means, so that the player can set the prohibition by operating the operating means, and there is an effect that the prohibition can be set according to the player's preference.

In the gaming machine H1 or H2, the display means displays the privilege game display mode when the privilege game is executed, and the operation display mode is displayed as the privilege game display mode. A gaming machine H3 characterized by being present.

According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines H1 or H2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the privilege game is executed, the privilege game display mode is displayed by the display means. The operation display mode is displayed as the privilege game display mode. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored during the privilege game.

In the gaming machine H3, the privilege game display mode is composed of at least a privilege game start display mode indicating the start of the privilege game and a privilege game in-game display mode indicating that the privilege game is being executed, and the period setting means. Is characterized in that the second valid period is set during the period when the privilege game start display mode is displayed, and the first valid period is set during the period when the privilege game start display mode is displayed. Game machine H4 to play.

According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, at least the privilege game display mode is configured by the privilege game start display mode indicating the start of the privilege game and the privilege game in-game display mode indicating that the privilege game is being executed. The second valid period is set by the period setting means during the period when the privilege game start display mode is displayed. In addition, the first valid period is set by the period setting means during the period in which the display mode during the privilege game is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to set whether to set prohibition at the start of the privilege game, and there is an effect that the game can be concentrated on the subsequent privilege game.

<Feature I group>
A winning / failing determination means for executing a winning / failing determination based on the establishment of the lottery condition, a first display means capable of displaying identification information indicating the winning / failing determination result of the winning / failing determination means, and an identification displayed on the first display means. A dynamic display mode determining means for determining a dynamic display mode of information, a rotating body configured to be rotatable, a detecting means capable of detecting the amount of rotation of the rotating body, and times detected by the detecting means. The first display control means for variably displaying the dynamic display mode based on the momentum, the second display means for visually arranging the display mode inside the rotating body, and the second display means for the second display means. 1 The gaming machine I1 characterized by having a second display control means for displaying a display mode related to the content displayed on the display means.

According to the gaming machine I1, the winning / failing determination is executed by the winning / failing determination means based on the establishment of the lottery condition. The identification information indicating the result of the hit / miss determination of the hit / miss determination means is displayed by the first display means. The dynamic display mode of the identification information displayed on the first display means is determined by the dynamic display mode determining means. The amount of rotation of the rotatably configured rotating body is detected by the detecting means. The dynamic display mode is variably displayed by the first display control means based on the amount of rotation detected by the detection means. The display mode related to the content displayed on the first display means is displayed on the second display means visibly arranged inside the rotating body by the second display control means. As a result, the display mode related to the content displayed on the first display means is also displayed inside the rotating body, so that the content displayed on the first display means can be grasped even if the rotating body is distracted. Can be done. Therefore, there is an effect that a gaming machine that is easy for a player to play can be provided.

In the gaming machine I1, the second display means is a projection means that projects a display image from the outside of the rotating body toward the inside of the rotating body, and is visibly arranged inside the rotating body from the projection means. The gaming machine I2 is characterized by having a display unit on which a projected display image is displayed.

According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the display image is projected onto the second display means from the outside of the rotating body toward the inside of the rotating body by the projection means. It is visibly arranged inside the rotating body, and the display image projected from the projection means is displayed on the display unit. Therefore, there is an effect that the configuration arranged inside the rotating body can be reduced and the rotating body can be compactly configured.

In the gaming machine I2, the gaming machine I3 is characterized in that the display unit is formed of a spherical surface bulging upward.

According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I2, since the display unit is composed of a spherical surface bulging upward, the display image projected on the display unit can be made to appear more three-dimensional. effective.

<Characteristic J group>
A winning / failing determination means for executing a winning / failing determination based on the establishment of the lottery condition, a first display means capable of displaying identification information indicating the winning / failing determination result of the winning / failing determination means, and an identification displayed on the identification information display means. A dynamic display mode determining means for determining a dynamic display mode of information, a second display means different from the first display means, and a display surface of the second display means are visibly covered and pressed by a player. It is displayed on the first display means based on the cover body capable of performing the pressing operation, the detecting means capable of detecting that the cover body has been pressed, and the pressing operation detected by the detecting means. Based on the execution of the dynamic display of the identification information and the first display control means for varying the display mode, the press display mode in which the display mode can be changed by pressing the cover body is selected. Based on the pressing display mode selection means and the pressing display mode selecting means selecting the pressing display mode, the display mode relating to the dynamic display mode of the identification information displayed on the first display means is displayed in the second display. A gaming machine J1 having a second display control means that is also displayed on the means.

According to the gaming machine J1, the winning / failing determination is executed by the winning / failing determination means based on the establishment of the lottery conditions. The identification information indicating the result of the hit / miss determination of the hit / miss determination means is displayed by the first display means. The dynamic display mode of the identification information displayed on the identification information display means is determined by the dynamic display mode determining means. The detection means detects that the cover body, which covers the display surface of the second display means different from the first display means and can be pressed by the player, has been pressed. Based on the fact that the pressing operation is detected by the detection means, the display mode displayed on the first display means is changed by the first display control means. Based on the execution of the dynamic display of the identification information, the pressing display mode in which the display mode is changed by pressing the cover body is selected by the pressing display mode selecting means. Based on the fact that the pressed display mode is selected by the pressed display mode selecting means, the display mode relating to the dynamic display mode of the identification information displayed on the first display means is also changed to the second display means by the second display control means. Is displayed. As a result, when the player presses the button, the display mode related to the display mode displayed on the first display means is displayed on the second display means, so that even if the line of sight is moved to the cover body, the first display mode is displayed. It is possible to suppress a problem that the display content displayed on the display means is overlooked and it becomes difficult to play the game. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can play the game more easily.

<Characteristic K group>
A display means capable of detecting that the player has touched the display surface, a cover body that visually covers the display surface of the display means and can be pressed by the player, and the display always described above. When the display surface of the means and the cover body are urged to a first position maintained at a predetermined interval and the cover body is pressed, the display surface of the display means and the cover body come close to each other. It is characterized by having an urging means that allows the cover body to move to the second position, and a determination means that determines that the player's touch operation is effective by moving the cover body to the second position. The game machine K1.

According to the gaming machine K1, the display means detects that the player has touched the display surface. Always, the display surface of the display means and the display surface of the display means are visibly covered, and the cover body that can be pressed by the player is urged to the first position maintained at a predetermined interval. By pressing the cover body, the urging means allows the display surface of the display means to move to a second position where the cover body approaches. When the cover body moves to the second position, the player's touch operation is determined to be effective by the determination means. As a result, even if the cover body is accidentally touched, the touch operation is not effective unless the cover body is in the second position, so that malfunction can be suppressed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can play the game more easily.

In the gaming machine K1, the second position is configured at a position where the cover body and the display surface of the display means come into contact with each other, and the cover body is electrically conductive when it comes into contact with the display surface of the display means. A gaming machine C2 characterized in that it is configured to be capable of playing.

According to the gaming machine K1, the position where the cover body and the display surface of the display means come into contact with each other is set to the second position. The cover body is configured to be electrically conductive when it comes into contact with the display surface of the display means. As a result, there is an effect that the touch operation can be accurately recognized even if the touch operation is performed through the cover body.

In the gaming machine K1 or K2, the second display control means is touch-operated between the specific two points, and the interval is changed by the touch operation so that the interval between the two points is opened or narrowed. The gaming machine K3 is characterized in that the image displayed on the second display means is enlarged or reduced and displayed based on the amount.

According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine K1 or K2, a touch operation is performed between two specific points, and the interval is touch-operated so that the interval between the two points is opened or narrowed. Since the image displayed on the second display means is enlarged or reduced by the second display control means based on the amount of change in the above, the display mode displayed by the player is set to an arbitrary size. It has the effect of making it easier to play.

The gaming machine Z1 is characterized in that each of the gaming machines is a pachinko gaming machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and the ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in a predetermined position in the game area. As a prerequisite for winning a prize (or passing through a winning opening), the identification information dynamically displayed by the display means may be fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable a ball to be won, and is valuable according to the number of winnings. Some are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written on a magnetic card).

The gaming machine Z2, wherein each of the gaming machines is a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of a slot machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming the identification information is provided for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to this, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and at the time of the stop. A gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, provided that the definite identification information of the above is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, and the like are typical examples of the game medium.

The gaming machine Z3 is characterized in that each of the gaming machines is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the fused gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The variation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player is provided on the condition that the definite identification information at the time of stopping is the specific identification information, the ball is used as the game medium, and the identification information is described. A game machine that requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of the game, and is configured to pay out a large number of balls when a special game state occurs. "

10 Pachinko machine (game machine)
81 Third symbol display device (first display means)
113 Voice lamp control device (second display control means)
114 Control display device (first display control means)
701 Cover body (cover body)
702 touch panel (second display means)
S305 Pass / fail determination means S307, S309 Dynamic display mode determination means S1824 Pressed display mode selection means

The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine or the like.

Conventionally, it performs a lottery with the winning of the game ball to the starting opening, the change production and directing those of or in accordance with the lottery result, pachinko machine or the like to be displayed on the liquid crystal screen is known. In such a production, various patterns of production such as a production to give the player a sense of expectation and a production to increase the player's motivation to participate in the game are executed to improve the interest of the game. .. Among these types of pachinko machines, a gaming machine is proposed in which the gaming machine is provided with an operating means (switch, etc.) that can be operated by the player, and the player operates the operating means to change the production of the game. Has been done.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-075741

In this type of pachinko machine, there is a problem that the player gets tired of the game early.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing a player from getting bored with a game at an early stage.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 has a main control means for executing control of the game and a slave control means for executing control of the game according to a control signal from the main control means. The main control means is a privilege game that is advantageous to the player based on the success / failure determination means for executing the success / failure determination of the game based on the establishment of the start condition and the success / failure determination result being a predetermined result. The slave control means includes an operation means that can be operated by the player, an acquisition means that acquires lottery information based on the operation of the operation means, and an acquisition means thereof. Enables the determination means for executing the determination based on the lottery information acquired by the above, the display means for displaying the operation effect display mode when the determination means determines a predetermined result, and the operation of the operation means. A period setting means for setting an effective period, a probability setting means for setting a probability of being determined as a predetermined result by the determination means, and a probability set by the probability setting means of 1 set by the period setting means. Probability determining means for variably determining the operating means within the valid period according to the timing of operation, means for detecting that the operating means has been operated within the valid period of 1, and the detecting means for the operation. It has a resetting means for extending and resetting the valid period based on the fact that the remaining period of the valid period becomes the predetermined period or less when the number of times the operation of the means is detected is equal to or greater than the predetermined number of times. When the validity period is set by the period setting means, the gaming machine dynamically displays a suggestion mode indicating the remaining period of the set validity period, and the resetting means dynamically displays the suggestion mode. When is extended, the extended period can be displayed in a display mode different from the remaining period before the extension .

The gaming machine according to claim 1 has a main control means for executing game control and a slave control means for executing game control in accordance with a control signal from the main control means, and the main control means. Is a winning / failing determination means for executing a winning / failing determination of a game based on the establishment of a starting condition, and a privileged game for executing a privileged game that is advantageous to the player based on the winning / failing determination result being a predetermined result. The slave control means includes an execution means, an operation means that can be operated by the player, an acquisition means that acquires lottery information based on the operation of the operation means, and a lottery acquired by the acquisition means. A determination means for executing the determination based on the information, a display means for displaying the operation effect display mode when the determination means determines a predetermined result, and an effective period for validating the operation of the operation means are set. The period setting means, the probability setting means for setting the probability of determining a predetermined result by the determination means, and the probability set by the probability setting means within the valid period of 1 set by the period setting means. Probability determining means for variably determining the operating means according to the timing of operation, means for detecting that the operating means have been operated within the valid period of 1 above, and the detecting means for detecting the operation of the operating means. The gaming machine has a resetting means for extending and resetting the valid period based on the fact that the remaining period of the valid period is equal to or less than the predetermined period when the number of times is greater than or equal to the predetermined number of times. When the validity period is set by the period setting means, a suggestion mode indicating the remaining period of the set validity period is dynamically displayed, and the validity period is extended by the resetting means. Is configured so that the extended period can be displayed in a display mode different from the remaining period before the extension .

I I, there is an effect that can suppress the problem that the player would get bored in the game at an early stage.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen, and (b) is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen. (A) to (b) are diagrams showing an example of the display mode of the SW effect displayed on the third symbol display device. (A) to (b) are diagrams showing an example of the display mode of the SW effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the second embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the outline of various counters. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM of the MPU of the main control device, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the first hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type in the special symbol. (B) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the first hit random number counter C1 and the hit in the special symbol, and (d) is the second hit random number counter C4 and ordinary. It is a schematic diagram which shows the correspondence relationship with the hit in the symbol typically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which showed the special symbol variation start processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol variation processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the thru gate passing process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interrupt process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process which is executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which showed the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the variation display setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring / effect processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the lottery probability setting process executed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the pachinko machine in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the lottery probability setting process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the lottery probability setting process 3 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the modification of 2nd Embodiment. (A) to (b) are diagrams showing an example of the display mode of the SW effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the third embodiment. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM of the MPU of the main control unit in the third embodiment, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM of the MPU of the main control unit in the third embodiment. FIG. 3C is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the display lottery table according to the third embodiment. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the comment selection table in the third embodiment, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the indicator setting data in the third embodiment. (A) to (b) are diagrams schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern selection table in the third embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the variation pattern selection process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 3 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the mission setting process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 3rd Embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing an example of an opening display mode displayed on the third symbol display device in the jackpot game in the fourth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the opening display mode displayed in the jackpot game in the fourth embodiment, and (b) is the third symbol in the jackpot game in the fourth embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example of the round display mode displayed on a display device. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM of the MPU of the main control device in the fourth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the opening display mode selection table in the fourth embodiment. It is a figure shown. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process 3 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the opening process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 4 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the customer waiting effect processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the process during the demo screen display executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 4th Embodiment. (A) is a timing chart showing the transition of the background mode in the fifth embodiment, and (b) is a timing chart showing the transition of the background mode in the modified example of the fifth embodiment. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM of the MPU of the main control device in the fifth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM of the MPU of the main control device in the fifth embodiment. FIG. 3C is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the background change lottery table in the fifth embodiment. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing a command determination process 4 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device according to the fifth embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 5 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the background change process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 5th Embodiment. It is a figure which showed the timing chart when the SW effect in 6th Embodiment is executed. (A) to (b) are diagrams showing the display mode of the SW effect displayed by the third symbol display device in the sixth embodiment. (A) to (b) are diagrams showing the display mode of the SW effect displayed by the third symbol display device in the sixth embodiment. (A) to (b) are diagrams showing the display mode of the SW effect displayed by the third symbol display device in the sixth embodiment. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM of the MPU of the main control unit in the sixth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM of the MPU of the main control unit in the sixth embodiment. FIG. 3C is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the maximum value selection table in the fifth embodiment. 6 is a flowchart showing a command determination process 5 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device according to the sixth embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the winning command reception process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 6 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 6th Embodiment. (A) to (b) are diagrams showing the display mode of the SW effect displayed by the third symbol display device in the seventh embodiment. (A) to (b) are diagrams showing the display mode of the SW effect displayed by the third symbol display device in the seventh embodiment. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM of the MPU of the main control device in the seventh embodiment, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the comment selection table in the seventh embodiment. It is a figure. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing a command determination process 6 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing a frame button input monitoring / effect processing 7 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device according to the seventh embodiment. (A) to (c) are diagrams showing the display mode of the SW effect displayed by the third symbol display device in the eighth embodiment. (A) to (b) are diagrams showing the display mode of the SW effect displayed by the third symbol display device in the eighth embodiment, and (c) is a setting prohibiting the SW effect in the eighth embodiment. It is a timing chart when doing. It is a figure which showed typically the contents of the RAM of the MPU of the main control device in 8th Embodiment. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing a command determination process 7 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device according to the eighth embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the opening process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the round processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 8 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 8th Embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the opening display mode of the jackpot game displayed by the third symbol display device in the modified example of the eighth embodiment, and (b) is the SW effect in the eighth embodiment. It is a timing chart in the case of, and (c) is a timing chart in the case of no SW in the eighth embodiment. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the ninth embodiment. It is a four-view view of the rotating body switch in the ninth embodiment. It is an exploded perspective view of the rotating body switch in 9th Embodiment. It is sectional drawing of the rotating body switch in 9th Embodiment. (A) is an example of a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device in the ninth embodiment, and (b) is an example of a display mode displayed on the rotating body switch in the ninth embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the pachinko machine in 9th Embodiment. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM of the voice lamp control device according to the ninth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM of the voice lamp control device according to the ninth embodiment. It is a figure shown. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 9th Embodiment. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing a command determination process 8 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device according to the ninth embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the sphere display scenario setting process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 9th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the sphere display processing executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 9th Embodiment. 9 is a flowchart showing a frame button input monitoring / effect processing 7 executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device according to a ninth embodiment. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing a rotation operation determination process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device according to the ninth embodiment. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the tenth embodiment. It is an enlarged view of the liquid crystal type switch in 10th Embodiment. (A) is a cross-sectional view before the liquid crystal type switch in the tenth embodiment is pressed, and (b) is a cross-sectional view when the liquid crystal type switch in the tenth embodiment is pressed. (A) to (b) are examples of display modes displayed on the touch panel according to the tenth embodiment. (A) to (b) are examples of display modes displayed on the touch panel according to the tenth embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the pachinko machine in tenth embodiment. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM of the voice lamp control device according to the tenth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM of the voice lamp control device according to the tenth embodiment. It is a figure shown. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in tenth embodiment. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing a command determination process 9 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device according to the tenth embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the SW liquid crystal display setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in tenth embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the SW liquid crystal display processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in tenth embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 8 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 10th Embodiment.

Hereinafter, the first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. It is provided with an inner frame 12 that is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) in order to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning openings 63, 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back surface side. A ball game is performed by a ball flowing down the front surface of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 includes a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 6) that launches a ball into the front region of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front region of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) etc. are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. Metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, and the front frame with the side on which the hinge 19 is provided as an opening / closing axis. The 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface. The lock of the inner frame 12 and the lock of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is formed by assembling decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open so as to project forward, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a by the inclination. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is used by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed by the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) described later, or changing the effect content of the super reach. Be manipulated.

On the other hand, the third symbol display device 81 is configured so that when the normal reach effect is started and the normal reach is developed into the super reach, the selection screen of the effect mode of the super reach is displayed during the normal reach. If the frame button 22 is operated by the player while the selection screen is displayed, the effect content at the time of super reach is changed.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change and control the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect during the game. Illuminations 29 to 33 having a light emitting means such as an LED are provided on the peripheral edge of the window 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination unit 29 to 33 lights up by lighting or blinking the built-in LED at the time of jackpot or reach production. Or, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is built in, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying when the prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs is provided.

Further, on the lower side of the illuminated portion 32 on the right side, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back surface side so that the back surface side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a sticking space K1 on the front surface of the game board 13 (FIG. The certificate stamp or the like attached to (see 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more glitter, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin having chrome plating is attached to a region around the illuminated portions 29 to 33.

A ball lending operation unit 40 is arranged below the window unit 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which balance information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the balance is displayed as numerical value as balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine, does not require a ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 is not required. A decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the above to make the component configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines and cash machines that use card units.

In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface in the central portion thereof. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive the ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is arranged, and driving of the ball launching unit 112a is permitted inside the operation handle 51. Touch sensor 51a for this purpose, push button type stop switch 51b that stops firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and variable resistor that detects the amount of rotation operation of the operation handle 51 by the change of electrical resistance. (Not shown) and is built-in. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the operation amount, depending on the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. The ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes, and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball pulling lever 52 for operating the ball stored in the lower plate 50 when the ball stored in the lower plate 50 is discharged downward is provided in the lower portion of the front surface of the lower plate 50. The ball pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened, and the bottom opening is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as "Senryobako") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. An operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and an ashtray 53 is attached to the left side of the lower plate 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in front view, a large number of nails and windmills for ball guidance, rails 61, 62, a general winning opening 63, and a first. The ball entry port 64, the variable winning device 65, the variable display device unit 80, and the like are assembled and configured, and the peripheral edge portion thereof is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in the through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are wood screws from the front side of the game board 13. It is fixed by etc. Further, the front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back so that the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by a ball. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a substantially circular area (a winning opening or the like is arranged and the launched ball is arranged) formed on the front surface of the game board 13 by being divided by two rails 61 and 62 and an arc member 70. The area where it flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 6) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage. Will be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a predetermined momentum hits the return rubber 69 and has momentum. Is dampened and bounced back toward the center. Further, a resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side is used as a base between the lower right tip of the inner rail 61 and the upper right tip of the outer rail 62. It is fixed by driving it into the plate 60.

In the pachinko machine 10, a special symbol (first symbol) is drawn when the ball enters the first entrance 64, and when the ball passes through the second entrance 67, a normal symbol (first symbol) is drawn. 2 symbols) will be drawn. In the special symbol lottery performed for entering the first ball entrance 64, whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is determined, and if it is determined to be a special symbol jackpot, the jackpot type is determined. Is also determined. When the jackpot of the special symbol is reached, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special gaming state, and the special winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed, or until 10 balls are won. ) It is released, and the opening is repeated 5 times (5 rounds). As a result, a large number of balls are won in the specific winning opening 65a, so that a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than in the normal case. There are two types of special symbols, "Big hit A" and "Big hit B". After the end of the special game state, as added value after the end of the big hit, the game according to these big hit types Value (game value) is given to the player.

Further, when the special symbol (first symbol) is drawn, the variable display of the special symbol is started on the first symbol display device 37, and after a predetermined time (for example, 11 seconds to 60 seconds) has elapsed, the special symbol is displayed. A special symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. If a ball enters the first entry port 64 while the variable display is being performed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of entry is suspended up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed on the first symbol. It is shown by the device 37 and also shown by the third symbol display device 81. When the variation display is completed in the first symbol display device 37, if the number of reserved balls for the first entry port 64 remains, the next special symbol lottery is performed and the variation display according to the lottery is performed. Is started. The special winning opening 65a, which is opened and closed when the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special gaming state, is provided immediately below the first entry opening 64. Therefore, during the special gaming state, the player hits a ball in an attempt to win a prize in the special winning opening 65a, so that many balls also enter the first entry opening 64. Therefore, in most cases, the number of reserved balls for the first entry port 64 becomes the maximum (4 times) while the pachinko machine 10 is in the special gaming state.

On the other hand, in the lottery of the normal symbol performed for the passage of the ball at the second entrance 67, the winning or not judgment of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is performed. When it hits a normal symbol, the electric accessory attached to the first entry port 64 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second), and the ball can easily enter the first entry port 64. Become in a state. That is, when the ball hits the normal symbol, the ball easily enters the first entry port 64, and as a result, the lottery of the special symbol is easily performed.

Further, when the lottery of the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed, the variable display of the normal symbol is started on the second symbol display device 83, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds, 30 seconds, etc.) has elapsed, the normal symbol is displayed. The normal symbol showing the lottery result is stopped and displayed. If a ball passes through the second entrance 67 while the variable display is being performed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of passes is suspended up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is the number of the reserved balls 37. It is also indicated by the second symbol holding lamp 84. When the variation display is completed in the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls for the second entry port 67 remains, the next normal symbol lottery is performed and the variation display according to the lottery is performed. Is started.

As described above, there are two types of special symbols, "big hit A" and "big hit B".

In both cases of "big hit A" and "big hit B", the number of rounds is 16 rounds in a special gaming state (16R big hit), and if it is "big hit A", the big hit ends as an added value after the big hit ends. From later until the next special symbol hits the jackpot, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the high probability state of the special symbol (during the probability change of the special symbol). Further, in "Big hit B", the winning probability of the normal symbol increases from the end of the big hit to the end of the lottery of the special symbol 100 times.

Here, the "high probability state of the special symbol" means a state in which the jackpot probability of the special symbol is increased, that is, the probability state of the so-called special symbol (during the probability change of the special symbol), in other words, the special game state (16R jackpot). ) Is a state of the game that is easy to shift to. On the other hand, the case where it is not the "high probability state of the special symbol" is called the "low probability state of the special symbol", which means that the jackpot probability is lower than the probability variation state of the special symbol, that is, the jackpot probability of the special symbol is normal. Indicates a state (normal state of a special symbol). Further, the "normal symbol time-saving state" (normal symbol time-saving medium) refers to a game state in which the probability of hitting the normal symbol is increased and the ball can easily enter the first entry port 64. On the other hand, the time when it is not "the time saving state of the normal symbol" is called "the normal state of the normal symbol", which indicates that the hit probability of the normal symbol is the normal state, that is, the state where the hit probability is lower than that during the time saving. ..

Hereinafter, the period during which the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot of the special symbol is referred to as the probability variation state (probability variation period) of the special symbol. In addition, the period from the end of the jackpot of the special symbol to the period when the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol, that is, from the end of the jackpot B to the end of the lottery of the special symbol a predetermined number of times (100 times). , Ordinary design is called a short-time period.

As described above, in the jackpot of the special symbol in the present embodiment, the number of rounds at the time of the jackpot and the probability variation period of the special symbol are common regardless of the type of jackpot, and the "time reduction of the normal symbol" is made according to the type of the jackpot. The period of "state" is changed. On the other hand, the number of rounds may be changed according to the type of jackpot, or the number of rounds may be changed only for a part of the type of jackpot. In addition, for example, instead of changing the period during which the "normal symbol time is shortened" depending on the type of jackpot, the time for opening the electric accessory (not shown) attached to the first entry port 64, or once. The number of times the electric accessory is opened may be changed by hitting the normal symbol of. Further, in the present embodiment, after the jackpot ends, the "special symbol high probability state" and the "normal symbol time saving state" are set, but after the "special symbol high probability state" ends, the "normal symbol time saving state" is reached. May be configured to be.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot type is "big hit B", the time saving state of the normal symbol is continued from the end of the "big hit B" until the lottery of the special symbol is completed 100 times, but the time saving state is continued. The period may be set arbitrarily.

If a new special symbol jackpot A is reached while the "special symbol high-probability state" is continuing, the "special symbol high-probability state" will be further special after the end of the new special symbol jackpot. It will continue until the big hit of the design.

A first symbol provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter, abbreviated as "LED") 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light emitting means, on the upper right side of the game area when viewed from the front (upper right side in FIG. 2). A display device 37 is arranged. The first symbol display device 37 displays according to each control performed by the main control device 110, which will be described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a display or fluctuate by indicating whether or not a lottery of special symbols performed in association with entering the first ball opening 64 (starting winning) is being executed by the lighting state. As a stop symbol after the end, a special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol is shown by the lighting state, or the fluctuation of the balls entered in the first entry port 64 is not executed. The number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls), is indicated by the lighting state.

If a ball enters the first entry port 64 while the special symbol (first symbol) is variablely displayed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of entry is suspended up to four times. The number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the ball entering the first ball entry port 64 is configured to be held up to 4 times, but the maximum number of times of holding is not limited to 4 times and is 3 times or less. , Or it may be set to 5 times or more (for example, 8 times).

The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds during the jackpot and an error. The LED 37a is configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of each LED are different, and depending on the combination of the emission colors, various gaming states (high probability state of a special symbol) of the pachinko machine 10 are used with a small number of LEDs. Or, it is possible to display (such as during the time reduction of ordinary symbols). Further, the LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, and if it is a jackpot, the jackpot type (big hit A, jackpot B, jackpot C). A special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to the above is shown.

Further, in the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are arranged in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win a prize. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter, simply abbreviated as “display device”) and a second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs. .. In the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 performs decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when a ball enters the first ball entry port 64 (starting prize), the first symbol display device 37 executes a variable display of a special symbol (first symbol) with that as a trigger. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large liquid crystal display having an size of 8 inches, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 described later, for example, three symbols of left, middle, and right are used. The column is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the game state displayed by the control of the main control device 110 is displayed by the first symbol display device 37, whereas the third symbol display device 81 displays the first symbol display device 37. A decorative display is made accordingly. In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a drawing for explaining a display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 4A is a diagram schematically showing an area division setting and an effective line setting of the display screen. FIG. 4B is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

The third symbol is composed of 10 types of main symbols with numbers from "0" to "9". Each main symbol is composed of a rear symbol consisting of a wooden box with numbers from "0" to "9", of which the main symbols with odd numbers (1,3,5,7,9) are , A large number is added to almost the front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main symbols with even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) have attached symbols that imitate characters such as furoshiki and helmets, which are almost full on the front of the wooden box. Even numbers are added to the lower right side of the attached symbol so that they are small in green and displayed on the front side of the attached symbol.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 6) described later is a big hit, a variable display in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed. , The jackpot is configured to occur after the fluctuation display is finished. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, a variable display is performed in which the same main symbol is not aligned.

For example, if the lottery result of the special symbol is "big hit B", the variable display is performed in which the main symbols to which the even numbers "0, 2, 4, 6, 8" are added are aligned. Further, in the case of "big hit A", a variable display is performed in which the main symbols to which the odd numbers "1,3,5,7,9" are added are aligned. Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, combinations of predetermined main symbols indicating small hits (for example, on the effective line L1, the combinations of the main symbols are "3" and "4" in order from the left symbol row Z1. "1") is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 4A, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into upper and lower halves, and the lower two-thirds are the main display area Dm for variable display of the third symbol, and the rest. The upper 1/3 of is a sub-display area Ds for displaying the advance notice effect, the character, the number of reserved balls, and the like.

The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 on the left, middle, and right, and three symbol columns Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-mentioned third symbols are displayed in a specified order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in the ascending or descending order of the numbers in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the variable display is performed by scrolling from top to bottom with periodicity for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. In particular, in the left symbol row Z1, the numbers of the main symbols appear in descending order, and in the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3, the numbers of the main symbols appear in ascending order.

Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbol is displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three rows for each symbol row Z1 to Z3. The middle part of this main display area Dm is set as the effective line L1, and the third symbol stops on the effective line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1 → the right symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2 in each game. Is displayed. When the third symbol is stopped, if the combination of jackpot symbols (in the present embodiment, the same combination of main symbols) is aligned on the effective line L1, the jackpot moving image is displayed as a jackpot.

On the other hand, the sub-display area Ds is provided horizontally above the main display area Dm, and is further divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. Of these, the small area Ds1 is an area for displaying the number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls) whose fluctuation has not been executed among the balls entered in the first entry port 64, and is the small area Ds2. And Ds3 are areas for displaying the advance notice effect image.

On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 4B, a total of nine main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub-display area Ds, the moving image is displayed in the small area Ds3 on the right, suggesting to the player that the transition to the jackpot is easier than usual. In the central small area Ds2, a predetermined character (a boy with a headband in this embodiment) usually performs a predetermined action, and sometimes a special action different from the predetermined action is performed, or another character appears. A notice will be produced by issuing it.

On the other hand, if a ball enters the first entry port 64 while the variable display is being performed by the third symbol display device 81 (first symbol display device 37), the number of entry times is up to four times. It is held, and the number of held balls is shown by the first symbol display device 37 and also in the small area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds. In the small area Ds1, one reserved ball number symbol is displayed for each reserved ball number symbol, and the reserved ball number is displayed according to the display number of the reserved ball number symbol. That is, when one reserved ball number symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the reserved ball number is one, and when four reserved ball number symbols are displayed, the reserved ball number is Indicates that it is 4 balls. Further, when the reserved ball number symbol is not displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the reserved ball number is 0, that is, there is no reserved ball.

In the present embodiment, the ball entering the first ball entry port 64 is configured to be held up to 4 times, but the maximum number of held balls is not limited to 4 times, but 3 times. It may be set to the following or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls symbol in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls is different by a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is different by the number of reserved balls. (For example, a color or a lighting pattern) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four hold lamps indicating the number of hold balls for the maximum number of hold balls, and the number of hold balls may be displayed according to the number of hold lamps in the lit state.

Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 5, the display mode of the SW (switch) effect performed in the third symbol display device 81 will be described. FIG. 5A is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of the SW effect in the present embodiment. The SW effect is selected and displayed as a kind of advance notice display mode during the variable display of the variable pattern in which the main symbol for notifying the lottery result of the special symbol is variablely displayed. When a variation pattern of a special symbol is selected, this SW effect is selected according to the type of the selected variation pattern, and is set to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. NS. Specifically, it is selected and set in the voice lamp control device 113 by the process of S1404 of the command determination process (FIG. 21, S1311) executed by the MPU 221.

When the SW effect is set, the frame button 22 is imitated on the third symbol display device 81 as shown in FIG. 5 (a) while the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is variablely displayed (dynamically displayed). The symbol is displayed, and the characters "Repeat hit !!" are displayed to notify the player that the frame button 22 is pressed. Then, an indicator is displayed in the center of the third symbol display device 81, and the memory of the indicator lights up and rises based on the number of times the player presses the frame button 22, which is the maximum value scale. If the indicator rises (lights up) to the scale marked "Victory" (see FIG. 5B), it indicates to the player that the changing special symbol will be a big hit (notice). In this case, the main symbol is reduced and displayed in a variable manner in the upper right corner of the third symbol display device 81 with only the numbers of the symbols.

In this SW effect, the time to be displayed within the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern is determined in advance, and when that time elapses, the display mode is automatically changed according to the fluctuation pattern of the main symbol.

In the main control device 110, when a ball enters the first ball entry port 64 (starting prize), a special symbol is drawn by using it as a trigger, and then the special symbol (first symbol) is displayed in the first symbol display device 37. The variable display of the symbol) is executed. Further, as shown in FIG. 5A, a fluctuation pattern command and a stop type command are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113, and as a result, in the third symbol display device 81, the first symbol display device The variation display of the third symbol is performed according to the variation display of 37.

The flow to the jackpot will be explained. When the variation display of the third symbol is performed on the third symbol display device 81, the high-speed variation display of the third symbol is first started, and then a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds to 60 seconds). After that, the display is switched to the medium-speed fluctuation display of the third symbol, and further, the display is switched to the low-speed fluctuation display of the third symbol. Here, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, a stop display is performed in which the main symbols (third symbol) having the same number are aligned, the variable effect ends, and then the big hit effect is started. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, a stop display is performed in which the main symbols (third symbol) of the same number are not aligned, the variation effect ends, and if there is a pending start prize, The next special symbol lottery will be held, and the next variable production will start.

Returning to FIG. 2, the description will be continued. The second symbol display device 83 performs variable display by indicating by a lighting state whether or not a lottery of ordinary symbols performed when the ball passes through the second entry port 67 is being executed. As a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, a normal symbol (second symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the normal symbol is indicated by a lighting state.

More specifically, in the second symbol display device 83, every time the ball passes through the second entrance 67, the symbol "○" and the symbol "x" as the second symbol are alternately lit. Variable display is performed. In the pachinko machine 10, when the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is stopped at a predetermined symbol (the symbol “○” in the present embodiment), the electric accessory attached to the first entry port 64 is operated for a predetermined time. It is configured to be in a state (opened), and as a result, a ball can easily enter the first ball entry port 64. The number of times the ball has passed through the second entry port 67 is held up to four times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display device 37 and is also lit and displayed by the second symbol hold lamp 84. NS. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holding lamps, and are symmetrically arranged below the third symbol display device 81.

The variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the present embodiment, and the first symbol display device 37. And a part of the third symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to 4 times as in the case of the 1st ball entrance 64, and the number of times the ball passes through the second ball opening 67 is 3 times or less, or 5 times or more. It may be set to (for example, 8 times). Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol hold lamp 84.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first ball entry port 64 into which a ball can enter is arranged. When a ball enters the first entrance 64, the first entry switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first entry switch is turned on. A special symbol is drawn by the main control device 110, and the display according to the lottery result is indicated by the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37. In addition, the first entry port 64 is also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters.

A variable winning device 65 is arranged below the first entry opening 64, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery of the special symbol performed by the main control device 110 becomes a big hit, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on so as to be the stop symbol of the big hit after a predetermined time (variation time) has elapsed. At the same time, the stop symbol of the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the game state shifts to a special game state (a jackpot of 5 rounds) in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than in the normal state. As this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls are won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a lapse of a predetermined time, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated 5 times (5 rounds). The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and a larger amount of prize balls than usual is paid out to the player as a game value (game value). Is done.

Specifically, the variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for driving the opening / closing forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And have. The specific winning opening 65a is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or it is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate downward on the front surface to temporarily form an open state in which the ball can easily win a prize in the specific winning opening 65a. It operates so as to alternate between the state and the state.

The special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. A large opening that opens and closes separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED 37a corresponding to the big hit is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and the specific winning opening is opened. A special gaming state is a game state in which a large opening port provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time when the ball wins a prize in the specific winning opening 65a while the opening 65a is open. It may be formed.

Attachment spaces K1 and K2 for attaching certificate stamps, identification labels, etc. are provided at the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate stamps, etc. attached to the attachment space K1 are the front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. Balls that do not enter any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a are guided through the out opening 66 to a ball discharge path (not shown). A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, a random number generator used for various lottery, and for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit, etc. is installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the launch control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is to be peeled off in order to open the board boxes 100 and 102, or if the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are used. Cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 6) are provided. ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls is appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the launch control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 6). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

<About the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. 7. FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built in. In order to instruct the operation of the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller in only one direction.

In the main control device 110, a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting in the first symbol display device 37, a display setting in the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting in the third symbol display device 81. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 7, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. These counters and the like are used for a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting on the first symbol display device 37, a display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting on the third symbol display device 81. It is used in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform such as.

To set the display of the special symbol lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the jackpot type of the special symbol are selected. The first hit type counter C2 used for, the stop type selection counter C3 used for selecting the out-of-order stop type in the special symbol, and the first initial value random number used for setting the initial value of the first random number counter C1. The counter CINI1 and the variation type counter CS1 used for selecting the variation pattern are used. Further, the second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of ordinary symbols, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 10), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 18). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol holding ball storage area 203a consisting of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), and each of these areas has a first ball entry port. Each value of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored according to the timing of entering the ball 64. Further, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b including one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), and balls are left and right in each of these areas. The value of the second random number counter C4 is stored in accordance with the timing of passing through any of the second entrances (through gates) 67.

Each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 299), reaches the maximum value (for example, 299 in the case of a counter capable of taking a value of 0 to 299), and then becomes 0. It is configured to return to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter capable of taking a value of 0 to 299, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once for each execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 10), and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 18).

The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the special symbol holding ball of the RAM 203 is held at the timing when the ball wins the first entry port 64. It is stored in the storage area 203a. The value of the random number that becomes the jackpot of the special symbol is set by the special symbol jackpot random number table (not shown) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the random number counter C1 per first is special. If it matches the value of the random number that becomes the jackpot set by the symbol jackpot random number table, it is determined to be the jackpot of the special symbol. In addition, this special symbol jackpot random number table is for a low probability time of a special symbol (a period in which the special symbol is in a low probability state) and a high probability time (special symbol) with a higher probability of becoming a jackpot of a special symbol than the low probability time. It is divided into two types, one for the period in which the probability is high, and the number of random numbers that are the jackpots contained in each is set differently. In this way, by making the number of random numbers to be a big hit different, the probability of being a big hit is changed between the low probability time of the special symbol and the high probability time of the special symbol. The special symbol jackpot random number table (not shown) for the high probability of the special symbol and the special symbol jackpot random number table (not shown) for the low probability of the special symbol are in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. It is provided in.

The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol is a big hit, and adds one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). It is configured to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value from 0 to 99). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the special symbol of the RAM 203 is held at the timing when the ball wins the first entry port 64. It is stored in the sphere storage area 203a.

Here, if the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is not a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, that is, if it is a random number that is out of the special symbol, the first The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the symbol display device 37 is the one when the special symbol is removed.

On the other hand, if the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, it corresponds to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37. The display mode is the one at the time of a big hit of a special symbol. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol holding ball storage area 203a.

As shown in FIG. 9C, the first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. In this first hit random number counter C1, there is one random number value that becomes a jackpot of the special symbol when the probability of the special symbol is low, and the random number value "7" is the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a for the low probability. It is stored in. As described above, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that will be the jackpot is 1 while the total number of random numbers is 300, so the probability of the special symbol being the jackpot is "1/300".

On the other hand, when the special symbol has a high probability, there are 10 random numbers that serve as jackpots for the special symbol, and the values "0 to 9" are stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a for the high probability. .. As described above, when the probability of the special symbol is high, the total number of random numbers that will be the jackpot is 10 while the total number of random numbers is 300, so the probability of the special symbol being the jackpot is "1/30".

Further, the value of the first type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. Then, as shown in FIG. 9B, in the first hit type counter C2, when the random number value is "0 to 49", the jackpot type is "big hit A". Further, when the value is "50 to 99", the jackpot type is "big hit B".

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured so that two types of hit types (big hit A and big hit B) are determined by the value of the random number indicated by the first hit type counter C2. From the value (random number value) of the first hit type counter C2, the random number value for determining the jackpot type of the special symbol is set by the special symbol jackpot type table (not shown), and this table is set. It is provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110.

The stop type selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 99, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In the present embodiment, the stop type selection counter C3 selects the stop type at the time of disconnection displayed by the third symbol display device 81, and after the reach occurs, the final stop symbol shifts by one before and after the reach symbol. "Reach other than front and back" (for example, 98,99), and "reach other than front and back" (for example, range of 90 to 97) where the final stop symbol stops outside the front and back of the reach symbol after the same reach occurs. Three stop (effect) patterns are selected with "complete deviation" (for example, in the range of 0 to 89) in which reach does not occur. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the special symbol holding ball of the RAM 203 is stored at the timing when the ball wins the first ball entry port 64. It is stored in the area 203a.

From the value (random value) of the stop type selection counter C3, the random number value for determining the stop type of the special symbol is set by the stop type selection table (not shown), and this table is the main control. It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. Further, in the present embodiment, this table is divided into a special symbol for high probability and a special symbol for low probability, and a range of random values set for each stop type of deviation according to the table. Is changing. This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the special symbol or the low probability state of the special symbol.

For example, in a high-probability state, a table for high-probability times has a wide range of random numbers from 0 to 89 corresponding to the stop type of "completely off" so that the reach effect is not selected more than necessary because a big hit is likely to occur. Is selected, and "completely off" is easily selected. In this table, the "reach outside the front and rear" is narrowed to 98,99 and the "reach other than the front and rear" is also narrowed to 90 to 97, making it difficult to select "reach outside the front and rear" and "reach other than the front and rear". Further, in the low probability state, in order to secure the ball entry time to the first entry port 64, the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop type of "completely off" is narrow as 0 to 79, when the probability is low. The table for is selected, and it becomes difficult to select "completely off".

In this stop type selection table, the range of random value corresponding to the stop type of "reach other than front and rear deviation" is widened to 80 to 97, and "reach other than front and rear deviation" can be easily selected. Therefore, in the low probability state, it is possible to perform many reach displays with a long effect time, so that the ball entry time to the first entry port 64 can be secured, and the variation display by the third symbol display device 81 continues. It will be easier to do. Also in the latter table, the range of random values corresponding to the stop type of "reach before and after" is set to 98,99.

The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The variable type counter CS1 determines a rough display mode such as so-called normal reach and super reach. Specifically, the determination of the display mode is the determination of the fluctuation time of the symbol variation. Based on the fluctuation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the reach type and the detailed symbol variation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are determined by the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. NS. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the main process (see FIG. 18) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. A fluctuation pattern table (not shown) storing a random number value for determining one fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation from the value (random value) of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. There is.

In the variation pattern table, for example, as variation patterns for disconnection, "disengagement (for long time)", "disengagement (for short time)", "disengagement normal reach", "disengagement super reach", "disengagement special reach" Various types are specified, and as fluctuation patterns for jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot C, "shared normal reach", "shared super reach", and "shared special reach" are specified, and as fluctuation patterns for jackpot C. , "Special reach" is stipulated, and "shared normal reach", "shared super reach", and "shared special reach" are stipulated as fluctuation patterns for both hit and miss. Then, from the various fluctuation patterns defined in the fluctuation pattern table, the fluctuation pattern is selected according to the predicted lottery result and the predicted stop type (in the case of a jackpot, the jackpot type).

The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter in which, for example, 1 is added in order in the range of 0 to 239, the maximum value (that is, 239) is reached, and then the counter returns to 0. Further, when the second hit random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second hit random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated periodically, for example, for each timer interrupt process, and it is detected that the ball has passed through either the left or right second entry port (through gate) 67. It is acquired at the time of this, and is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

Then, as shown in FIG. 9D, the value of the random number that hits the normal symbol is set by the random number table 202c per normal symbol (see FIG. 9D) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller. When the value of the second hit random number counter C4 matches the value of the random number that is the hit set by the random number table per normal symbol, it is determined to be a hit of the normal symbol. In addition, this random number table per normal symbol is used for the low probability of the normal symbol (the period during which the normal symbol is in the normal state) and for the high probability of hitting the normal symbol (for the normal symbol). It is divided into two types, one for (a period in which the time is shortened) and the other, and the number of random numbers that are big hits included in each is set differently. By making the number of random numbers to be hit different in this way, the probability of being hit is changed between the low probability of the normal symbol and the high probability of the normal symbol.

As shown in FIG. 9D, when the probability of the normal symbol is low, there are 24 random numbers that hit the normal symbol, and the range is "5 to 28". These random number values are stored in a random number table per ordinary symbol for low probability. As described above, when the probability of a normal symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that become a jackpot is 24 while the total number of random numbers is 240, so the probability of a jackpot of a special symbol is "1/10".

When the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol and the ball passes through the second entry port 67, the value of the random number counter C4 per second is acquired, and the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. The fluctuation display of is executed for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of "5-28", it is determined that the player has won, and after the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) is completed. ), The symbol "○" is lit and displayed, and the first ball entry port 64 is opened only for "0.2 seconds x 1 time". In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, the first ball entry port 64 is opened only "0.2 seconds x 1 time" when the normal symbol hits. , The opening time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "0.5 seconds x 2 times".

On the other hand, when there is a high probability of a normal symbol, there are 200 random values that are big hits of the normal symbol, and the range is "5 to 204". These random number values are stored in the random number table per ordinary symbol for high probability. As described above, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random numbers is 200 while the total number of random numbers is 240, so the probability of the special symbol being a jackpot is "1 / 1.2".

When the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, when the ball passes through the second entry port 67, the value of the random number counter C4 per second is acquired, and the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. Fluctuation display is executed for 3 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that the player has won, and after the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) is completed. ), The symbol "○" is lit and displayed, and the first ball entry port 64 is opened "1 second x 2 times". In this way, when the probability of the normal symbol is high, the time of variable display is very short, "30 seconds → 3 seconds", as compared with the case of the low probability of the normal symbol, and further, the first entrance 64 is released. Since the period is very long, "0.2 seconds x 1 time → 1 second x 2 times", it becomes easy for the ball to enter the first ball entry port 64. A table (not shown) storing a random number value for determining whether or not a normal symbol is hit from the value (random number value) of the second hit random number counter C4 is provided in the ROM 202. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, the first ball entry port 64 is opened only "1 second x 2 times" when the normal symbol hits, but it is opened. The time and number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "3 seconds x 3 times".

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 10). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 18).

As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and in the main control device 110, the jackpot lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displayed according to the values of the counters and the like. It is possible to execute the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device 83.

Returning to FIG. 7, the description will be continued. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 8, the RAM 203 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, I / O, and the like. It has a work area (work area) in which the value of is stored.

The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power supply is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when the power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power on due to power failure elimination; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. The writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 18) when the power is cut off, and the restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 17) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured so that a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 16) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 7, the RAM 203 includes a special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b, a special symbol holding ball number counter 203c, and a normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d. It has a counter 203e and other storage areas.

The special symbol holding ball storage area 203a has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), and each of these areas has a random number counter C1 per first. , Each value of the first hit type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball wins the first ball opening 64 (starting prize), each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding number). Among the vacant areas (1st area to 4th area on hold), the areas with the smallest area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in order. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the time-old winning prize is stored, and the data corresponding to the time-oldest winning prize is stored in the reserved first area. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the special symbol lottery is performed in the main control device 110, each value of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a shifts to the execution area. Then, based on the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area, a determination such as a lottery of a special symbol is performed.

When the data is shifted from the hold 1st area to the execution area, the hold 1st area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed in which the winning data stored in the other holding areas (holding 2nd area to holding 4th area) is packed into the holding area (holding 1st area to holding 3rd area) whose area number is 1 smaller. Will be done. In the present embodiment, in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the data is shifted only in the holding area (second holding area to fourth holding area) in which the winning data is stored.

Like the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). A second random number counter C4 is stored in each of these areas.

More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through either the left or right second entry port 67, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding first area to holding). Among the vacant areas of the 4th area), the areas with the smallest area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in order. That is, similarly to the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the lottery for winning the normal symbol is performed in the main control device 110, the value of the counter C4 stored in the hold first area of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203b is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area (moved), a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed.

When the data is shifted from the hold 1st area to the execution area, the hold 1st area becomes empty. Therefore, as in the case of the special symbol hold ball storage area 203a, the winning prizes stored in the other hold areas The shift process is performed to pack the data into the holding area that is one smaller than the area number. Also, the data shift is performed only in the holding area where the winning data is stored.

The special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is a variable display (third symbol display) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entry (starting prize) into the first entry port 64. It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of waiting times) of the variable display performed by the device 81 up to 4 times. The initial value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is set to zero, and each time a ball enters the first entry port 64 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, the maximum value is 1 It is added (see S404 in FIG. 13). On the other hand, the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is decremented by 1 each time a new variation display of the special symbol is executed (see S205 in FIG. 11).

The value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (holding number N of the variation display in the special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command (see S206 in FIG. 11 and S405 in FIG. 13). The hold ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 each time the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c is changed.

The voice lamp control device 113 has a variable display hold ball held in the main control device 110 by a hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 each time the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c is changed. You can get the value of the number itself. As a result, the number of reserved balls in the variable display managed by the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is the actual number of reserved balls in the variable display held in the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it deviates from the deviation, the deviation can be corrected by the next received hold ball number command.

The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command, and each time the number of reserved balls changes, the display control device 114 is notified of the number of reserved balls. Send a ball count command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number symbol in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d determines the number of reserved balls (number of waiting times) of the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball at the second entry port 67. It is a counter that counts up to 4 times. The initial value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is set to zero, and each time a ball passes through the second entry port 67 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to a maximum value of 4. (See S704 in FIG. 15). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time the variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S605 in FIG. 14).

When the ball passes through either the left or right second entry port 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of holdings M of the variation display in the normal symbol) is less than 4, a random number per second. The value of the counter C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b (S705 in FIG. 15). On the other hand, if the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is 4 when the ball passes through either the left or right second entry port 67, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b. Not done (S703: No in FIG. 15).

The time saving medium counter 203e is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state, and if the value of the time saving medium counter 203e is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state. If the value of the time-saving / medium-time counter 203e is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol. The initial value of the time saving / medium counter 203e is set to zero, and each time a special symbol is drawn by the main control device 110 and it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot, a value corresponding to the jackpot type is set. Will be done. That is, when a special symbol becomes a big hit, a new value is set according to the big hit type regardless of the value of the time saving / medium counter 203e.

Specifically, when it is determined that the jackpot type is "big hit B", the time saving medium counter 203e is set to 100 (see S214 in FIG. 11). After that, 1 is subtracted every time the variation effect of the special symbol is completed until the value of the time saving / medium counter 203e becomes 0 (S217 in FIG. 11).

When a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed, the value of the time saving / medium counter 203e is referred to, and if the value is 1 or more, the lottery for the normal symbol is based on the random number table per normal symbol for high probability. On the other hand, if the value of the time saving / medium counter 203e is 0, a lottery of ordinary symbols is performed based on the random number table per ordinary symbol for low probability time (see S610 and S611 in FIG. 14).

The other storage area 203z is an area in which various data and the like necessary for other games are stored.

An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 is centered on the lower side of the opening / closing plate of the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol hold lamp 84, and the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the front side, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205. To send.

Further, various switches 208 including a group of switches and sensors (not shown) and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, which will be described later, are connected to the input / output port 205, and the MPU 201 is output from the various switches 208. Various processes are executed based on the signal and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as, I / O, etc. are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured so that the power failure signal SG1 is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 24) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball, the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. The ball launching unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are allowed to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle is detected by the touch sensor 51a that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the amount of rotation of 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output in an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an output of lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variation effect (variation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and continuous notice effect. The arithmetic unit MPU 221 has a ROM 222 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 221 and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed, or at the time of super reach. The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the content of the effect, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to a command from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and displays and controls an error command including the type of the error. It is transmitted to the device 114. The display control device 114 controls the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message image according to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

The SW effect pattern table 222a is stored in the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113. Further, in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113, a prize information storage area 223a, a special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b, a fluctuation start flag 223c, a stop type selection flag 223d, a SW press count counter 223e, and an effect counter At least 223f, a SW effective time storage area 223g, and other storage areas 223z are provided.

The winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), and each of these areas stores prize information. In the pachinko machine 10, when the main control device 110 wins a start prize, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 acquired according to the start prize. Therefore, various information (whether or not, stop type, fluctuation pattern) obtained when a special symbol lottery corresponding to the start winning is performed is predicted (estimated) by the main control device 110, and the predicted various information is obtained. , The main control device 110 notifies the voice lamp control device 113 by the winning information command.

When the winning information command is received, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts various information (win / fail, stop type, fluctuation pattern) notified by the winning information command as winning information, and the winning information is the winning information. It is stored in the storage area 223a. More specifically, the extracted winning information is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (1st to 4th) among the vacant areas of the 4 areas (1st to 4th areas). Will be done. That is, the smaller the area number, the more the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored in the first area.

The special symbol reservation ball number counter 223b is a variation effect (variation display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), similarly to the special symbol reservation ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110. Therefore, it is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of standbys) of the fluctuation effect held in the main control device 110 up to four times.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to acquire the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b manages the reserved ball number. It has become.

Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the number of reserved balls in the variation display is added by entering the ball into the first entry port 64, or in the main control device 110, the variation display in the special symbol is executed. When the number of reserved balls is subtracted, a hold ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 acquires the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 from the hold ball number command, and specially It is stored in the symbol reserved ball number counter 223b (see S1409 in FIG. 21). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b according to the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so that the special symbol hold ball number counter of the main control device 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with 203c.

The value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is used for displaying the reserved ball number symbol in the third symbol display device 81. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of reserved balls indicated by the command in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b in response to the reception of the reserved ball number command, and also stores the stored special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of, a display hold ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

When the display control device 114 receives this display hold ball number command, the hold ball number value indicated by the command, that is, the hold ball number corresponding to the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is changed while synchronizing with the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110. Therefore, the number of reserved sphere symbols displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the special symbol reserved sphere counter 203a of the main control device 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of reserved balls for which the variable display is reserved.

The variation start flag 223c is turned on when a variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1402 in FIG. 21), and is turned off when the variation display is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S1702 in FIG. 22). When the variation start flag 223c is turned on, the display variation pattern command is set based on the variation pattern extracted from the received variation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S1302) of the main process (see FIG. 20) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

The stop type selection flag 223d is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1405 in FIG. 21), and is turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S1707 in FIG. 22).

The SW press count counter 223e is a counter for counting the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed. The SW effect count counter 223e is set to the SW effect, and a value larger than 0 is stored in the SW effective time storage area 223g, that is, when the frame button 22 is pressed during the SW effective time, the value is incremented by 1. NS. Specifically, 1 is added in the processing of S1606 of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (FIG. 23, S1307) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. On the other hand, in the processing of S1602 and S1614, the initial value is reset to 0. The value of the SW press count counter 223e is configured to be mainly used for setting the lottery probability in the SW effect.

The effect counter 223f is a counter value used for drawing an effect executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, selecting an effect, and the like. The effect counter 223f is a counter value updated in the range of 0 to 198, and is updated to the upper limit value of 198, and then updated to the initial value of 0 when further updated. Although not shown, they are added and updated one by one in the main process (see FIG. 20) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113.

The SW effective time storage area 223g is a storage area for storing an effective period in which the operation of the frame button 22 is determined to be effective. When the SW effective time is stored, it is subtracted and updated based on the passage of time of the SW effective time. When the effective time showing a value larger than 0 seconds is stored in the SW effective time storage area 223 g, it is determined that the SW effective time is in progress.

The other storage area 223z is a storage area in which various data and the like necessary for other games are stored.

The RAM 223 also has a command storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores a command received from the main control device 110 until a process corresponding to the command is performed. The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 21) of the voice lamp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process causes the command determination process to be performed. The command is parsed and processing is performed according to the command.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 changes the display (variation) of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81. It controls the production) and continuous notice production. The details of the display control device 114 will be omitted because they have already known configurations.

<Regarding the control process by the main control device 110 in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 10 to 18. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and a timer that is started periodically (at intervals of 2 msec in this embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process that is activated by inputting a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are first described, and then the start-up process is performed. And the main process will be explained.

FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, the read process of various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main control device 110 is read, the state of the switch is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Further, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second hit random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second per random number counter C4 are each added by 1, and their counter values are the maximum values (in the present embodiment). When it reaches 299, 99, 99, 239), it clears to 0, respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Next, a process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37 and a special symbol variation process for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are executed (S104), and then the special symbol variation process is executed (S104). The start winning process associated with winning the first ball opening 64 (starting winning) is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 11 to 13.

After the start winning process is executed, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106), and the through gate is passed along with the passage of the ball at the second entry port 67. The process is executed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation processing and the through-gate passage processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 14 and 15. After executing the through-gate passage process, the launch control process is executed (S108), and other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (S109) to end the timer interrupt process. In the launch control process, the ball is launched on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the launch is not operated. It is a process of determining on / off of. The main control device 110 instructs the launch control device 112 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on.

Next, the special symbol variation processing (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation processing (S104). This special symbol variation processing (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 10), and the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device. This is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol performed in 81.

In this special symbol variation processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently in the jackpot (S201). Among the special symbol jackpots, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol. Includes the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S201: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

Unless the special symbol is in the jackpot (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If not (S202: No), the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (the number of times the variable display is held in the special symbol N) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is larger than 0 (S204), and if the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is 0 (S204: No), this process ends as it is.

On the other hand, if the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is subtracted by 1 (S205) and changed by calculation. A hold ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c is set (S206). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 18) described later, which is executed by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c from the hold ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. ..

After setting the hold ball number command by the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol hold ball storage area 203a is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the hold 1st area to the hold 4th area of the special symbol hold ball storage area 203a is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, within each area, such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the first symbol display device 37 executes a special symbol variation start process for starting the variation display (S208). The special symbol change start processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the variation display executed by the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S209). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed by the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), and this fluctuation time. If (S209: No) has not elapsed, this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S209, if the fluctuation time of the variable display being executed has elapsed (S209: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S210). The stop symbol is set in advance by the special symbol variation start process (S208) described later with reference to FIG. When this special symbol change start process is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. More specifically, whether or not it is a big hit of a special symbol is determined according to the value of the random number counter C1 per first, and if it is a big hit of a special symbol, it depends on the value of the first hit type counter C2. It is decided whether it will be a jackpot A or a jackpot B.

In the present embodiment, when the jackpot A is reached, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, and when the jackpot B is reached, the red LED is turned on. If it is off, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. The display of each LED is turned off when the next fluctuation display is started, but it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation is stopped.

After the processing of S210 is completed, when the variation display being executed by the first symbol display device 37 is started, the lottery result (current lottery result) of the special symbol performed by the special symbol variation start processing is displayed. It is determined whether the special symbol is a big hit (S211). If the result of this lottery is a jackpot of a special symbol (S211: Yes), it is determined what type of jackpot is among the two types of jackpots of special symbols (big hit A, jackpot B) (S212), and the jackpot type. If is a jackpot A, the gaming state after the jackpot is set to a high-probability gaming state (probability variation) (S213). If the jackpot type is jackpot B, 100 is set in the time saving / medium counter 203e (S214). Then, the start of the jackpot of the special symbol is set (S215), and this process is terminated. When the start of the jackpot of the special symbol is set by the process of S216, when the jackpot control process (S1004) of the main process (see FIG. 18) is executed, it branches to S1101: Yes and the opening command is set. Will be done. As a result, the jackpot effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

In the process of S211 if the result of this lottery is out of the special symbol (S211: No),
It is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203e is 1 or more (S216), and if the value of the time saving counter 203e is 1 or more (S216: Yes), the value of the time saving counter 203e is subtracted by 1 (S217). ), End this process. On the other hand, if the value of the time saving / medium counter 203e is 0 (S216: No), the processing of S221 is skipped and the main processing is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 12, the special symbol variation start processing (S208) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation start processing (S208). This special symbol change start process (S208) is a process executed in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 11) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 10), and is an execution area of the special symbol hold ball storage area 203a. Based on the values of various counters stored in, a lottery (win / fail judgment) of "big hit of special symbol" or "missing of special symbol" is performed, and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are used. This is a process for determining the effect pattern of the variable effect (variable effect pattern).

In the special symbol fluctuation start processing, first, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is acquired. (S301).

Next, it is determined whether the gaming state is in the probable change (S302). If the probability is changing (S302: Yes), whether or not it is a special symbol jackpot based on the value of the first hit random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301 and the special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability. The lottery result of (S304) is acquired. Specifically, the value of the first hit random number counter C1 is compared one by one with the 30 random number values stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability. As described above, 10 random numbers of "0 to 9" are set as the big hit random numbers of the special symbol, and the value of the random number counter C1 per first matches the random number values that hit these. If so, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. After obtaining the lottery result of the special symbol, the process proceeds to S306.

On the other hand, in the processing of S302, if the probability change is not in progress (S302: No), the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol, so that the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the processing of S301 and the low probability time Based on the special symbol jackpot random number table for, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is acquired (S304). Specifically, the value of the first hit random number counter C1 is compared with the random number values of 3 stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for low probability one by one. As a random number value that becomes a big hit of a special symbol, one of "7" is set, and when the value of the random number counter C1 per first and the random number value that becomes a hit of these match, the special symbol Judge that it is a big hit. After obtaining the lottery result of the special symbol, the process proceeds to S305.

Then, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the processing of S303 or S304 is a jackpot of the special symbol (S305), and if it is determined to be a jackpot of the special symbol (S305: Yes). Based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301, the display mode at the time of big hit is set (S306). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the processing of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the special symbol jackpot type table, and the jackpots of the three types of special symbols (big hit A, Of the jackpot B and jackpot C), it is determined what the jackpot type is. As described above, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 49", it is determined that it is a jackpot A (16R jackpot, probability variation of a special symbol), and it is in the range of "50 to 99". If there is, it is determined that the jackpot B (16R jackpot, low probability state of special symbol, time saving period of normal symbol 100 times).

In the process of S306, the display mode (lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (big hit A, jackpot B). Further, the jackpot type (big hit A, jackpot B) is set as the stop type so that the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of big hit is determined (S307). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S307, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 stops at the jackpot symbol. The fluctuation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the fluctuation time of the symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. The relationship between the numerical value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation time is defined in advance by a table or the like.

For example, as the fluctuation pattern for disconnection, "disengagement (for long time)", "disengagement (for short time)", "disengagement normal reach", "disengagement super reach", and "disengagement special reach" are specified. , "Shared normal reach", "shared super reach", and "shared special reach" are defined as the variation patterns for jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot C, and the variation patterns for jackpot C are "special". Various types of "reach" are specified, and various types of "shared normal reach", "shared super reach", and "shared special reach" are specified as fluctuation patterns for both hit and miss.

In the process of S305, when it is determined that the special symbol is out of alignment (S305: No), the display mode at the time of deviation is set (S308). In the process of S308, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the outlier symbol, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol hold ball storage area 203a is set. Based on this, as the stop type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, it is set whether the reach is out of front / back, the reach is out of front / back, or the reach is completely out.

Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is in a probabilistic state of a special symbol, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for high probability. Then, set the stop type. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 89", a complete deviation is set, and if it is in the range of "90 to 97", a reach other than the front and rear deviation is set, and "98". If it is ", 99", set the reach that is out of front and back. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol, the stop type is set by comparing the value of the stop type selection counter C3 with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for low probability. do. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79", a complete deviation is set, and if it is in the range of "80 to 97", a reach other than the front and rear deviation is set, and "98". If it is ", 99", set the reach that is out of front and back.

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of disconnection is determined (S309). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S308, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation such as normal reach and super reach is confirmed based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. To determine.

When the process of S307 or the process of S309 is completed, next, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined by the process of S307 or the process of S309 is set (S310). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the set stop type is set (S311). These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the process of S1001 of the main process (FIG. 18). NS. The voice lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command as it is to the display control device 114. When the processing of S312 is completed, the process returns to the special symbol variation processing.

Next, for convenience of explanation, first, the start winning information processing (S105) will be described, and then the delay look-ahead processing (S105) will be described. First, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing this start winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 10), determines whether or not there is a prize (starting prize) in the first ball opening 64, and when there is a starting winning. , The process for holding the value indicated by the various random number counters and the process for executing the pre-reading of the lottery result in the special symbol from the values indicated by the various held random number counters.

When the start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won a prize (starting prize) in the first entry port 64 (S401). Here, the ball entering the first ball entry port 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (the number of times the variable display is held in the special symbol N) is acquired (S402). .. Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S403).

Then, whether or not there is a prize in the first ball opening 64 (S401: No), or even if there is a prize in the first ball opening 64, the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is less than 4. If not (S403: No), the process proceeds to S415. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first ball opening 64 (S401: Yes) and the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the number of special symbol reserved balls The value (N) of the counter 203c is added by 1 (S404). Then, a hold ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c changed by the calculation is set (S405).

The reserved ball number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 18) described later, which is executed by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c from the hold ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. ..

After setting the hold ball number command by the processing of S405, the values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above are set to RAM 203. The special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is stored in the first free holding area (holding first area to holding fourth area) (S406). In the process of S406, the value of the special symbol hold ball counter 203c is referred to, and if the value is 0, the hold first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the second area on hold is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the third area on hold is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the fourth area on hold is set as the first area.

Next, the hit / fail determination result at the start of fluctuation is determined based on the values of various counters acquired in the process of S406 (S407). Here, the game state (probability change or normal) at the start of the fluctuation is discriminated, and the hit / fail determination result is determined. It is determined whether or not the result of the hit / miss determination executed in the process of S407 is a big hit (S408). When it is determined that the hit / fail determination result is a big hit (S408: Yes), the big hit winning command is set (S409). On the other hand, when it is determined that the winning / failing determination result is out of order (S408: No), the out of order winning command is set (S410).

The winning information command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 18) described later, which is executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the winning information command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the winning / failing, the stop type, and the fluctuation pattern from the winning information command, and stores the information as the winning information in the winning information storage area 223a.

Next, the normal symbol variation processing (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation processing (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 10), and is associated with the variation display of the second symbol performed by the second symbol display device 83 and the first ball entry port 64. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory.

In this normal symbol variation processing, first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently being hit (S601). As for the hitting of the normal symbol (second symbol), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory attached to the first entry port 64 is performed while the display indicating the hit is being made on the second symbol display device 83. Includes during and during. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is hit (S601: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S601: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602), and the second symbol display device If the display mode of 83 is not changing (S602: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times the variable display is held in the normal symbol M) is acquired (S603). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S604), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S604: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203d is not 0 (S604: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203d is subtracted by 1 (S605).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b is shifted (S606). In the process of S606, the data stored in the hold 1st area to the hold 4th area of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203b is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, within each area, such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b is acquired (S607).

Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving counter 203e of the RAM 203 is 1 or more (S608). The time saving medium counter 203e is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state. If the value of the time saving medium counter 203e is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state. If the value of the time saving counter 203e is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol.

When the value of the time saving / medium counter 203e is 1 or more (S608: Yes), it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently being hit (S609). Among the special symbol jackpots, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol. Includes the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is in the jackpot (S609: Yes), the process proceeds to S611. In the present embodiment, during the big hit of the special symbol, the lottery of the ordinary symbol is less likely to be a hit. This is because during the jackpot of the special symbol (that is, during the special gaming state), the player hits the ball in an attempt to win the special winning opening 65a, so that the electric accessory attached to the first entry opening 64 is released. This is to prevent the ball that is to be won in the special winning opening 65a from entering the first winning opening 64 as much as possible. Since the special winning opening 65a is provided immediately below the first entry opening 64, even if the ball is suppressed from entering the first entry opening 64 during the jackpot of the special symbol, the first winning opening 65a is provided. Many balls enter the ball entry port 64. As a result, in most cases, the number of reserved balls for the first entry port 64 becomes the maximum (4 times) while the pachinko machine 10 is in the special gaming state.

In the processing of S609, if the special symbol is not in the jackpot (S609: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state. Based on the value of the second hit random number counter C4 and the random number table per normal symbol for high probability, the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S610). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the random number table per ordinary symbol for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5-204", it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0-4,205-239", it is determined. It is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (see FIG. 8B).

In the process of S608, when the value of the time saving / medium counter 203e is 0 (S608: No), the process proceeds to the process of S611. In the processing of S611, the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit of the special symbol, or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, so that the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the processing of S607 is low. Based on the random number table per ordinary symbol for probability time, the lottery result of whether or not the ordinary symbol is won is acquired (S611). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the random number table per ordinary symbol for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5-28", it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0-4, 29-239", it is determined. It is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (see FIG. 8B).

Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the ordinary symbol acquired by the processing of S610 or S611 is a hit of the ordinary symbol (S612), and if it is determined to be a hit of the ordinary symbol (S612: Yes). , The display mode at the time of hit is set (S613). In the process of S613, after the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol “◯” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol).

Then, it is determined whether the value of the time saving medium counter 203e is 1 or more (S614), and if the value of the time saving medium counter 203e is 1 or more (S614: Yes), the special symbol is currently being hit. Whether or not it is determined (S615). As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S615: Yes), the process proceeds to S617. In the present embodiment, during the jackpot of the special symbol, in order to prevent the ball from entering the first entry port 64 as much as possible, even if the ball hits the normal symbol, it is the same as the case where the normal symbol is missed. The number of times the electric accessory is opened and the opening time are set.

In the processing of S615, if the special symbol is not in the jackpot (S615: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state. The opening period of the electric accessory associated with 64 is set to 1 second, the number of times of opening is set to 2 (S616), and the process proceeds to S619. In the process of S614, when the value of the time saving / medium counter 203e is 0 (S614: No), the process proceeds to the process of S617. In the processing of S617, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the opening period of the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is set to 0. . In addition to setting to 2 seconds, the number of times of opening is set to 1 (S617), and the process proceeds to S619.

In the process of S612, when it is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (S612: No), the display mode at the time of deviation is set (S618). In the process of S618, after the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol “x” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of disconnection is completed, the process proceeds to S619.

In the process of S619, it is determined whether the value of the time saving / medium counter 203e is 1 or more (S619), and if the value of the time saving / medium counter 203e is 1 or more (S619: Yes), the variation in the second symbol display device 83. The display fluctuation time is set to 3 seconds (S620), and this process ends. On the other hand, if the value of the time saving / medium counter 203e is 0 (S619: No), the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display in the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds (S621), and this process is terminated. In this way, except during the jackpot of the special symbol, when the normal symbol has a high probability, the variable display time is very short, "30 seconds → 3 seconds", as compared with the low probability of the normal symbol. Since the release period of the first entry port 64 is very long, "0.2 seconds x 1 time → 1 second x 2 times", the ball can easily enter the first entry port 64.

In the process of S602, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602: Yes), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the variation display executed by the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (S622). The fluctuation time here is a time preset by the process of S620 or the process of S621 before the variation display is started in the second symbol display device 83.

In the process of S622, if the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S622: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S622, if the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display being executed has elapsed (S622: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S623). In the process of S623, if the lottery of ordinary symbols is a win and the display mode is set by the process of S613, the "○" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lights up) on the second symbol display device 83. Is set to be displayed). On the other hand, if the lottery of the normal symbol is removed and the display mode is set by the process of S618, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lit) on the second symbol display device 83. Is set to. When the stop display is set by the process of S623, when the second symbol display update process (see S1007) of the main process (see FIG. 18) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is displayed. When the process is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lit) on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in the process of S613 or the process of S618.

Next, when the variable display being executed by the second symbol display device 83 is started, is the lottery result of the normal symbol (current lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation process a hit of the normal symbol? Is determined (S624). If the result of the lottery this time is a hit of a normal symbol (S624: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory attached to the first entry port 64 is set (S625), and this process is terminated. When the start of opening / closing control of the electric accessory is set by the process of S625, the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is executed when the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S1005) of the main process (see FIG. 18) is executed next. Is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the process of S616 or the process of S617 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S624, if the result of the lottery this time is out of the normal symbol (S624: No), the process of S625 is skipped and the present process is terminated.

Next, the through-gate passage process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing this through gate passing process (S107). This through gate passage process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 10), determines whether or not the ball has passed through the second entry port 67, and if the ball has passed, the ball has passed. This is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the second random number counter C4.

In the through gate passing process, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the second entry port 67 (S701). Here, the passage of the ball at the second entry port 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the second entry port 67 (S701: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times the variable display is held in the normal symbol M) is acquired (S702). .. Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S703).

Whether the ball has passed through the second entry port 67 (S701: No), or even if the ball has passed through the second entry port 67, the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 4. If it is not less than (S703: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the second entry port 67 (S701: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S703: Yes), the number of normal symbol reserved balls The value (M) of the counter 203d is added by 1 (S704). Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above is set to the first of the free hold areas (hold 1st area to hold 4th area) of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. It is stored in the area of (S705), and this process is terminated. In the process of S705, the value of the normal symbol hold ball counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the hold first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the second area on hold is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the third area on hold is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the fourth area on hold is set as the first area.

FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control during execution and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power failure occurrence information in the RAM 203 (S801) as a setting of the power failure occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt process. do.

The above NMI interrupt process is also executed in the payout launch control device 111, and the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control during execution. Then, the NMI interrupt process is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 17, a start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the power is turned on to the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started by resetting when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, the initial setting process associated with the power-on is executed (S901). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a weight process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the control device on the sub side (peripheral control device such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be in an operable state. (S902). Then, the access of the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S904), and if it is turned on (S904: Yes), the process shifts to S912. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905), and if it is not stored (S905: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power cutoff did not end normally, the process is also shifted to S912 in this case as well.

If the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S907: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power is cut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and the process is shifted to S912 even in such a case. As will be described later in the process of S1014 in FIG. 18, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of this RAM determination value, the effectiveness of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of S912, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 which is a control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side (S912). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start payout control of the game ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes the initialization process (S913, S914) of the RAM 203.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized at the time of turning on the power, for example, when the hall is open for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erasing switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S913, S914) is executed. In addition, the initialization process (S913, S914) of the RAM 203 is executed in the same manner when the power failure occurrence information is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.). .. In the RAM initialization process (S913, S914), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S913), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S914). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to the process of S910.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), the power failure occurrence information is stored (S905: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal (S90: No). S907: Yes), the information on the occurrence of the power failure is cleared while holding the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S908). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side to the gaming state when the drive power is cut off is transmitted (S909), and the process proceeds to S910. When the payout control device 111 receives the payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

In the process of S910, the effect permission command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Next, the interrupt is permitted (S911), and the process proceeds to the main process described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 18, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-mentioned start-up process will be described. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, each process of S1001 to S1007 is executed as a periodic process having a cycle of 4 ms, and the counter update process of S1010 and S1011 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main process, first, during the execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 10), the output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is sent to each control device (peripheral) on the sub side. The external output process to be transmitted to the control device) is executed (S1001). Specifically, the presence or absence of the winning detection information detected by the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 10) is determined, and if the winning detection information is present, the number of acquired balls corresponds to the payout control device 111. Send a prize ball command. Further, the hold ball number command set in the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 11) and the start winning processing (see FIG. 13) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the winning information command set in the starting winning process is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command, the stop type command, and the like necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the opening command, the number of rounds command, and the ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 27) are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch control device 112.

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1002). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1003), and then, when the special symbol is in the jackpot state, the jackpot effect is executed or variable. A jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (S1004). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round in the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have won in the specific winning opening 65a. Then, when any of these conditions is satisfied, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeatedly executed for a predetermined number of rounds. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process, but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

Next, the electric accessory opening / closing process for controlling the opening / closing of the electric accessory associated with the first ball entry port 64 is executed (S1005). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory is set by the process of S625 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 14), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started. The opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S616 or the processing of S617 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed.

Next, the first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1006). In the first symbol display update process, when a variation pattern is set by the process of S308 or the process of S310 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 19), the variation display according to the variation pattern is displayed in the first symbol display. Start at device 37. In the present embodiment, among the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, from the start of the fluctuation until the fluctuation time elapses, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off. At the same time, turn on the green LED, if the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED, and if the blue LED is on, turn off the blue LED. At the same time, turn on the red LED.

The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED is displayed. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

Further, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S308 or the process of S310 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 19) ends, the first symbol display device The change display executed in 37 is terminated, and the stop symbol (first symbol) is displayed as the first symbol in the display mode set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 19). A stop display (lighting display) is displayed on the device 37.

Next, the second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1007). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S620 or the process of S621 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 14), the variation display is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. Start. As a result, in the second symbol display device 83, variable display is performed in which the “◯” symbol and the “x” symbol as the second symbol are alternately lit. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the process of S623 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 14), the second symbol display device 83 is executed. The stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set by the process of S613 or the process of S618 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 14) after ending the variable display. (Lighting display).

After that, it is determined whether or not the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008), and if the power outage occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: No), the power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 SG1 is not output and the power supply is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the main process this time (S1009). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1009: Yes), the process is shifted to S1001, and each process after S1001 described above is repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main process this time (S1009: No), the first is within the period until the predetermined time is reached, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is reached. 1 The initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1010, S1011).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1010). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. .. Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1002 (S1011).

Here, since the execution time of each process of S1001 to S1007 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated at random, and similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can also be updated at random.

Further, in the process of S1008, if the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: Yes), the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process shown in FIG. 16 has been executed, the process when the power is cut off after S1012 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1012), and a power off command indicating that the power is cut off is issued to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). Is transmitted (S1013). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is saved (S1014), the access of the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1015), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203.

The process of S1008 is performed at the end of a series of processes corresponding to the state change of the game performed in S1001 to S1007, or at the end of one cycle of the processes of S1010 and S1011 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main control device 110, the power off occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power cut state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. It can be started from the process of S1001. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1001 as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process. Therefore, in the process when the power is cut off, the stack pointer is used in the initial setting process (S901) without saving the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 to the stack area or saving the value of the stack pointer. By setting a predetermined value (initial value), the process of S1001 can be started. Therefore, the control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

<Regarding the control process by the voice lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 to 24. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on and a main process that is executed after the start-up process.

First, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, the initial setting process associated with the power-on is executed (S1201). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is turned on, the power-off processing of S1318 (see FIG. 20) is caused by a momentary voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called "instantaneous power failure") in this startup processing. ) Is started in the middle of execution (S1202). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 20, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the power cutoff command from the main control device 110 (see S1315 in FIG. 20), the voice lamp control device 113 executes the power cutoff process of S1318. The power off processing flag is turned on before the power off processing is executed, and the power off processing flag is turned off after the power off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power off processing of S1318 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power off processing flag.

If the power off processing flag is off (S1202: No), the start-up process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power is turned off in S1318. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started by resetting only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110). be. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1203).

Confirmation of data corruption in RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S1206. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area can be checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data corruption in the RAM 223, and conversely, if it is not "55AAh", the data corruption in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If the data corruption of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1203: Yes), the process proceeds to S1204 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data corruption in RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1203: No), the process proceeds to S1208.

If the start-up process is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power off). (From), it is determined that the data of the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1203: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1204. On the other hand, the start-up process this time was started after the execution of the power-off process of S1318 was completed after a momentary power failure occurred, or was reset only to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. Since the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1203: No), and the data shifts to S1208.

If the power off processing flag is on (S1202: Yes), the start-up process this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and during the execution of the power off process in S1318, the voice lamp control device 113 The MPU 221 of the above was reset and started. In such a case, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct because the power off processing is being executed. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process is shifted to S1204 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the process of S1204, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S1204). As a check method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether or not it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", then "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". By this read / write check of RAM 223, all the storage areas of RAM 223 are cleared to 0.

If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1205: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data (S1206). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1205: No), the abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified (S1207), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the indicator lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You may do it.

In the process of S1208, it is determined whether or not the power off flag is turned on (S1208). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process in S1318 is executed (see S1317 in FIG. 20). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S1318 is executed, the process of S1208 is reached with the power-off flag turned on because the start-up process is instantaneous. This is a case where the power is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power cutoff process of S1318 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1208: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared in order to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1209), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1210), and then an interrupt is interrupted. Set the permission (S1211) and move to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main control device 110.

On the other hand, the process of S1208 is reached with the power off flag turned off because the start-up process of this time was started after, for example, the power supply was completely shut off, so that the process of S1208 via the processes of S1204 to S1206 was started. This is a case where the processing is reached, or only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S1208: No), the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, S1209, is skipped, the process is shifted to S1210, the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1210), and then interrupt permission is set. Then (S1211), the process shifts to the main process.

The reason for skipping the clearing process of S1209 is that when the processing of S1208 is reached via the processing of S1204 to S1206, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the processing of S1204. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the voice lamp control device 113 This is because the control of can be continued.

Next, with reference to FIG. 20, the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main process was started or since the process of S1301 this time was executed (S1301), and 1 msec or more has elapsed. If not (S1301: No), the process proceeds to S1311 without performing the processes of S1302 to S1310. In the process of S1301, it is determined whether or not 1 msec has elapsed because S1302 to S1310 are mainly processes related to display (effect), and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). , S1311, the variable display setting process, the command determination process of S1312, and the process of updating the counter values of S1313 and S1314 are preferably executed in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S1312 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of reception of the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and by executing the processing of S1311 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process. Based on the above, settings related to variable effects can be made without delay.

If 1 msec or more has passed in the process of S1301 (S1301: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S1303 to S1312 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1302). ). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the indicator lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1308 described later (S1303), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1304). The power-on notification process notifies that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Will be. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that the power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process shifts to the process of S1305 without performing the notification by the power on notification process.

In the process of S1305, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the hold quantity display update process is executed (S1306). In the customer waiting effect processing, when a predetermined time elapses when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player, a setting is made to switch the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen, and the setting is displayed as a command. It is transmitted to the device 114. In the hold quantity display update process, a process of turning on the hold lamp (not shown) is performed according to the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b.

After that, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S1307). In this frame button input monitoring / effect processing, the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player is pressed in order to enhance the effect is monitored, and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is a process for setting to perform an effect. The details of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S1307) will be described later with reference to FIG. 23.

When the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is completed, the lamp editing process is executed (S1308), and then the sound editing / output processing is executed (S1309). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the like are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the process of S1309, the liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1310), and the process proceeds to the process of S1311. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp editing process of S1308 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. The sound editing / output processing of S1309 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

In the process of S1311, a command determination process for performing a process according to a command received from the main control device 110 is performed (S1311). Details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, after this command determination process (FIG. 21, S1311), the variable display setting process is executed (S1312). In the variation display setting process, a display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to execute the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the processing of S1312 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1315). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S1315 (S1315: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing in-progress flag are turned on (S1317), and the power-off process is executed (S1318). After executing the power off processing, the power off processing flag is turned off (S1319), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power cutoff process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. In addition, the memory of the power failure occurrence information is also deleted.

On the other hand, if the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1315 (S1315: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1316), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1316: No), the process returns to the process of S1301 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1316: Yes), the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, so that the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, he / she can call a clerk in the hall or the like and ask for repair of the pachinko machine 10. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

Next, the command determination process (S1311) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 21. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S1311). This command determination process (S1311) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 20) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main control device 110. .. Further, in this process, when the reserved ball number command is received from the main control device 110, the third symbol display device 81 also determines the start of the continuous advance notice effect.

In the command determination process, first, the first unprocessed command received from the main control device 110 is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110. It is determined whether or not the command has been performed (S1401). When the variation pattern command is received (S1401: Yes), the variation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S1402), and the variation pattern type is extracted from the received variation pattern command (S1403). After that, the SW effect scenario is selected based on the extracted fluctuation pattern and the SW effect pattern table (222a), and the SW effective time set in the scenario is set (S1404). After that, it returns to the main process. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when the variation display setting process (see FIG. 22) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern type.

On the other hand, if the variation pattern command has not been received (S1401: No), then it is determined whether or not the stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1405). Then, when the stop type command is received (S1405: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1406), the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1407), and the main Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when the variable display setting process (see FIG. 22) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variation effect.

On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S1405: No), then it is determined whether or not the hold ball number command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1408). Then, when the hold ball number command is received (S1408: Yes), the value included in the received hold ball number command, that is, the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c of the main controller 110 (special symbol). The number of holdings N) of the fluctuation display in the above is extracted and stored in the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1409). Further, in the process of S1409, a display holding ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the value of the updated special symbol holding ball number counter 223b is set. After the processing of S1409 is completed, the process returns to the main processing.

Here, the hold ball number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 when the ball wins the first ball opening 64 (starting prize) or when a special symbol lottery is performed, so that the starting winning is won. Is detected, or every time a special symbol lottery is performed, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is set by the processing of S1409 to the special symbol reserved ball number counter of the main control device 110. It can be adjusted to the value of 203c. Therefore, even if the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, the start winning prize is detected or special. At the time of the symbol lottery, the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 can be modified to match the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c of the main control device 110. When the process of S1408 is executed, a display hold ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b is set. As a result, in the display control device 114, the reserved ball number symbol corresponding to the reserved ball number is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In the process of S1408, when the reserved ball number command is not received (S1408: No), then it is determined whether or not the winning information command is received from the main control device 110 (S1410). Then, when the winning information command is received (S1410: Yes), the winning information indicated by the received winning command is stored in the winning information storage area 223a (S1411). Here, in the winning information storage area 223a, winning information such as a hit / fail determination result of each reserved ball and a jackpot type is stored for each reserved ball.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1410 that the winning command has not been received (S1410: No), the process corresponding to the other command is executed (S1419).

Next, with reference to FIG. 22, the variation display setting process (S1312) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing this variation display setting process (S1312). This variation display setting process (S1312) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 20) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and the variation effect is executed in the third symbol display device 81. A display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110.

In the variation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the variation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is on (S1501). Then, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is not on (that is, it is off) (S1501: No), the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110, so the process of S1506 is started. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is on (S1501: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223c is turned off (S1502), and then the fluctuation pattern is processed in S1403 of the command determination process (see FIG. 21). The variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the command is acquired from RAM 223 (S1503).

Then, based on the acquired variation pattern type, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1504). By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

Next, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted (S1505). In the process of S1505, the data stored in the first area to the fourth area of the winning information storage area 223a is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted such as 1st area → execution area, 2nd area → 1st area, 3rd area → 2nd area, 4th area → 3rd area. After shifting the data, the process proceeds to S1506.

In the process of S1506, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223d provided in the RAM 233 is on (S1506). When it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S1506: No), the stop type command has not been received from the main controller 110, so this variation display Finish the setting process and return to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is on (S1506: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d is turned off (S1507), and then in the process of S1407 of the command determination process (see FIG. 20), The stop type in the variation effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1508).

In the process of S1509, a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated based on the set stop type, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1509). .. When the display control device 114 receives the display stop type command, the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled.

Next, with reference to FIG. 23, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S1307) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment will be described. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S1307).

In the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (FIG. 23, S1307), first, it is determined whether or not the value stored in the SW effective time storage area 223g is greater than 0, that is, during the SW effective time (S1601). It should be noted that this SW effective time indicates that when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, it is a time for determining that the operation is valid. In the process of S1601, when it is determined that the SW is out of the effective time (S1601: Yes), the SW press count counter 223e is reset to 0, which is the initial value (S1602). After that, this process ends. The SW press count counter 223e is a counter value for counting the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed during the SW effective time. In this way, when the SW is outside the valid time, the number of times the SW is pressed during the SW effective time can be accurately counted by resetting the SW pressing counter 223e to the initial value.

On the other hand, in the process of S1601, when it is determined that the SW is in the effective time (S1601: No), the value of the SW effective time storage area 223 g is subtracted by the elapsed time and updated (S1603). It is determined whether the frame button 22 is pressed (S1604). If it is determined that the frame button 22 is not pressed (S1604: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1604, when it is determined that the frame button 22 is pressed (S1604: Yes), the SW effective time is acquired from the SW effective time storage area 223 g (S1605).

The value of the SW press count counter 223e is added by 1 to update. Next, the lottery probability setting process is executed (S1607). Here, in the lottery probability setting process (S1607), a process of setting the lottery probability in the lottery of the effect to be displayed based on the pressing of the frame button 22 is executed based on the current SW effective time.

Here, the lottery probability setting process (S1607) will be described with reference to FIG. 24. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing this lottery probability setting process (S1607). In the lottery probability setting process (FIG. 24, S1607), first, it is determined whether the SW effective time is 1 second or less remaining (S1701). When it is determined that the remaining SW effective time is 1 second or less (S1701: Yes), the lottery probability is set to 1/2 (S1702). Here, when the lottery probability is set to 1/2, the value from 0 to 99 among the values of the effect counter 223f (0 to 199) is set as the winning value.

It is determined whether the value of the SW press count counter 223e is 20 or more (S1703). When it is determined that the value of the SW press count counter 223e is 20 or more (S1703: Yes), the lottery probability is set to 1/1 (S1704). Here, all the values of the effect counter 223f are set as hit values. After that, this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1703, when it is determined that the SW press count counter 223e is less than 20, (S1703: No), this process is terminated.

Next, in the process of S1701, when it is determined that the SW effective time is not 1 second or less, it is determined whether the SW effective time is 2 seconds or less (S1705). When it is determined that the SW effective time is 2 seconds or less (S1705: Yes), the lottery probability is set to 1/4 (S1706). Here, among the values of the effect counter 223f, the values from 0 to 49 are set as the winning values. It is determined whether the value of the SW press count counter 223e is 10 or more (S1707). When it is determined that the value of the SW press count counter 223e is 10 or more (S1707: Yes), the lottery probability is set to 1/2 (S1708). Here, the same process as the process of S1702 is executed. After that, this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1707, when it is determined that the value of the SW press count counter 223e is less than 10 (S1707: No), this process is terminated.

Further, in the process of S1705, when it is determined that the SW effective time is not 2 seconds or less (S1705: No), the lottery probability is set to 1/5 (S1709). Here, in the process of setting the lottery probability to 1/5, a value from 0 to 39 among the values of the effect counter 223f is set as a winning value. After that, this process ends.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the display mode is changed when the frame button 22 is pressed according to the remaining time of the SW effective time (in the present embodiment, the indicators shown in FIGS. 5A to 5B are displayed. The lottery probability of executing the lottery of whether or not to raise) is set. The lottery probability is set so that the probability of winning increases as the SW effective time decreases. As a result, when the frame button 22 is continuously operated during the SW effective time to raise the indicator shown in FIG. 5A, and the remaining time of the SW effective time is large, the winning lottery probability Is set low, so the indicator can be difficult to raise. On the other hand, when the SW effective time is reduced, the winning lottery probability is set high, so that the indicator can be easily set to rise. Therefore, the player can enjoy the effect of operating the frame button 22 by fully utilizing the SW effective time.

Further, in the present embodiment, if the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed exceeds a predetermined number of times. It is configured to set a high winning lottery probability. As a result, the hit probability is set high for the player who continuously presses the frame button 22 in a short period of time, and the player can easily operate the frame button 22 to make an advantageous display. I can remind you. Therefore, the player can enjoy playing the game by operating the frame button 22. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets tired of the game at an early stage.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 5A, the indicator is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the player operates the frame button 22 to raise the indicator, which is shown in FIG. As shown in (b), when the indicator is raised to the scale indicated as victory, an example of the SW effect for notifying the player that the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special symbol is a big hit has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this example. For example, a special symbol (third symbol) is set as a jackpot A and a jackpot B is set as a symbol that is difficult to identify, and the jackpot is notified by getting doublet. After that, the effect of continuously hitting the frame button 22 for a certain period of time is executed depending on whether the jackpot is A or B, and a lottery is executed every time the frame button 22 is operated. When the lottery is won, it may be configured by a SW effect that notifies the player whether it is a jackpot A or a jackpot B. Even in such a case, as in the present embodiment, by changing the lottery probability according to the SW effective time, it is possible to make the player press the frame button 22 by effectively utilizing the SW effective time. can.

Further, in the configuration of the present embodiment, since the lottery is executed every time the frame button 22 is pressed, the number of times the frame button 22 is determined to be a hit can be randomized. In some cases, it may be determined to be a hit at the first time, so it is possible to perform an effect that gives the player unexpectedness. Therefore, various patterns can be entertained by the player, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored at an early stage.

Returning to FIG. 23, the description will be continued. When the lottery probability setting process (S1607) is executed, the value of the effect counter 223f is acquired based on the lottery probability set in the process of the lottery probability setting process (S1607), and the lottery is executed (S1608). It is determined whether the lottery result is a win (S1609). If the lottery result is incorrect (S1609: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the lottery result is a hit (S1609: Yes), it is determined whether the hit / fail determination result of the special symbol currently changing is a big hit (S1610). When it is determined that the hit / fail determination result is a big hit (S1610: Yes), it is determined whether or not to make one notification (S1611). Here, it is determined that the value of the acquired effect counter is any of 0 to 5. If it is determined that one notification is to be made (S1612: Yes), a hit gauge effect command for display is set (S1612). After that, the value of the SW effective time counter 223g is reset to 0, which is the initial value, and the value of the SW pressing count counter 223e is reset to 0 (S1613). After that, this process ends.

In this way, if the lottery for executing the production is executed and the winner is won, the lottery for one notification is executed, and if the lottery for one notification is won, the indicator is raised to MAX and displayed. The hit gauge production command is set. Therefore, the player can be shown an effect in which the indicator suddenly becomes MAX (see FIG. 5B). Therefore, since it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected effect, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game at an early stage.

On the other hand, in the process of S1611, when it is determined that the one-shot notification lottery is out of order (S1611: No), the value of the SW press count counter 223e is equal to or more than the upper limit value (30 times or more in this embodiment). (S1614). When it is determined that the value of the SW press count counter 223e is equal to or greater than the upper limit value (S1614: Yes), the process of S1612 is executed. As a result, as shown in FIG. 5 (b), the indicator rises to the scale indicated by the victory, and it is notified that the jackpot is a big hit.

On the other hand, in the process of S1614, when the SW press press counter 223e determines that it is less than the upper limit value (S1614: No), the process of S1615 is executed. Further, in the process of S1610, when it is determined that the hit / fail determination result is incorrect (S1610: No), the process of S1615 is executed. In the process of S1615, a display gauge effect command indicating the scale of the indicator corresponding to the value of the SW press count counter 223e is set (S1615).

In the present embodiment, the value of the SW press count counter 223e is set to scale 1 for 1 to 5, scale 2 for 6 to 9, scale 3 for 10 to 15, scale 4 for 16 to 19, and scale 5 for 20 to 29. NS. In the present embodiment, the indicator is configured to be raised in correspondence with the value of the SW press count counter 223e, but the present invention is not limited to this, and up to the scale before the jackpot (scale 5 in the present embodiment) is displayed. It may be configured to increase by one each time the lottery of the SW effect is won. With this configuration, the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed can be set to rise at random. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a different production pattern each time. In the present embodiment, the process executed by the display control device 114 is already known, and therefore detailed illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

<About the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 25 to 29. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above, the configuration in which the SW effective time can be effectively used by configuring the lottery probability of the SW effect to be changed according to the SW effective time has been described.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, when the SW effective time is equal to or less than a predetermined time, the value of the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed (SW pressing number counter 223e) is equal to or more than the predetermined number of times. For example, it differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in that it is configured to extend the SW effective time. The same elements as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

<About the electrical configuration in the second embodiment>
In the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment, the SW lottery extension flag 223h is added to the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 with respect to the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. There is. Since the other configurations are the same as those of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The SW lottery extension flag 223h is a flag indicating that the SW effective time has been extended and set. The SW lottery extension flag 223h is set to off in the initial state when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the process of S1636 of the lottery probability setting process 2 (FIG. 28, S1630) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, when the SW effective time is extended and set, it is set to ON. Further, it is set to off in the processing of S1620 and S1640 of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (FIG. 27, S1320).

<Regarding the control process by the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment>
Next, the control process executed by the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 26 to 29. In the second embodiment, the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is changed from the first embodiment. As for other processes, the same processes as those in the first embodiment are executed, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding the control process by the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment>
Next, the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 26 to 29. In the second embodiment, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (FIG. 23, S1307) is changed to the frame button input monitoring / effect process 2 (FIG. 27, S1320) with respect to the first embodiment. As for other processes, the same processes as those in the first embodiment are executed, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 27, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 2 (S1320) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 2 (S1320). The frame button input monitoring / effect processing 2 (FIG. 27, S1320) in the second embodiment is a lottery probability setting process (FIG. 27, S1307) with respect to the frame button input monitoring / effect process (FIG. 23, S1307) in the first embodiment. 24, S1607) has been changed to the lottery probability setting process 2 (FIGS. 28, S1630), and the processes of S1620 and S1640 have been added, respectively. As for other processes, the same processes as those in the first embodiment are executed, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the process of S1602, when the SW effective time is 0, the process of S1620 is executed after setting the SW press count counter 223e to 0. In the process of S1620, the SW extension flag 223h is set to off (S1620). After that, this process ends.

Further, when the process of S1606 is executed, the lottery probability setting process 2 is executed (S1630). The lottery probability setting process 2 (S1630) will be described with reference to FIG. 28. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the lottery probability setting process 2 (S1630).

In the lottery probability setting process 2 (FIG. 28, S1630), first, it is determined whether the SW effective time is 3 seconds or less (S1631). When it is determined that the SW effective time is longer than the remaining 3 seconds (S1631: No), the lottery probability is set to 1/10 (S1632). Here, among the values of the effect counter 223f, values from 0 to 66 are set as winning values.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the SW effective time is 3 seconds or less remaining (S1631: Yes), it is determined whether the SW lottery extension flag 223h is off (S1633). If it is determined that the SW lottery extension flag 223h is ON (S1633: No), the process of S1638 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the SW lottery extension flag 223h is off in the process of S1633 (S1633: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the SW press press counter 223e is 30 or more (S1634). When it is determined that the value of the SW press count counter 223e is less than 30 (S1634: No), the process of S1638 is executed.

On the other hand, in the process of S1634, when it is determined that the value of the SW press count counter 223e is 30 or more (S1634: Yes), 5 seconds are added to the SW effective time set in the SW effective time storage area 223g. And set (S1635). The SW lottery extension flag 223h is set to ON (S1636). A display valid time extension command is set (S1637). By this command, as shown in FIG. 6B, the indicator increases to the right so that the indicator indicating the SW effective time displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can determine that the SW effective time has increased. It is displayed in different colors. Since the added amount is displayed on the indicator in a display mode having a different color or pattern as shown by b, the player can easily recognize that the SW effective time has been extended. Further, as shown in FIG. 6B, the third symbol display device 81 displays a character "extension service !!" that notifies the player that the SW effective time has been added and extended. As a result, the player can easily recognize that the SW effective time has increased.

In the process of S1638, the lottery probability is set to 1/3 (S1638). After that, this process ends. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the SW effective time is 3 seconds or less remaining, the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed up to that point is determined, and if it is the predetermined number or more, the SW effective time is extended. As a result, the player who frequently presses the frame button 22 can enjoy operating the frame button 22 more because the SW effective time is extended and the period for operating the frame button 22 is further increased. Can be done. On the other hand, for the player who does not operate the frame button 22 so much, the SW effective time is not extended and the SW effective time ends. Therefore, it is possible to produce an effect that matches the player's playing style.

In the present embodiment, the SW effective time is extended when the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed is a predetermined number of times or more, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the result of determining whether or not the special symbol is changing is a big hit. In some cases, it may be set to be longer than in the case of disengagement. In this case, the lottery may be performed regardless of the number of times the SW is pressed or with a predetermined lottery probability based on the number of times the SW is pressed, and the SW effective time may be extended when the lottery is won. With this configuration, even a player who plays a game without operating the frame button 22 operates the frame button 22 with the expectation that the winning / failing judgment result will be a big hit by extending the SW effective time. Can be done. Therefore, the taste of the game can be improved and the player can be more entertained.

Returning to FIG. 27, the description will be continued. When the process of S1613 is executed, the process of S1640 is executed. In the process of S1640, the SW lottery extension flag 223h is set to off (S1640). As a result, since the SW lottery extension flag is set to off after the SW effect is completed, it is possible to suppress a problem that the SW effective time is extended many times.

Next, with reference to FIG. 29, the lottery probability setting process 3 (S1650) will be described as a modified example of the second embodiment. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the lottery probability setting process 3 (S1650) in the modified example of the second embodiment. In the lottery probability setting process 3 (FIG. 29, S1650) in the modified example of the second embodiment, the process of S1637 is changed to the process of S1657 with respect to the lottery probability setting process 2 (FIG. 28, S1630) in the second embodiment. has been changed. The processes from S1651 to S1656 and S1658 of the lottery probability setting process 3 (FIG. 29, S1650) are executed in the same manner as the processes of S1631 to S1636 and S1638 of the lottery probability setting process 2 (FIG. 28, S1630). ..

In the process of S1657, a variable display command instructing the SW effective time display to be set to 1/5 is set. As a result, the display control device 114 changes the indicator of the SW effective time according to the decrease of the SW effective time, and the variable speed is set to 1/5. As a result, the variable speed (decrease speed) of the indicator indicating the SW effective time is set to be slow even if the indicator is not displayed to be increased as in the second embodiment, so that the player can extend the SW effective time. I can recognize that.

<About the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 30 to 37. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above, the configuration in which the SW effective time can be effectively used by configuring the lottery probability of the SW effect to be changed according to the SW effective time has been described.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, when the frame button 22 is pressed to display the SW effect and the SW effect is completed, the remaining time of the SW effective time is added to a plurality. It differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in that it is configured to provide the player with a special effect (in this embodiment, a mission effect) set by the remaining time of the SW effective time in the SW effect of the times. .. The same elements as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

<About the display mode of the SW effect of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 30A to 30B, an example of the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the SW effect of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment will be described. In FIG. 30A, there is a comment (character) indicating the degree of expectation of the special symbol in which the SW effect in the third embodiment is set and the frame button 22 is operated by the player during the SW effective time and is changing. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode when it is displayed. At the lower right of the third symbol display device 81, a symbol schematically showing the frame button 22 and an indicator M capable of identifying the remaining time of the SW effective time are displayed. The portion indicated by a of the indicator indicates the remaining time of the SW effective time. Further, on the left side of the display mode of the indicator M, a time indicator T indicating the total status of the remaining time of the SW effective time when the frame button 22 is pressed and the SW effect is completed is displayed. The remaining time of the SW effective time is totaled, and the indicator rises clockwise according to the totaled time.

FIG. 30B is a diagram showing a display mode when the total value of the remaining time of the SW effective time reaches the upper limit value and the mission effect is executed corresponding to the total time. When the remaining time reaches the upper limit, the characters "Mission rush" are displayed, and the characters "Reach with 7 within 3 minutes !!" are displayed to indicate the mission content. As a result, the player can recognize that the hit / fail determination result of the special symbol becomes a big hit when the reach display mode is set with the seven symbols. The remaining time of the SW effective time is the time indicated by a displayed by the indicator M when the frame button 22 is pressed, and the player can easily recognize how much SW effective time remains. Can be made to.

As a result, the player presses the frame button 22 at an early timing in order to end the SW effect with as much SW effective time as possible when the SW effect is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to allow the player to participate in the game more, and it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets bored with the game at an early stage.

<About the electrical configuration in the third embodiment>
The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment is displayed on the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 with respect to the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. And indicator setting data 222e are added respectively.

The display lottery table 222c is a data table for determining whether or not to execute a predetermined effect in the SW effect. FIG. 31 (c) is a schematic view schematically showing the display lottery table 222c. The value of the effect counter 223f is assigned to each of the winning and losing of the effect lottery according to the result of determining whether or not the special symbol is changing. As shown in FIG. 31 (c), when the hit / fail determination result of the special symbol is a big hit, it is configured so that it is easier to be determined as a hit than when it is a miss.

The comment selection table 222d is a data table for selecting the display content of the comment notice (see FIG. 30A) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the SW effect shown in FIG. 32A.

As shown in FIG. 32B, the indicator setting table 222e is a data table for determining the display mode of the time indicator T corresponding to the total time of the remaining time of the SW effective time. A variable amount for changing the display of the indicator is set according to the total time of the remaining time. The color of the time indicator T is changed up to the angle set by the indicator angle, and the player can recognize the total value of the remaining time.

Further, a remaining time storage area 223i and a mission flag 223j are added to the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, respectively.

The remaining time storage area 223i is a storage area in which the remaining time of the SW effective time is stored. When the comment notice is set and the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the remaining time of the SW effective time at that time is stored in the remaining time storage area 223i.

The mission flag 223j is a flag indicating that the mission effect is being executed. When the mission effect is set, this mission flag 223j is set to on.

Since the other configurations are the same as those of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 33, the variation pattern selection table of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 33A is a diagram schematically showing a variation pattern selection table for selecting a variation pattern of a special symbol in a normal time (other than a mission effect). A value of the effect counter 223f is set for each variation pattern, and when the value and the acquired value of the effect counter 223f match, a comment notice, which is a SW effect, is set. FIG. 33B is a variation pattern selection table for selecting a variation pattern of a special symbol when a mission effect is set. Even when the mission effect is set, there is no substitute for the variation time of the selected variation pattern, and only the display mode displayed by the third symbol display device 81 is configured to be the mission effect content. The SW effect is not selected during the mission effect.

<Control processing by the voice lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment>
Next, the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 34 to 37. In the control process executed in the third embodiment, the command determination process (FIG. 21, S1311) is added to the command determination process 2 (FIG. 34, S1330) with respect to the first embodiment, and the frame button input monitoring / effect process is performed. (FIG. 23, S1307) has been changed to frame button input monitoring / effect processing 3 (FIG. 36, S1340), respectively. As for other processes, the same processes as those in the first embodiment are executed, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the command determination process 2 (S1330) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 34. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the command determination process 2 (S1330). In the command determination process 2 (FIG. 34, S1330) in the third embodiment, the processes of S1402 to S1404 are deleted from the command determination process (FIG. 21, S1311) in the first embodiment, and the process of S1420 is added. Has been done. As for other processes, the same processes as those in the first embodiment are executed, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 35, the variation pattern selection process (S1420), which is one process in the command determination process 2 (FIG. 34, S1330) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment. Will be described. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing this fluctuation pattern selection process (S1420).

In the variation pattern selection process (FIG. 35, S1330), first, the variation start flag 223c is set to ON (S1421). It is determined whether the mission flag 223j is set to ON (S1422). When it is determined that the mission flag 223j is on (S1422: Yes), the variation pattern is selected from the variation pattern selection table for the mission (see FIG. 33B) based on the received command (S1423). .. After that, this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S1422, when it is determined that the mission flag 223j is off (S1422: No), the fluctuation pattern is extracted from the received command (S1424). Here, the variation pattern is selected (extracted) from the variation pattern selection table shown in FIG. 33 (a). Based on the extracted fluctuation pattern and the value of the effect counter 223f, the notice of the SW effect is determined, and the SW effective time is set (S1425). Here, it is determined whether or not the acquired value of the effect counter 223f matches the value of the effect counter 223f set in the selected fluctuation pattern, and if they match, the comment notice which is the SW effect is selected.

Next, with reference to FIG. 36, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 3 (S1340) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 3 (S1340).

In the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 3 (FIG. 36, S1340), first, it is determined whether the SW effective time is 0 (S1661). When it is determined that the SW effective time is 0 (S1661: Yes), it is determined whether the mission flag 223j is on (S1662). When it is determined that the mission flag 223j is on (S1662: Yes), the remaining time set in the remaining time storage area 223i is subtracted by the elapsed time (S1663). It is determined whether the value stored in the remaining time storage area 223i is 0 (S1664). When it is determined that the value stored in the remaining time storage area 223i is 0 (S1664: Yes), the mission flag 223j is set to off (S1665). On the other hand, when it is determined that the mission flag is off in the processing of S1662 (S1662: No), and when it is determined that the value stored in the remaining time storage area 223i in the processing of S1664 is not 0 (S1664: No). No), this process ends.

Further, in the process of S1661, when it is determined that the SW effective time is not 0 (S1661: No), the SW effective time is subtracted (S1666). It is determined whether the frame button 22 is pressed (S1667). If it is determined that the frame button 22 is not pressed (S1667: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1667, when it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed (S1667: Yes), the display SW pressing command is set (S1668). By this command, the display control device 114 is notified that the frame button 22 has been pressed, and the display mode displayed by the display control device 114 is changed.

The remaining time of the SW effective time is stored in the remaining time storage area 223i (S1669). A comment to be displayed is selected from the comment selection table 222d (see FIG. 32 (a)) based on the value of the effect counter 223f and the result of the hit / fail determination (S1670). A display comment display command is set based on the comment selected in the process of S1670. By this command, the display control device 114 is notified of the comment displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The SW effective time stored in the SW effective time storage area 223g is set to 0 (S1672). After that, the mission setting process is executed (S1673), and this process ends.

This mission setting process (S1673) will be described with reference to FIG. 37. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing this mission setting process (S1673).

In the mission setting process (FIG. 37, S1673), first, it is determined whether the remaining time stored in the remaining time storage area 223i is a value larger than 0 (S1731). When it is determined that the remaining time is a value larger than 0 (S1731: Yes), it is determined whether the remaining time is equal to or greater than the upper limit value (180 seconds or more in this embodiment) (S1732). When it is determined that the remaining time is equal to or greater than the upper limit value (S1732: Yes), the time indicator T is set to MAX (S1733). The mission flag 223j is set to on (S1734). A display command indicating the display of the set indicator is set (S1735).

On the other hand, in the process of S1732, when it is determined that the remaining time is less than the upper limit value (S1732: No), the value of the effect counter 223f is acquired and the display lottery table 222c (see FIG. 31C) is executed. (S1736). It is determined whether the lottery result in S1736 is a win (S1737: Yes), and the process of S1733 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1737 that the lottery result of the process of S1736 is out of order (S1737: No), the time indicator T based on the remaining time is set (S1738). After that, the process of S1735 is executed to end this process. If it is determined that the remaining time is 0 in the process of S1731, the time indicator is set to 0 (S1739), and then the process of S1735 is executed.

In this way, when the SW effect is executed, the remaining time of the SW effective time is added and stored at the timing when the frame button 22 is pressed, and the special effect is executed at that time. Furthermore, by executing the display lottery, even if the total remaining time does not exceed the upper limit, by winning the display lottery, the indicator showing the total remaining time is displayed on MAX (maximum) for a special effect. Was configured to be set. As shown in FIG. 31 (c), this display lottery is set so that it can be easily determined as a hit when the hold memory contains a big hit, so that a special effect (mission effect) is achieved. The player can expect that it will be a big hit by executing. Therefore, it is possible to facilitate the game by operating the frame button 22 with the remaining SW effective time as much as possible, and it is possible to encourage the player to participate in the SW effect. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets tired of the game at an early stage.

<About the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 38 to 45. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above, the configuration in which the SW effective time can be effectively used by configuring the lottery probability of the SW effect to be changed according to the SW effective time has been described.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, a plurality of selection display modes are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the player operates the frame button 22 to select one of them. In this case, in order to prevent the frame button 22 from being continuously operated and it is not possible to know what kind of candidate was present other than the selected display mode, the frame button within a predetermined time after the selected display mode is displayed. When 22 is operated to make a selection decision, the first embodiment is configured so that the selected display mode and other displayed candidates are distinguished and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the form. The same elements as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

<About the display mode of the SW effect of the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment>
With reference to FIG. 38, in the opening display which is the start of the jackpot game in the fourth embodiment, the effect of the display mode in which the weapon to be used in the effect display during the jackpot game is selected will be described. FIG. 38A shows an example of the selection display mode of the weapon selected by the player in the opening display mode in the case of a big hit. In the present embodiment, in addition to the frame button 22, operation buttons (not shown) that enable left and right selection operations are provided on both sides of the frame button 22. The operation buttons are electrically connected to the input / output port 225 of the voice lamp control device 113 like the frame button 22.

In the present embodiment, in the jackpot game, the effect of fighting the enemy is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the round display during the jackpot game, and when the main character wins the battle, the jackpot type is jackpot A. Is executed to notify the player. The player can select the weapon used by the main character in the battle. In the example of FIG. 38 (a), a saber, a cannon, and dynamite are displayed, and a cursor indicating selection is displayed below the saber and the dynamite. When you operate the operation buttons, the cursor moves left and right to switch the weapon selection. Then, when the frame button 22 is pressed, the weapon on which the cursor is displayed is selected.

Here, if the frame button 22 is continuously pressed at the start of the jackpot game, or if the frame button 22 is pressed by mistake as an operation button, the weapon selection is executed in a short time. There was a problem that it was not possible to know what was displayed in other candidates. In such a case, for example, if the expectation of being a jackpot A is set to be different depending on the type of weapon candidate that can be selected, what was the display of the candidate is a game. It is very important information for the person.

Therefore, if the selection is decided within a short time (within 1 second in the present embodiment) after the selection display mode is displayed, as shown in FIG. 38 (b), the selection is decided and others. It is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 so that it can be distinguished from the displayed candidate.

With this configuration, it is possible to confirm what kind of candidates are displayed even if the player decides the selection within a short time without carefully confirming the selection display mode. Further, when the player selects after a certain period of time, the candidate is not displayed, so that the candidate is always displayed on the third symbol display device 81, which is troublesome. ..

<About the electrical configuration in the fourth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 39, the electrical configuration in the fourth embodiment will be described. In the fourth embodiment, the opening display mode selection table 222f is added to the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 with respect to the first embodiment. Since the other configurations are the same as those of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The opening display mode is a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the start of the jackpot. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 38A, in the opening display, the selection display mode of the weapon used in the battle effect during the jackpot game is selected as the opening display mode.

<Regarding the control process in the fourth embodiment>
Next, the control process executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 40 to 45.

First, in the first embodiment, the detailed processing of the jackpot control processing (S1004) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 40. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing this jackpot control process.

In the jackpot game process (FIG. 40, S1004), first, it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of the jackpot game (S1101). When it is determined that it is the start timing of the jackpot game (S1101: Yes), the opening command is set (S1102), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1101, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the jackpot (S1101: No), it is determined whether the jackpot game is in progress (S1103). If it is determined that the jackpot game is not in progress (S1103: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot game is in progress (S1103: Yes), it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1104).

When it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round (S1104: Yes), the wide opening direction 65 is opened (S1105), and a round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is set (S1106). After that, this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round (S1104: No), it is determined whether the closing condition of the large opening 65 is satisfied (S1107). The closing condition of the large opening 65 determines whether the opening time (30 seconds) has elapsed or whether 10 game balls have won a prize in the large opening 65. When it is determined that the closing condition of the large opening 65 is satisfied (S1107: Yes), the large opening 65 is closed (S1108).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the closing condition of the large opening 65 is not satisfied (S1107: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1109). When it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1109: Yes), the ending command is set (S1110), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S1109: No), this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 41 to 45, the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described. In the control process in the fourth embodiment, the command determination process (FIG. 21, S1311) is combined with the command determination process 3 (FIG. 41, S1350) with respect to the first embodiment, and the frame button input monitoring / effect process (FIG. 23). , S1307) have been changed to the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 4 (FIGS. 43, S1360), respectively. Since other processes have the same configuration as that of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the command determination process 3 (S1350) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 41. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the command determination process 3 (S1350). In the command determination process 4 (FIG. 41, S1350) in the fourth embodiment, each process from S1412 to S1413 is added to the command determination process (FIG. 21, S1311) in the first embodiment. For other processes, the same processes as those in the first embodiment are executed.

In the process of S1410, when it is determined that the winning command has not been received (S1410: No), it is determined whether or not the opening command has been received (S1412). If it is determined that the opening command has been received (S1412: Yes), the opening process is executed (S1413). After that, this process ends. This opening process (S1413) will be described with reference to FIG. 42. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing this opening process (S1413).

In the opening process (FIG. 42, S1413), first, the opening effect display mode is selected from the opening effect display mode selection table 222f (see FIG. 39) based on the value of the effect counter 223f (S1511). Set a display command indicating the selected opening effect display mode. By this command, the selected opening display mode is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, with reference to FIG. 43, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 4 (S1360) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 4 (S1360).

In the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 4 (FIG. 43, S1360), first, it is determined whether the SW effective time is 0 (S1681). If it is determined that the SW effective time is 0 (S1681: Yes), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1681 when it is determined that the SW effective time is a value larger than 0 (S1681: No), the SW effective time is subtracted and updated (S1682). It is determined whether the frame button 22 is pressed (S1683). When it is determined that the frame button 22 is pressed (S1683: Yes), it is determined whether the frame button 22 is operated within 1 second (S1684). When it is determined that the frame button 22 is pressed within 1 second (S1684: Yes), a display command for displaying selection candidates on the third symbol display device 81 is set (S1685). On the other hand, if it is determined that the frame button 22 is not pressed within 1 second (S1684: No), the process of S1686 is executed.

In the process of S1686, a display command indicating a candidate selected by the cursor is set (S1686). After that, the SW effective time is reset to 0 (S1687), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1683, when it is determined that the frame button 22 is not pressed (S1683: No), it is determined whether the operation button (not shown) has been operated (S1688). When it is determined that the operation button has been operated (S1688: Yes), a display command for moving and displaying the cursor in the direction corresponding to the operation is set (S1689). On the other hand, in the process of S1688, when it is determined that the operation button 22 is not operated (S1688: No), this process is terminated.

In this way, when the frame button 22 is operated within 1 second after the SW effective time is set, it is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 so that the selection candidates displayed in the opening display mode can be seen. Is set. Therefore, even if the player mistakenly operates the device, it is possible to identify what is displayed in the selected display mode.

Next, with reference to FIG. 44, the customer waiting effect processing (S1305) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing this customer waiting effect processing (S1305).

In the customer waiting effect processing (FIG. 44, S1305), first, it is determined whether or not the demo screen display is being executed on the third symbol display device 81 (S1521). If it is determined that the demo screen display is displayed (S1521: Yes), the process during the demo screen display is executed (S1522). The process during display of the demo screen will be described with reference to FIG. 45. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the process (S1522) during display of the demo screen.

In the process of displaying the demo screen (FIG. 45, S1522), first, it is determined whether the frame button 22 is pressed (S1531). When it is determined that the frame button 22 is pressed (S1531: Yes), the display of the setting screen is set (S1532). A display command for notifying the display control device 114 of the display of the set setting screen is set (S1533).

Here, the setting screen is an operation button for the battle effect displayed during the jackpot game by the player, as shown in FIG. 39 (b), the ground battle fighting in the background of the ground and the underwater battle fighting in the background of the sea. This is a setting screen for operating and the frame button 22 to set according to the player's preference. With this configuration, it is possible to display a display mode that suits the player's taste during the jackpot game, and the player can be more entertained. In addition, the production can be diversified, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored at an early stage.

On the other hand, in the process of S1531, when it is determined that the frame button 22 is not pressed (S1531: No), the progress counter is incremented by 1 (S1534). Although not shown, the progress counter is a counter set in the other storage area 223z of the RAM of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and is used to count the elapsed time since the demo screen is displayed. It is a thing.

It is determined whether the progress counter is the upper limit value (5 minutes in this embodiment). When it is determined that the value of the progress counter is the upper limit value (S1535: Yes), the progress counter is reset to the initial value (S1536), and the battle effect setting is set to the default (ground battle in this embodiment). (S1537). A display command indicating the content set in the process of S1537 is set (S1538). After that, this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1535, when it is determined that the progress counter is less than the upper limit value (S1535: No), this process is terminated. The progress counter is reset to the initial value of 0 when the demo screen setting is canceled.

In this way, when the demo screen is set, the elapsed time is measured. Then, when the elapsed time reaches a predetermined time, the setting set in the pachinko machine 10 is set as the default. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 determines that the game has ended, and the frame button 22 resets the setting information set in the pachinko machine 10 to the default setting. Therefore, when a new player starts the game, the game is played in the state set by default, and the player can play the game with peace of mind.

In the present embodiment, when the setting is input to the pachinko machine 10, the setting screen is displayed based on the fact that the frame button 22 is pressed in the state of the demo screen. It may be configured so that the pachinko machine 10 is provided with an interface for setting.

<About the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 46 to 50. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above, the configuration in which the SW effective time can be effectively used by configuring the lottery probability of the SW effect to be changed according to the SW effective time has been described.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment, the number of times the frame button 22 is operated over a plurality of fluctuations in a predetermined period is stored, and when the number of times reaches the predetermined number of times, the background is set. It differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in that it is configured to change the mode. The same elements as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

<About the mode switching timing chart in the fifth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 46, a timing chart for switching the background mode using the frame button 22 executed in the fifth embodiment will be described. In FIG. 46 (a), the frame button 22 is pressed 50 times during the number of times the special symbol is changed from 10 to 20 times after the power is turned on to the jackpot game or the pachinko machine 10 (after the initial setting is made). The timing chart when the background mode is switched from the beach mode to the underwater mode based on the pressing is shown. In the configuration of the second embodiment, a predetermined background change lottery is executed at the timing when the number of times the special symbol is changed is between 10 and 20 times and the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed reaches 50 times. When the lottery is won, the background mode is set to switch from the beach mode to the underwater mode. Even if the lottery is missed, the lottery is executed again at the timing when the 51st time is pressed, and it is decided whether or not to change the background.

Further, the timing chart shown in FIG. 46B shows a modified example of the second embodiment. In the present embodiment, the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed is counted while the number of times the special symbol is changed is 10 to 20, and the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed at the timing when the number of times the special symbol is changed is 20 times. If the number of SW presses is 50 or more, the background change lottery is executed, and if it is won, the mode is switched to the underwater mode. Is configured to continue beach mode.

The period for counting the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed may be notified so that the player can understand it, or a random period may be provided by lottery so that the player does not know. good. In addition, when a big hit is stored in the winning / failing judgment result of the reserved ball of the reserved special symbol, the background mode can be switched by pressing the frame button 22 more than a predetermined number of times in a predetermined period. It may be configured as. Further, without notifying the jackpot A and the jackpot B, it is difficult to understand whether the current state is the probabilistic gaming state or the normal gaming state, and when the jackpot is in the probabilistic gaming state, in a predetermined period. , The background mode may be switched when the frame button 22 is operated more than a predetermined number of times.

Further, in the present embodiment, the lottery for whether or not to switch the background mode is executed, but the lottery is not limited to this, and the background mode may be changed without fail if the background mode is pressed more than a predetermined number of times.

With this configuration, by pressing the frame button 22 across a plurality of fluctuations of the special symbol, the player is given information that is advantageous to the player, such as the result of the hit / miss judgment and the current game state. It can be configured so that the taste of the game can be improved.

<About the electrical configuration in the fifth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 47, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment will be described. In the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment, the contents of ROM 222 and RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 110 are changed with respect to the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Since the other configurations are the same as those of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 47A, the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment has a background change lottery table 222g added to the first embodiment.

The background change lottery table 222g is a data table for executing a lottery for whether or not to switch the background mode. FIG. 47 (c) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the background change lottery table 222g. Depending on whether the winning information that is a big hit is stored in the winning information of the reserved ball stored in the winning information storage area 223a, the value of the production counter 223f is assigned according to whether the background mode is changed or not. ing. The probability of being drawn by changing the background is set higher in the case where the winning information contains the information that is a big hit than in the case where the information is not stored.

As a result, when the background mode is changed, the player can play the game with the expectation that a big hit will be stored in the reserved special symbol. Therefore, by continuously pressing the frame button 22, the information on the result of the hit / fail determination of the reserved ball can be identified, so that the player may be reminded to participate in the game by using the frame button 22 more. can. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

Further, as shown in FIG. 47B, a fluctuation number counter 223k and a background change counter 223m are added to the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment, respectively.

The fluctuation number counter 223k is a counter for counting the number of fluctuations of the special symbol after the jackpot game or after the power is turned on. The fluctuation number counter 223k is added and updated one by one in the process of S1430 of the command determination process 4 (S1370) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment. Although not shown, the initial value is reset to 0 based on the reception of the opening command. Also, when the power is turned on, the initial value of 0 is set in the initial setting.

The background change counter 223m is a counter for counting the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed during a predetermined period (in the present embodiment, the number of times the special symbol is changed is between 10 and 20 times). .. The background change counter 223m is updated by adding 1 in the process of S1692 of the background change process (FIG. 50, S1690) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment. Although not shown, the initial value of 0 is reset when the opening command is received. When the power is turned on, the initial value of 0 is set by the initial setting.

<Regarding the control process in the fifth embodiment>
Next, the control process executed by the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 48 to 50. In the fifth embodiment, the command determination process (FIG. 21, S1311) is combined with the command determination process 4 (FIG. 48, S1370) and the frame button input monitoring / effect process (FIG. 23, S1307) with respect to the first embodiment. Is changed to the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 5 (FIG. 49, S1380). As for other processes, the same processes as those in the first embodiment are executed, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the command determination process 4 (S1370) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 48. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the command determination process 4 (S1370). In the command determination process 4 (FIG. 48, S1370) in the fifth embodiment, the process of S1430 is added to the command determination process (FIG. 21, S1311) in the first embodiment. As for other processes, the same processes as those in the first embodiment are executed, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

After the process of S1404 is executed, the value of the fluctuation counter 223k is incremented by 1 and updated (S1430). In this way, since the value of the fluctuation count counter 223k is updated based on the reception of the fluctuation pattern command, the fluctuation count of the special symbol can be accurately counted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 49, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 5 (S1380) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 5 (S1380). The frame button input monitoring / effect processing 5 (FIG. 49, S1380) in the fifth embodiment is a background change process (S1690) with respect to the frame button input monitoring / effect process (FIG. 23, S1307) in the first embodiment. Has been added. As for other processes, the same processes as those in the first embodiment are executed, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

If it is determined that the SW effective time is 0 in the process of S1601 (S1601), the background change process is executed (S1690). Here, the background change process (S1690) will be described with reference to FIG. 50.

In the background change process (FIG. 50, S1690), first, it is determined whether the frame button 22 is pressed (S1691). When it is determined that the frame button 22 is pressed (S1691: Yes), the value of the background change counter 223m is added by 1 (S1692). It is determined that the value of the background change counter 223m is equal to or greater than the upper limit value (50 or more in this embodiment) (S1693).

If it is determined that the value is less than the upper limit (S1693: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the background change counter 223m is equal to or higher than the upper limit value (S1693: Yes), the value of the effect counter 223f is acquired and the background is changed from the background change lottery 222g (see FIG. 47 (c)). The lottery is executed (S1694). It is determined whether the lottery result executed in the process of S1694 is a win (with background change) (S1695). If it is determined that the lottery result is out of order (no background change) (S1695: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the lottery result is a win (S1695: Yes), the corresponding background mode is set (S1696). In the present embodiment, since the background modes of the beach mode and the underwater mode are set, the other background mode that is different from the currently set background is set. A display command indicating the set background mode is set (S1697). By this command, the display control device 114 switches the background displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

<About the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 51 to 58. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above, the configuration in which the SW effective time can be effectively used by configuring the lottery probability of the SW effect to be changed according to the SW effective time has been described.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment, the hit / fail judgment result of the special symbol stored on hold from the winning information storage area 223a is discriminated, and the discriminating result straddles the fluctuation of a plurality of special symbols. It differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in that the SW effect to be executed is configured to be executed. The same elements as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

<About setting the SW effective time in the sixth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 51, the setting of the SW effective time of the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 51 is a diagram showing an example in which the SW effective time is set when the third reserved ball is established in a state where the special symbol is changing and two reserved balls are stored. The hit / fail determination result of the third reserved ball is a big hit, and the SW effective time is set over the fluctuation of the special symbol of the third reserved ball from the fluctuation of the special symbol of the first reserved ball. Further, the SW effect shown in FIGS. 52 to 54 is set together with the setting of the SW effective time. As the SW effect, an indicator is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as shown in FIG. 52A, and the frame button 22 is pressed to raise the indicator.

While the special symbol corresponding to the first reserved ball shown in FIG. 51 is changing, the display mode as shown in FIG. 52A is displayed. In this case, the special symbol (third symbol) is reduced and displayed in the upper right of the display area of the third symbol display device 81. Then, as shown in FIG. 52 (b), the effect of continuously pressing the frame button 22 is continuously displayed even when the stop display is performed after the fluctuation time of the special symbol corresponding to the first reserved ball has elapsed. NS.

After that, even when the fluctuation of the second reserved ball shown in FIG. 51 is started, the effect of pressing the frame button 22 is executed as shown in FIG. 53 (a). During this period, the indicator M indicating the remaining time of the SW effective time is gradually decreased and displayed. FIG. 53B shows a display mode of the SW effect when the second holding ball is stopped and displayed. As will be described in detail later, the ceiling of the indicator is set for each change of the special symbol, and the ceiling is displayed so as to be raised based on the pressing of the frame button 22.

FIG. 54A shows a display mode of the SW effect when the special symbol corresponding to the third reserved ball shown in FIG. 51 is changing. When the frame button 22 is pressed, as shown in FIG. 54 (b), the indicator rises to the maximum value MAX and is displayed, and the player is notified in advance that the hit / fail judgment result is a big hit. NS.

As described above, in the configuration of the present embodiment, the SW effect is displayed across the fluctuations of a plurality of special symbols, so that it is possible to suppress the disappointment of the fluctuations of the special symbols whose hit / fail judgment results are out of order. Then, it is possible to have an expectation for a big hit against the subsequent fluctuation of the special symbol. Further, since the SW effect is set across a plurality of fluctuations, it is possible to give a margin to the SW effect, and it is possible to perform various effects.

<About the electrical configuration in the sixth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 55, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, a display lottery table 222c and a maximum value selection table 222h are added to the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 with respect to the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, respectively. There is.

Since the display lottery table 222c (see FIG. 31C) has the same configuration as that already described in the third embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The maximum value selection table 222h is a selection table for setting the maximum value of each fluctuation indicator in the SW effect. FIG. 55 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the maximum value selection table 222h. The scale of the maximum value is selected based on the value of the effect counter 223f for each fluctuation according to the result of the hit / fail determination.

Further, as shown in FIG. 55 (b), a SW effect flag 223n is added to the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the sixth embodiment. The SW effect flag 223n is a flag indicating that the SW effect is set. This SW effect flag 223n is set to ON when the SW effect is set in the process of S1458 of the winning command reception process (FIG. 57, S1450) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the sixth embodiment. Will be done. Further, it is set to off in the process of S1740 of the frame button input monitoring / effect process 6 (FIG. 58, S1530).

Since the other configurations are the same as the configurations of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding the control process in the sixth embodiment>
Next, the control process executed by the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 56 to 58. In the sixth embodiment, the command determination process (FIGS. 21, S1311) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is assigned to the command determination process 5 (FIG. 56, S1390) with respect to the first embodiment. The input monitoring / effect processing (FIG. 23, S1307) has been changed to the frame button input monitoring / effect process 6 (FIG. 58, S1530), respectively. As for other processes, the same processes as those in the first embodiment are executed, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the command determination process 5 (S1390) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 56. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the command determination process 5 (S1390). In the command determination process 5 (FIG. 56, S1390) in the sixth embodiment, the process of S1411 is changed to the process of S1450 with respect to the command determination process (FIG. 21, S1311) in the first embodiment. As for other processes, the same processes as those in the first embodiment are executed, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 57, a winning command receiving process (S1450), which is one process in the command determination process 5 (FIG. 56, S1390) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the sixth embodiment. Will be described. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the winning command reception process (S1450).

In the winning command receiving process (FIG. 57, S1450), first, the winning information of the received winning command is stored in the winning information storage area 223a (S1451). It is determined whether the SW effect flag 223n is on. If it is determined that the SW effect flag 223n is on (S1452: Yes), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the SW effect flag 223n is off (S1452: No), the number of reserved balls is 3 or more, and the hit / fail judgment results of the first reserved ball and the second reserved ball are out of order. Determine (S1453). When it is determined that the number of reserved balls is less than 3, or at least one of the first reserved ball and the second reserved ball is a big hit (S1453: No), this process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1453, when it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls is 3 or more and the hit / fail determination results of the first reserved ball and the second reserved ball are different (S1453: Yes), the effect counter 223f The value is acquired, and the SW lottery for whether or not to execute the SW effect is executed from the display lottery table 222c (S1454). In the process of S1454, it is determined whether the lottery result is a win (S1455). When it is determined that the lottery result is a win, the SW effective time corresponding to the reserved ball supported by the SW effect is set (S1456). A command for displaying the selected SW effect is set (S1457). The SW effect flag 2233n is set to ON (S1458). On the other hand, in the process of S1455, if it is determined that the lottery result is out of order (S1455: No), this process is terminated.

In this way, when a winning command indicating that a reserved ball has been established is received, the SW effect is set across a plurality of fluctuations based on the number of reserved balls and the result of determining whether or not the reserved ball has been held. .. As a result, the player can enjoy a plurality of fluctuations as one effect, and the result of the hit / miss judgment is out of order, and the fluctuation of the special symbol can also be enjoyed.

In the present embodiment, the SW effect is set when the number of reserved balls is three or more, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of reserved balls may be two or one. With this configuration, even with a small number of reserved balls, a plurality of fluctuations can be enjoyed as one effect.

Next, with reference to FIG. 58, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 6 (S1530) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 6 (S1530). The frame button input monitoring / effect processing 6 (FIG. 58, S1530) in the sixth embodiment has S1707, S1740, and S1750 with respect to the frame button input monitoring / effect process (FIG. 23, S1307) in the first embodiment. Each process has been added, and the processes of S161 to S1615 have been deleted.

After the process of S1602 is executed, the process of S1740 is executed. In the process of S1740, the SW effect flag 223n is set to off (S1740). After the process of S1606 is executed, the process of S1707 is executed. In the process of S1707, it is determined whether the currently displayed SW effect indicator has risen to the maximum value set for the fluctuation (S1707). When it is determined that the indicator is the maximum value (S1707: Yes), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the indicator is not the maximum value, the process of S1607 is executed.

Further, in the process of S1609, when it is determined that the lottery result is a hit (S1609: Yes), the value of the indicator is set based on the value of the SW press count counter 223e, and the display indicating the display of the indicator is displayed. A gauge effect command is set (S1750).

<About the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 59 to 63. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above, the configuration in which the SW effective time can be effectively used by configuring the lottery probability of the SW effect to be changed according to the SW effective time has been described.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment, the indicator M indicating the remaining time of the SW effective time is displayed with the instruction display mode s indicating the pressing timing of the frame button 22, and the player is presented with the frame button 22. It differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in that it is configured to execute an effect of instructing the timing of pressing. The same elements as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

<About the display mode of the SW effect in the 7th embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 59 to 60, a display mode of the SW effect displayed by the third symbol display device 81 in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 59A is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the SW effect of the present embodiment. A symbol schematically showing the frame button 22 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the position indicated by the indicator M in the instruction display mode s to the player who says "Stop the indicator in a circle !!" A display mode is displayed that prompts the player to operate the frame button 22 at a timing variable up to. In this case, the special symbol is reduced and displayed in the upper right corner of the display area.

The indicator M is a left side area a of the instruction display area s (the remaining time of the SW effective time is smaller than that of the instruction display area s), an instruction area b corresponding to the instruction display area s, and a right side area c of the instruction display area s. The remaining time of the SW effective time is larger than that of the instruction display area s). Then, when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, it is determined which area the indicator M corresponds to, that is, which area the remaining time of the SW effective time corresponds to.

FIG. 59B is a display mode showing an example in which a comment display is displayed when the frame button 22 is pressed in the instruction area b. When the frame button 22 is pressed in the instruction area b, the comment content having a higher expectation for the jackpot than the other display areas is selected.

Further, as shown in FIG. 60A, the SW effect is set to an enlarged effect in which the instruction display area is enlarged and displayed when the indicator M approaches the vicinity of the instruction display area s. As shown in FIG. 60A, the indicator M is enlarged and displayed as compared with the normal time, and the variable speed of the indicator M is also set to be slower than the normal time. Then, as shown in FIG. 60B, when the indicator M is located in the instruction display area, the characters "press !!" are displayed to guide the player to press the frame button 22. As a result, the player can press the frame button 22 at the timing when the indicator M changes in the instruction display area s. Further, in the present embodiment, this enlarged effect is configured to be easier to select when the result of determining whether or not the special symbol during the variable display is a big hit than when it is a big hit, so that the SW effect is expected to be a big hit. You can enjoy it.

<About the electrical configuration in the 7th embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 61, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment will be described. In the seventh embodiment, the display lottery table 222c and the comment selection table 222d are added to the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, respectively, with respect to the first embodiment. Since the display lottery table 222c has the same configuration as that already described in the third embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The comment selection table 222d is a data table for selecting a comment for the SW effect. As shown in FIG. 61 (b), comment contents are set for each left side area a (a zone), instruction area b (b zone), and right side area c (c zone). Further, for each SW effect, with or without an enlarged effect is set.

<Regarding the control process in the seventh embodiment>
Next, the control process executed by the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 62 to 63. In the seventh embodiment, the command determination process (FIGS. 21, S1311) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is assigned to the command determination process 6 (FIG. 62, S1560) with respect to the first embodiment. The input monitoring / effect processing (FIG. 23, S1307) has been changed to the frame button input monitoring / effect process 7 (FIG. 63, S1550), respectively. As for other processes, the same processes as those in the first embodiment are executed, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the command determination process 6 (S1560) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 62. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing the command determination process 6 (S1560). In the command determination process 6 (FIG. 62, S1560) in the seventh embodiment, the process of S1404 is changed to the process of S1460 with respect to the command determination process (FIG. 21, S1311) in the first embodiment. As for other processes, the same processes as those in the first embodiment are executed, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

After executing the process of S1403, the process of S1460 is executed. In the process of S1460, the SW effect is selected from the comment selection table 222d (see FIG. 61B), and the corresponding SW effective time is set (S1460).

Next, with reference to FIG. 63, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 7 (S1550) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 7 (S1550).

In the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 7 (FIG. 63, S1550), first, it is determined whether the SW effective time is 0 (S1551). If it is determined that the SW effective time is 0 (S1551: Yes), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the SW effective time is a value larger than 0 (S1551: No), the SW effective time is subtracted (S1552). A display command corresponding to the SW effective time is set (S1553). By this command, the indicator M is changed based on the remaining time of the SW effective time.

It is determined whether the frame button 22 is pressed (S1554). When it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed (S1554: Yes), a comment corresponding to the current SW effective time is set (S1555). Here, the corresponding comment is selected from the comment selection table 222d based on the timing at which the frame button 22 is pressed. A display command indicating the set comment is set (S1556).

On the other hand, in the process of S1554, when it is determined that the frame button 22 is not pressed (S1554: No), it is determined whether or not the effect is enlarged (S1557). When it is determined that the effect is magnified (S1557: Yes), it is determined whether it is the timing to execute the magnified effect (S1558). When it is determined that it is the timing to execute the enlargement effect (S1558: Yes), a display command indicating the enlargement display is set. On the other hand, when it is determined that the effect is no enlargement (S1557), and when it is determined that the timing is not the timing of the enlargement effect (S1558: No), this process ends.

In this way, by displaying the indicator M indicating the remaining time of the SW effective time and instructing the player to press the frame button 22 using the indicator M, the player presses the frame button 22. You can enjoy the game you used more. Further, when the frame button 22 can be operated at the timing instructed by the player, a display mode (game value) having a higher value than usual is easily given to the player, so that the player can instruct more. The game can be performed with the aim of pressing the frame button 22 at the timing when the frame button 22 is pressed.

Further, in the present embodiment, since the effect that the indicator M is enlarged is executed, the player who does not press the frame button 22 even if the display is displayed by the SW effect is also changing. It is possible to notify the degree of expectation for the result of determining whether the special symbol is correct or not. Therefore, the taste of the game can be further improved.

<About the pachinko machine 10 in the eighth embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 64 to 70. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above, the configuration in which the SW effective time can be effectively used by configuring the lottery probability of the SW effect to be changed according to the SW effective time has been described.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the eighth embodiment, the battle effect is executed in the round display mode during the jackpot game, and the frame button 22 is normally displayed to the player in the 15th round display mode. The SW effect to be pressed is displayed, but in the opening display mode, the SW effect in the 15th round can be set not to be set by pressing the frame button 22 a predetermined number of times. It is different from the pachinko machine 10. The same elements as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

<About the display mode of the SW effect in the eighth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 64 to 65, a display mode of the SW effect displayed by the third symbol display device 81 in the eighth embodiment will be described. FIG. 64A is a diagram showing an opening display mode indicating that the jackpot game is started. In the present embodiment, the player is notified by the battle effect whether the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B during the jackpot game.

As shown in FIG. 64 (b), in the round display mode of the 15th round, a display mode instructing the player to operate the frame button 22 is displayed. Then, when the player presses the frame button 22, a display mode in which the victory or defeat of the battle effect is determined is displayed, and when the main character wins in the battle effect, the jackpot A in the 16th round, which is the final round, is shown in FIG. 64 (c). A display mode indicating that is displayed.

On the other hand, when the player presses the frame button 22 a predetermined number of times or more during the opening display mode shown in FIG. 64 (a), as shown in FIG. 65 (a), in the round display mode of the 15th round, the SW effect is produced. It is not displayed, and the display mode indicating the explosion is displayed, and then the display mode for notifying the victory or defeat of the battle effect is displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 65 (b), a display mode for notifying the jackpot type is displayed in the final round.

With this configuration, a player who does not like the SW effect can be set to prohibit the display of the SW effect by operating the frame button 22 at the start of the jackpot game. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a production that is more tailored to the player. Further, in the opening display mode, since the display mode such as the setting is not displayed and can be set by operating the frame button 22, it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of searching for the setting that is not notified, and for a longer time. It is possible to encourage the player to play the game.

FIG. 65 (c) shows a timing chart for the setting for prohibiting the SW effect in the present embodiment. When the period of the opening display mode is started, the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed is counted. Here, when the player presses the frame button 22 30 times or more, the setting of the SW effect set in the 15th round is prohibited.

<About the electrical configuration in the eighth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 66, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment will be described. In the eighth embodiment, the skip flag 223p of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is added to the first embodiment. Since the other configurations are the same as those of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The skip flag 223p is a flag indicating that the setting of the SW effect in the 15th round is prohibited in the battle effect during the jackpot game. This skip flag 223p is set during the opening display of the jackpot game in the processing of S1589 of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 8 (FIGS. 70, S1580) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the eighth embodiment. When the frame button 22 is pressed 30 times or more, it is set to ON. Although not shown, it is set to off based on the end of the jackpot game.

<Regarding the control process by the pachinko machine 10 in the eighth embodiment>
Next, the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 67 to 70. In the eighth embodiment, the command determination process (FIG. 21, S1311) is combined with the command determination process 7 (FIG. 67, S1570) and the frame button input monitoring / effect process (FIG. 23, S1307) with respect to the first embodiment. Is changed to the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 8 (FIG. 70, S1580). As for other processes, the same processes as those in the first embodiment are executed, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the command determination process 7 (S1570) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 67. FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing the command determination process 7 (S1570). In the command determination process 7 (FIG. 67, S1570) in the eighth embodiment, the processes S1412, S1414, S1470, and S1480 are added to the command determination process (FIG. 21, S1311) in the first embodiment. There is. Since the other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the process of S1410, when it is determined that the winning command has not been received (S1412: No), it is determined whether or not the opening command has been received (S1412). If it is determined that the opening command has been received (S1412: Yes), the opening process 2 is executed (S1470). After that, this process ends.

The opening process 2 (S1470) will be described with reference to FIG. 68. FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing the opening process 2. In the opening process 2 (FIG. 68, S1470), the SW effective time is first set to 30 seconds (S1471). A display command for instructing the opening display is set (S1472). In this way, the SW effective time is set along with the execution of the opening process. The SW effective time set in this case is 10 seconds. In the present embodiment, the SW effective time is set to 10 seconds, which is the length of the opening display mode, but the SW effective time is not limited to 10 seconds, and may be a part of the length of the opening display mode. Further, in the present embodiment, the period is set by pressing the frame button 22 in the opening display mode, but the period is not limited to this, and may be the first round or other rounds.

Further, it is set so that the SW effect is not displayed for the player who is playing the game by pressing the frame button 22 before the start of the 15th round or before the SW effect of the 15th round is displayed. It may be configured as follows. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the SW effect from becoming meaningless to the player.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 67. In the process of S1412, when it is determined that the opening command has not been received (S1412: No), it is determined whether or not the round command has been received (S1414). If it is determined that the round command has been received (S1414: Yes), the round process is executed (S1480), and then this process ends.

Here, the round processing (S1480) will be described with reference to FIG. 69. FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing this round processing (S1480).

In the round processing (FIG. 69, S1480), first, it is determined whether the received round command is a command indicating the 15th round (S1481). When it is determined that the command indicates the 15th round, it is determined whether the skip flag 223p is off (S1482). When it is determined that the skip flag 223p is off (S1482: Yes), a 15-round display mode with SW effect is set (S1483). Next, the SW effective time corresponding to the display mode is set. A display command corresponding to the set display mode is set (S1485).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the skip flag 223p is on in the processing of S1482 (S1482: No), a 15-round display mode without SW effect is set (S1486). After that, the process of S1485 is executed to end this process. Further, in the process of S1481 when it is determined that the received round command is a command other than the 15th round (S1481: No), the round display mode corresponding to the number of rounds is set (S1487). After that, the process of S1485 is executed to end this process.

By setting the skip flag 223p to ON in this way, a round display without a SW effect setting is set. Therefore, when the player operates the frame button 22 in the opening display mode, it is possible to prohibit the setting of the SW effect, and it is possible to provide the player with an effect that matches the player's preference.

Next, with reference to FIG. 70, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 8 (S1580) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the eighth embodiment will be described. FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 8 (S1580).

In the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 8 (FIG. 70, S1580), first, it is determined whether the SW effective time is 0 (S1581). When it is determined that the SW effective time is 0 (S1581: Yes), the SW press count counter is set to 0 (S1582), and this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the SW effective time is not 0 (S1581: No), the SW effective time is subtracted and updated (S1583). It is determined whether the frame button 22 is pressed (S1584). If it is determined that the frame button 22 is not pressed (S1584: No), this process ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed (S1584: Yes), the value of the SW press count counter 223e is incremented by 1 and updated (S1585). It is determined whether the opening display is in progress (S1586). When it is determined that the opening display is in progress (S1586: Yes), it is determined whether the number of SW presses is 30 or more (S1587). When it is determined that the number of SW presses is 30 or more (S1587: Yes), the skip flag 223p is set to ON (S1588), the SW effective time is reset (S1589), and then this process is terminated. .. On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of times the SW is pressed is less than 30 times (S1588: No), this process is terminated.

Further, in the process of S1586, when it is determined that the opening display is not in progress (S1586), the effect to be displayed is selected based on the jackpot type (S1590). A display command indicating the selected effect is set (S1591). The SW effective time is reset (S1592), and this process ends.

In this way, in the configuration in which the SW effect is displayed, the player uses the frame button 22 to perform a predetermined operation at the timing before the SW effect is executed, so that the display of the SW effect is prohibited ( Can be canceled). Therefore, the player can set the effect according to the player's preference.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the opening display mode, the display / non-display of the SW effect is set by performing a predetermined operation on the frame button 22, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the special symbol changes. When a SW effect is selected in a pattern or the like, the display of the SW effect is prohibited (display / non-display setting) by performing a predetermined operation on the frame button 22 before the SW effect is displayed. It may be configured as follows. With this configuration, it is possible to execute an effect tailored to the player.

Next, a modified example of the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 71. FIG. 71 (a) is a diagram showing an opening display mode displayed by the third symbol display device in the jackpot game. In the present embodiment, the player operates an operation button (not shown) composed of the cross keys to move the cursor displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the BGM is output during the jackpot game. Select the type of.

Here, also in the present embodiment, the display mode of the battle effect is displayed as the round display mode during the jackpot game as in the eighth embodiment described above. As shown in FIG. 71 (b), when the frame button 22 is pressed and the type of BGM is selected in the opening display mode, the SW effect of the 15th round is displayed. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 71 (c), if the player does not select BGM in the opening display mode, the SW effect of the 15th round is not set. In this way, by configuring the operation in the opening display mode to set the presence or absence of the SW effect, it is possible to display the effect according to the player's preference. Further, in the present embodiment, the setting of the SW effect can be executed without displaying the dedicated display mode for setting the SW effect, the setting screen, or the like, so that the control load can be reduced. Further, by displaying such a setting screen, it is possible to suppress a problem that the production during the big hit is interrupted.

In the present embodiment, the jackpot effect has been described as an example, but such a setting may be made in the effect of the variation pattern of the special symbol or the advance notice effect selected in association with the effect. ..

<About the pachinko machine 10 in the ninth embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 72 to 84. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above, only the frame button 22 is provided, and the player presses the frame button 22 during the SW effective time set according to the effect of the game to display the third symbol. The configuration for varying the effect content displayed on the device 81 has been described.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the ninth embodiment, in addition to the frame button 22, a rotating body switch 600 having a display unit is provided in the pachinko machine 10, and the player turns the rotating body switch 600. It differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in that it is configured to change the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the rotating body switch 600 by operating the pachinko machine. The same elements as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

The configuration of the rotating body switch 600 provided in the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 72 to 75. As shown in FIG. 72, the rotating body switch 600 is provided on the upper portion of the upper plate 17 on the front side of the pachinko machine 10. The upper plate 17 is formed with a recess capable of storing the game ball, and the rotating body switch 600 has a leg portion attached to a flat portion other than the recess. The rotating body switch 600 is provided at a position where the player can operate the rotating body switch 600 with his / her left hand while operating the firing handle 51 with his / her right hand.

73 (a) to 73 (d) are four views of the rotating body switch 600. 73 (a) is a top view of the rotating body switch 600 as viewed from above, FIG. 73 (b) is a front view of the rotating switch 600 as viewed from the front, and FIG. 73 (c) is a rotating body. It is a side view of the switch 600 viewed from the right side, and 73 (d) is a perspective view of the rotating body switch 600.

FIG. 74 is an exploded perspective view of the rotating body switch 600. The rotating body switch 600 covers a projection unit 606 for projecting a display image on the lower portion, a display spherical surface 603 that acts as a screen for projecting an image projected from the projection unit 606, and a rotatable display spherical surface 603. It is composed of a rotating sphere 601 and a left leg portion 605L and a right leg portion 605R that are rotatably fixed to the projection unit 606.

The rotating sphere 601 is composed of a first hemisphere portion 601a having a hemispherical shape and a second hemisphere portion 601b having a shape symmetrical with the first hemisphere portion 601a. The first hemisphere portion has a spherical surface larger than the spherical surface of the display spherical surface 603, and has a spherical surface portion capable of covering the outer circumference of the display spherical surface 603. A shaft portion for rotatably fixing to the leg portion 605R is formed. This shaft portion is inserted into the cylindrical portion of the left side collar member 604L and the right side collar member 604R, which are formed in a cylindrical shape, in a state where the first hemisphere portion 601a and the second hemisphere portion 601b are intertwined, and the left leg. The portion 605L and the right leg portion 605R are inserted into a cylindrical shaft fixing portion formed so as to project toward the rotating sphere 601 and are rotatably fixed. The rotating sphere 601 is configured to be rotatable in a state where the display spherical surface 603 is fixed to the left leg portion 605L and the right leg portion 605R inside.

The rotating sphere 601 is made of a transparent resin material, and the display mode projected on the display spherical surface 603 is configured to be visible through the rotating sphere 601. A rotation sensor 802 for detecting the amount of rotation of the rotating sphere 601 is attached to the left leg portion 605L that rotatably fixes the rotating sphere 601 to determine whether the rotating sphere 601 has been rotated by the player. It is configured to be able to detect. The rotation sensor 802 is composed of a rotary encoder and is configured to detect the rotation angle of the rotating sphere 601. The display spherical surface 603 has protrusions for fixing formed on the left and right ends, and is fixed to the left leg portion 605L and the right leg portion 605R by a screw member 607.

Further, the rotating body switch 600 is composed of a limit switch provided at a connecting portion between the projection unit 606, the left leg portion 605L, and the right leg portion 605R when the rotating sphere 601 is pushed downward by the player. The push switch 801 is configured to be turned on, and is also configured to function as a push type switch.

In the present embodiment, the rotating body switch 606 is provided with a push-type switch in a mechanical configuration, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a touch sensor for detecting whether the player touches the rotating sphere 601 is provided to function as a switch. May be configured to configure.

FIG. 75 is a cross-sectional view for schematically explaining how the projection unit 606 projects an image on the display spherical surface 603. The projection unit 606 has an image projection unit configured in the same manner as the projector inside, and is configured to project a predetermined display mode on the display spherical surface 603 by projecting an image vertically upward. ..

Next, with reference to FIG. 76, a display mode of the effect using the rotating body switch 600 in which a predetermined display mode is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the display spherical surface 603 will be described. FIG. 76A is a diagram showing an example of a variable display mode of a special symbol of the effect set to use the rotating body switch 600. When the reach display mode is such that the left symbol and the right symbol of the special symbol are the same symbol, the special symbol is reduced and displayed on the upper right side of the display area. Then, in the other display area, a large rock is displayed, and a symbol "7" that hits the rock and a symbol "6" that is an off symbol are displayed. Then, above the display area, the characters "Rotate the sphere !!" are displayed to notify the player to rotate the rotating body switch 600.

When the rotating sphere 601 of the rotating body switch 600 is rotated, a display mode is displayed in which the rock displayed in the display area is rotated so that the design of the hand is "7" in front. .. The display mode for rotating the rock is configured so that the display mode can be changed based on the rotation of the rotating sphere 601 by a predetermined amount.

FIG. 76 (b) is a diagram showing a display mode displayed on the display spherical surface 603 when the variable display mode using the rotating body switch 600 shown in FIG. 76 (a) is displayed. On the display spherical surface 603, a display mode similar to the display mode displayed by the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. With such a configuration, the player can suppress a problem that the player is absorbed in the operation of the rotating body switch 600 and overlooks the content displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by rotating the rotating body switch 600, the mode of being displayed can be changed, so that the enjoyment of operating the rotating body switch 600 can be increased.

In the present embodiment, the content displayed on the display spherical surface of the rotating body switch 600 is the same as the content displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but the content is not limited to that, and the content is not limited to the third symbol display device 81. It may be configured to display a symbol such as a notice that is not displayed or text information.

<About the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the ninth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 77, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the ninth embodiment will be described. In the ninth embodiment, the press switch 801 electrically connected to the input / output port 225 of the voice lamp control device 113, the rotation sensor 802, and the projection unit 606 are added to the first embodiment, respectively.

The pressing switch 801 is a switch composed of a limit switch for detecting that the rotating body switch 600 has been pressed. When the press switch 801 is pressed, a signal is output to the voice lamp control device 113, and the signal is determined by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113.

The rotation sensor 802 is a sensor composed of a rotary encoder for detecting the amount of rotation of the rotating sphere 601. When the rotating sphere 601 is rotated by the player, the amount of rotation is output to the detected voice lamp control device 113.

The projection unit 606 is a display device provided on the rotating body switch 600, and is configured to project an image on the display spherical surface 603 of the rotating body switch 600. The projection unit 606 is configured to start outputting an image based on the display data when the display data is output from the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113.

As shown in FIG. 78, the sphere display data 222i and the sphere production scenario selection table 222j are added to the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the ninth embodiment, respectively, with respect to the first embodiment. ..

The sphere display data 222i is display data such as a character to be displayed on the projection unit 606 of the rotating body switch 600.

The sphere effect scenario selection table 222j is a selection table for selecting the type of effect related to the rotating body switch 600 by lottery. The sphere effect scenario selection table 222j is 1 in the process of S1492 of the sphere display scenario setting process (FIG. 81, S1490) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110. The process in which the scenario of is selected is executed.

Further, a display data buffer 223r, a scenario timer 223s, a rotation operation flag 223t, a rotation effective time 223v, and a pointer 223w are added to the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 for the first mobile phone.

The display data buffer 223r is an area in which the sphere display data table selected from the sphere display data 222i is stored. When the spherical display data table is stored in the display data buffer 223r, the image data to be displayed on the projection unit 606 is selected by the pointer 223w based on the passage of time, and the image data is transferred to the projection unit 606. ..

The scenario timer 223s is a timer for measuring the elapsed time for selecting image data based on the elapsed time from the spherical display data table in which the image data to be displayed on the projection unit 606 is set.

The rotation operation flag 223t is a flag for determining whether the rotation sphere 601 has been rotated. The rotation operation flag 223t indicates that the rotation sphere 601 has a predetermined rotation angle (360 degrees in the present embodiment) in the process of S1794 of the rotation operation determination process (FIG. 84, S1790) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. ) When it is determined that the rotation has been performed more than that, it is set to ON. Further, when the image is transferred in the process of S1775 of the sphere display process (FIG. 82, S1313), it is automatically set to off.

The rotation effective time 223v is a storage area for storing the time determined to be effective when the rotating sphere 601 is rotated. The rotation effective time 223v is updated by subtracting the elapsed time in the S1792 process of the rotation operation determination process (FIG. 84, S1790).

Since the other configurations are the same as those of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding the control process of the pachinko machine 10 in the ninth embodiment>
Next, the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 79 to 84.

First, with reference to FIG. 79, the main process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the ninth embodiment will be described. In the main process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the ninth embodiment, the command determination process (FIGS. 21, S1311) is changed to the command determination process 8 (FIG. 80, S1760) with respect to the first embodiment. It has been changed and a sphere display process (FIG. 82, S1313) has been added. Since the other configurations are the same as those of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the command determination process 8 (S1760) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 80. In the command determination process 8 (S1760) in the ninth embodiment, a sphere display scenario setting process (FIG. 81, S1490) is added to the command determination process (FIG. 21, S1311) in the first embodiment. As for other processes, the same processes as those in the first embodiment are executed, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 81, a sphere display scenario setting process (S1490), which is one process in the command determination process 8 (FIG. 80, S1760) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the ninth embodiment. ) Will be explained. FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing this sphere display scenario setting process (S1490).

In the sphere display scenario setting process (FIG. 81, S1490), first, it is determined whether the fluctuation pattern extracted from the fluctuation pattern command received from the main control device 110 is a fluctuation pattern with a sphere display effect (S1491). Here, in the ninth embodiment, whether or not to display an image on the spherical display unit 603 of the rotating body switch 600 is preset in the fluctuation pattern.

In the process of S1491 when it is determined that the extracted fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern with a sphere display effect (S1491: Yes), the type of the display data table of the display scenario corresponding to the variation pattern is selected as the sphere effect scenario selection table. Select from 222j and set the display data table in the sphere display data table buffer (S1492). Initialize and set the pointer for setting each display data set in the display data table (S1493).

Next, with reference to FIG. 82, the sphere display process (S1313) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the ninth embodiment will be described. FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing this sphere display process (S1313).

In the sphere display process (FIG. 82, S1313), first, it is determined whether or not the sphere display scenario is set (S1771). Whether or not the sphere display scenario is set is determined by whether or not the display data table is set in the sphere display data table buffer. When it is determined that the sphere display scenario is set (S1771: Yes), it is determined whether it is the timing to update the scenario timer 223s (S1772). The scenario timer 223s is a timer for updating the pointer of the set display data table according to the elapsed time. It is determined whether it is the display data update timing (S1773). When it is determined that it is the display data update timing (S1773: Yes), and when it is determined that the rotation operation flag 223t is on (S1774: Yes), the image data corresponding to the rotation operation is projected by the projection unit. Transfer to 606 (S1775). On the other hand, when it is determined that the rotation operation flag 223t is off (S1774: No), the corresponding image data without the rotation operation is transferred to the projection unit 606.

As described above, in the display data table of the sphere effect, the display data when the rotating body switch 600 is rotated and the display data when the rotating body switch 600 is not rotated are set in advance. Thereby, it is possible to easily execute the process of changing the display mode according to the operation of the rotating body switch 600. Further, in the present embodiment, even if the player rotates the rotating body switch 600 based on the lottery result of the special symbol, if the result of the hit / fail determination is different, the special symbol cannot be rotated to the winning symbol. If the display mode when the rotation operation is performed is set in advance, it is possible to display the display mode according to the judgment result by setting the set display data without having to judge the hit / fail judgment result each time. can.

Next, with reference to FIG. 83, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 7 (S1780) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the ninth embodiment will be described. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 7 (S1780). The frame button input monitoring / effect processing 7 (FIG. 83, S1780) in the ninth embodiment is a rotation operation determination process (FIG. 23, S1307) with respect to the frame button input monitoring / effect process (FIG. 23, S1307) in the first embodiment. 84, S1790) has been added. The rotation operation determination process (S1790) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 84.

FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing this rotation operation determination process (S1790). In the rotation operation determination process (FIG. 84, S1790), first, it is determined whether the rotation effective time 223v is a value larger than 0, that is, whether the rotation effective time 223v is set (S1791). The rotation effective time 223v is a time when the rotation sphere 601 is rotated and the operation is determined to be effective. When it is determined that the rotation effective time is in progress (S1791: Yes), the rotation effective time 223v is subtracted and updated (S1792). It is determined whether or not the rotating sphere 601 is rotated and operated by a predetermined angle or more (360 degrees or more in the present embodiment) determined in advance (S1793). When it is determined that the rotation operation has been performed by a predetermined amount or more (S1793: Yes), the rotation operation flag 223t is set to ON (S1794). On the other hand, if it is determined that the rotation has not been performed by a predetermined rotation amount or more, this process is terminated. If it is determined in the process of S1791 that the rotation is not in the effective time (S1791: No), this process is terminated.

In this embodiment, instead of the frame button 22 of the first embodiment, the rotating body switch 600 is pressed to perform the same function. In the configuration in which the rotating body switch 600 is pressed, the rotation effective time 223v is not set. As a result, by pressing the rotating body switch 600, even if the rotating body switch 600 rotates, it is prevented from being determined that the rotation operation has been executed against the intention of the player. ing.

As described above, in the configuration of the present embodiment, the rotating body switch 600 is provided with a function capable of displaying the display mode, and a rotating body is further provided around the rotating body switch 600 so that the display mode can be changed by the rotation operation. Therefore, it can be configured so that the player seems to participate in the game by the operation.

<About the pachinko machine 10 in the tenth embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 85 to 96. In the first embodiment described above, the configuration in which the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed by pressing the frame button 22 has been described.

On the other hand, in the ninth embodiment, the frame button 22 is changed to the liquid crystal switch 700 to execute various displays on the liquid crystal switch 700, and the liquid crystal display device provided on the liquid crystal switch 700 is provided. The touch panel type is different from the first embodiment in that a touch operation can be performed by pressing the touch panel. The same configurations as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<About the configuration of the liquid crystal switch 700 in the tenth embodiment>
First, the configuration of the liquid crystal switch 700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 85 to 87. In the tenth embodiment, the liquid crystal type switch 700 is provided on the upper right side of the upper plate 17 instead of the frame button 22 in the first embodiment. FIG. 85 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 to which the liquid crystal switch 700 is attached.

The structure of the liquid crystal switch 700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 86 to 87. FIG. 85 is a perspective view of the liquid crystal switch 700 as viewed from above. The liquid crystal type switch 700 is composed of a transparent resin member, has a transparent cover body 701 capable of covering the internal touch panel 702 with a substantially triangular cover body, and is fixed inside the transparent cover body 701 at a slight distance from the cover body. Detection composed of a touch panel 702 and a transmissive sensor that detects whether the cover body 701 is pressed by detecting a part of the pressed cover body when the cover body 701 is pressed. It is composed of a sensor 703 and a stopper member 704 that prohibits further rotation of the cover body 701 that rotates a predetermined amount in the pressing direction when the cover body 701 is pressed. The cover body 701 has a shaft portion 701Z for rotatably fixing to the front side of the pachinko machine 10, and has an urging member (not shown) composed of a spring member that always urges upward. Have. The cover body 701 has an inclined surface having a width slightly larger than the width of the touch panel 702 from the shaft portion 701Z, and is configured so that the player can visually recognize the display mode of the internal touch panel 702 through the inclined surface.

FIG. 87 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA of the liquid crystal switch 700. FIG. 87A shows a case where the liquid crystal type switch 700 is not pressed, and FIG. 87B is a diagram showing a case where the liquid crystal type switch 700 is pressed. As shown in FIG. 87 (a), the angle of the inclined surface of the cover body 701 and the angle at which the touch panel 702 is fixed do not match. However, as shown in FIG. 87 (b), when the cover body 701 is pressed and rotated until it comes into contact with the stopper member 704, the tilted surface of the cover body 701 and the touch panel 702 are brought into contact with each other in the same tilt angle. It is configured. With this configuration, when the cover body 701 is pressed to the maximum, the touch panel 702 can be touch-operated via the cover body 701.

Next, a display mode displayed on the touch panel 702 will be described with reference to FIG. 88. FIG. 88A shows a display mode in which a similar display mode is displayed on the touch panel liquid crystal when the special symbol variation effect of pressing the liquid crystal switch 700 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is a figure which showed an example.

In this way, the same content as the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is also displayed on the liquid crystal switch 700, so that the player looks at the liquid crystal switch 700 from the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to confirm the same contents as the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if the third symbol display device 81 is moved. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that the player overlooks the display content displayed by the third symbol display device 81 by pressing the liquid crystal type switch 700.

FIG. 88B is a diagram showing a display mode for prompting the player to perform a touch operation displayed on the touch panel 702. The third symbol display device 81 displays a display mode that allows the player to select the reach display mode displayed in the lower right display area of the touch panel 702. Then, an icon that allows the player to press and select A reach and B reach is displayed in the remaining display area of the touch panel 702. Then, the characters "Touch the icon !!" are displayed to notify that the icon is touched and selected.

The player can select by touching the cover body 701 in an attempt to touch the icon and touching the icon when the cover body 701 is pressed by the maximum amount. Since the player presses the cover body 701 together with the touch operation, the player can operate the cover body 701 without feeling the trouble of performing the two operations.

With reference to FIG. 89, it is a display mode showing an example of a case where the display mode displayed on the touch panel 702 is pinch-to-zoomed to enlarge the display mode. With the cover body 701 pressed, the display mode displayed on the touch panel 702 is brought into contact with a finger so as to touch two points in the vicinity of the display mode to be enlarged (see FIG. 89 (a)). After that, by operating so as to widen the distance between the fingers, the display mode can be enlarged to an arbitrary size of the player (see FIG. 89 (b)).

In this way, the displayed display mode can be enlarged or reduced to an arbitrary size of the player, so that the information that the player wants to know can be easily known.

<About the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the tenth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 90, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the tenth embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the tenth embodiment, a liquid crystal type switch 700 is provided instead of the frame button 22 with respect to the first embodiment. A pressing sensor 704 for detecting that the cover body 701 provided on the liquid crystal switch 700 has been pressed is connected to the input / output port 225 of the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the touch panel 702 provided on the liquid crystal switch 700 is connected to the input / output port 225. The touch panel 702 is configured to be able to output a signal for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 based on the fact that the display screen is touched by the player.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91 (a), the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the tenth embodiment contains the SW liquid crystal display data 222k and the SW liquid crystal scenario selection table with respect to the first embodiment. 222m is added.

The SW liquid crystal display data 222k is a data table in which a display data table in which display data for display on the touch panel 702 is set is stored. In this display data table, each data to be displayed is set according to the display time.

The SW liquid crystal scenario selection table 222m is a data table for selecting a display data table corresponding to the data to be displayed on the touch panel 702 according to the received fluctuation pattern.

As shown in FIG. 91B, the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the tenth embodiment has a display data buffer 223r, a scenario timer 223s, a pointer 223w, and a touch valid with respect to the first embodiment. A time storage area 223x has been added. Since the display data buffer 223r, the scenario timer 223s, and the pointer 223w have the same configurations as those described in the ninth embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The touch effective time storage area 223x is a storage area for storing the time for determining that the operation is valid when the touch panel 702 is touch-operated. The touch effective time storage area 223x is subtracted and updated in the processing of S1826 of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 8 (FIGS. 96, S1820) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the tenth embodiment. .. The touch effective time storage area 223x receives the fluctuation pattern in which the touch operation is set, and when the scenario is set, the effective time set in the scenario is automatically set.

<Regarding the control process executed by the voice lamp control device 113 in the tenth embodiment>
Next, the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 92 to 96.

The main process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 92. In the main process of the ninth embodiment, the command determination process (FIGS. 21, S1311) is combined with the command determination process (FIG. 92, S1800) and the frame button input monitoring / effect process (FIG. 23, S1800) with respect to the first embodiment. S1307) has been changed to frame button input monitoring / effect processing 8 (FIG. 96, S1820), and SW liquid crystal display processing (FIG. 95, S1810) has been added. Since other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the command determination process 9 (S1800) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 93. FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing the command determination process 9 (S1800). In the command determination process 9 (FIG. 93, S1800) in the tenth embodiment, the SW liquid crystal display setting process (FIG. 94, S1840) is added to the command determination process (FIG. 21, S1311) in the first embodiment. There is. Since the other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the SW liquid crystal display setting process (S1840) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 94. FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing the SW liquid crystal display setting process (S1840).

In the SW liquid crystal display setting process (FIG. 94, S1840), first, it is determined whether the extracted fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern with a SW effect (S1841). Here, in the tenth embodiment, whether or not to use the liquid crystal type switch 700 for the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is set in advance, and even the scenario to be selected is set.

When it is determined that the fluctuation pattern has a SW effect (S1841: Yes), the display data table which is the SW liquid crystal display data is displayed from the SW liquid crystal scenario selection table 222m based on the extracted fluctuation pattern. Data table buffer 223r Set to. The SW effective time and the touch effective time are set at a predetermined timing by this display data table. On the other hand, in the process of S1841, if it is determined that the SW effect is not set (S1841: No), this process is terminated.

Next, the SW liquid crystal display process (S1810) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 95. FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing the SW liquid crystal display setting process (S1810).

In the SW liquid crystal display process (FIG. 95, S1810), first, it is determined whether or not the display setting of the touch panel 702 (SW liquid crystal) is set. Whether or not the display of the touch panel 702 is set is determined by whether or not the display data table is set in the display data table buffer 223r. If the pointer 223w is updated up to the END data of the display data table, it is determined that the display data table is not set.

When it is determined that the display data of the touch panel 702 is set (S1811: Yes), the scenario timer 223s is updated (S1812). It is determined whether it is the timing to update the display data (S1813). Here, it is determined whether or not the display time set in the display data table has elapsed. When it is determined that it is time to update the display data (S1813: Yes), the set display data is converted into image data and transferred to the touch panel 702 (S1814).

On the other hand, in the process of S1811, if it is determined that there is no display setting of the touch panel 702 (S1811: No), or if it is determined that it is not the update timing of the display data (S1813: No), this process is performed. finish.

Next, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 8 (S1820) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 96. FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 8 (S1820).

In the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 8 (FIG. 96, S1820), first, it is determined whether the time stored in the SW effective time storage area 223g is greater than 0, that is, whether it is in the SW effective time (S1821). .. When it is determined that the SW effective time is in progress (S1821: Yes), the SW effective time is subtracted and updated (S1822). It is determined whether the cover body is pressed (S1823). Here, it is determined whether the pressing sensor 704 is on. When it is determined that the pressing sensor 704 is on, the image data for displaying the display data at the time of pressing the SW set in the set display data table is set (S1824). Here, the set image data is transferred and set to the touch panel 702 by the process of S1814 of the SW liquid crystal display process (FIG. 95, S1810). On the other hand, in the process of S1823, when it is determined that the pressing sensor 704 is off (S1823: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1821, when it is determined that the SW effective time is 0 (S1821: No), it is determined whether the touch effective time is 0 (S1825). When it is determined that the touch effective time is not 0, that is, it is during the touch effective time (S1825: Yes), the touch effective time is subtracted and updated (S1826). It is determined whether the pressing sensor 704 is on (S1827). When it is determined that the pressing sensor 704 is off (S1827: No), this process ends.

As described above, when the pressing sensor 704 is off, that is, when the cover body 701 is not pressed, the operation of the touch panel 702 is not accepted. This is configured so that when the cover body 701 and the display surface of the touch panel 702 come into contact with each other, the cover body 701 is electrically conductive and the touch operation through the cover body 701 can be discriminated, but the cover body 701 is not sufficiently pressed. This is to suppress the problem of recognizing the touch operation in the case of.

In the process of S1827, when it is determined that the pressing sensor 704 is on (S1827: Yes), it is determined whether or not a touch operation is performed (S1828). In the process of S1828, when it is determined that the touch operation is performed (S1828: Yes), it is determined whether the operation is a pinch-do-zoom operation (S1829). Whether it is a pinch-do-zoom operation determines whether two points on the display screen are in contact with each other. When it is determined that the pinch-do-zoom operation has been performed (S1829), the enlargement ratio based on the operation is set in the set display data table (S1830). After that, this process ends.

With this configuration, if the cover body 701 is not pressed, even if the player touches the cover body 701, there is no problem that the display screen expands against the player's intention, and the player can do so. It is easy to play and can be configured.

On the other hand, in the process of S1829, when it is determined that the operation is not a pinch-do-zoom operation (S1829: No), it is determined whether there is a valid selection (S1831). This determines whether the display area of the displayed icon is pressed when the icon to be selected by touch operation is displayed as shown in FIG. 88 (b). If the other area is touch-operated or the two icons are touch-operated, it is determined as an invalid selection.

When it is determined that there is a valid selection in the process of S1831 (S1831: Yes), the display data based on the selected icon is set from the display data table (S1832). The touch effective time is reset to the initial value of 0 (S1833). After that, this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1825, when it is determined that the touch effective time is 0 (S1825: No), this process is terminated.

In this way, since the touch effective time is reset when the icon is selected, it is possible to suppress a problem such as malfunction.

The pinch-do-zoom operation may be configured so that it can be performed even outside the touch effective time.

In the present embodiment, the touch panel 702 and the cover body 701 are configured to be electrically connected to each other to enable touch operation, but the present invention is not limited to this, and an object at a predetermined distance can be identified from the display screen of the touch panel 702. It may be configured to enable touch operation through the cover body 701.

Further, in the present embodiment, the pressing sensor 704 that detects that the cover body 701 has been pressed is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the touch panel 702 may be configured to identify that the cover body 701 has been pressed. good. The touch panel may be configured to determine that the pressing operation has been performed by the touch panel determining the finger or hand that presses the touch panel 702 and the cover body 701.

Further, in the present embodiment, the cover body 701 can be pressed even outside the SW effective time or the touch operation effective time, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a regulating member that regulates the rotation of the cover body 701 is provided outside the effective time. It may be configured to be operated by a solenoid or the like to notify the player of the effective time.

Further, in the above embodiment, the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are provided separately, but instead, the respective devices 113 and 114 may be integrated and provided as one device.

Further, in the above embodiment, first, a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113, and when the command is received by the voice lamp control device 113, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114 in the voice lamp control device 113. The command to be to be determined is determined, and then the command is transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114. On the other hand, first, a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the display control device 114, and when the command is received by the display control device 114, the display control device 114 determines a command to be transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. After that, the display control device 114 may be configured to send a command to the voice lamp control device 113.

In the above embodiment, each command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 gives a display instruction to the display control device 114. A command may be transmitted directly from the control device 110 to the display control device 114. Further, the voice lamp control device may be connected to the display control device, and a command for instructing the output of each voice and the lighting of the lamp may be transmitted from the display control device to the voice lamp control device.

In the above embodiment, the winning of the first ball opening 64 and the passage of the second ball opening 67 are each suspended up to four times, but the maximum number of reserved balls is limited to four times. However, it may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). In addition, the number of reserved balls in the variable display based on the winning of the first ball opening 64 is set by a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is divided into four areas by the number of reserved balls. It may be displayed in a different mode (for example, a color or a lighting pattern), and a light emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first symbol display device 37, and the light emitting member notifies the number of reserved balls. It may be configured as.

Further, as shown in the above embodiment, the variable display, which is a kind of dynamic display, is not limited to the one in which the symbol as the identification information is scrolled vertically on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and is vertically The symbol may be moved and displayed along a predetermined path such as a direction or an L shape. Further, the dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the variable display of the symbol, and for example, one or a plurality of characters are displayed together with the symbol or in a wide variety of motion display or change display separately from the symbol. It also includes the effect display. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above-described embodiment. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item, a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the jackpot until multiple times (for example, two or three times) a big hit state occurs including that. It may be carried out as). Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and is in a special gaming state on the condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, in addition to the slot machine and the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various game machines such as an array pachi, a sparrow ball, a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine.

As a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for variably displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols and then confirming the symbol is provided, and a handle for launching a ball is not provided. Things can be mentioned. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the symbol variation is started due to, for example, the operation of the operation lever, and for example, due to the operation of the stop switch or a predetermined amount. As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game is generated that gives the player a predetermined game value on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a predetermined game value. Is for paying out a large amount of balls to the lower saucer. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the ball can be treated as a game value in the game hall, which is a game value seen in the current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the locations where game machines are installed can be solved.

Further, it may be configured to combine all or a part of the configurations of each of the above embodiments.

Hereinafter, in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention, the concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments will be shown.

<Characteristic A group>
The main control means for executing the control of the game and the sub-control means for executing the control of the game according to the control signal from the main control means, and the main control means has the game based on the establishment of the starting condition. It has a winning / failing determination means for executing the winning / failing determination of the above, and a privileged game executing means for executing a privileged game that is advantageous to the player based on the result of the winning / failing determination. The means are an operation means that can be operated by the player, an acquisition means that acquires lottery information based on the operation of the operation means, and a determination means that executes a determination based on the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means. , A display means for displaying an operation effect display mode when a predetermined result is determined by the determination means, a period setting means for setting an effective period for enabling the operation of the operation means, and a predetermined determination means. The probability setting means for setting the probability determined as the result and the probability set by the probability setting means are changed according to the timing at which the operation means is operated within the valid period of 1 set by the period setting means. A gaming machine A1 characterized by having a probability determining means for determining.

According to the gaming machine A1, in the main control means, the winning / failing determination of the game is executed by the winning / failing determination means based on the establishment of the starting condition. Based on the hit / fail determination result being a predetermined result, the privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game execution means. In the slave control means, lottery information is acquired by the acquisition means based on the operation of the operation means that can be operated by the player. The determination is executed by the determination means based on the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means. When a predetermined result is determined by the determination means, the operation effect display mode is displayed on the display means. The validity period for enabling the operation of the operating means is set by the period setting means. The probability that the determination means determines a predetermined result is set by the probability setting means. The probability set by the probability setting means is determined by the probability determining means by varying it according to the timing at which the operating means is operated within the valid period of 1 set by the period setting means. As a result, even within the valid period of 1, the probability that a predetermined result will be obtained is changed depending on the timing of the operation, so that a random effect can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the production of the game, and it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets tired of the game at an early stage.

The gaming machine A1 has a counting means for counting the number of times the operating means is operated within the valid period of 1 set by the period setting means, and the probability determining means performs the operation within the valid period of 1. When the probability is determined at the timing when the means is operated, if the count value by the counting means is a predetermined number of times or more, the probability of being determined as the predetermined result is higher than the probability of being determined based on the timing. A gaming machine A2 characterized by being set.

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the number of times the operating means is operated within the valid period of 1 set by the period setting means is counted by the counting means. When the probability is determined at the timing when the operating means is operated within the valid period of 1, if the count value by the counting means is a predetermined number of times or more, the probability of being determined as a predetermined result is set to that timing by the probability determining means. It is set higher than the probability determined based on. Therefore, when the player operates the operation means many times, it is possible to feel that the operation effect display mode is easily displayed, and there is an effect that the player can be interested by operating the operation means.

The gaming machine A3 is characterized in that, in the gaming machines A1 or A2, the valid period is set by combining periods in which the probabilities determined by the probability determining means are different from each other.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A1 or the gaming machine A2, the validity period is set by combining the periods in which the probabilities determined by the probability determining means are different from each other. There is an effect that the probability can be changed and set according to the timing when the person operates the operating means.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the valid period is set to a non-probability period in which there is no probability that a predetermined result will be obtained by the probabilistic determining means based on the operation of the operating means. The gaming machine A4, characterized in that the above is set.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the non-probability period in which the probability-free period in which the probability of obtaining a predetermined result is not set by the probability-determining means is set as the valid period based on the operation of the operating means, more operating means are used by the player. It has the effect of being able to be operated.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to the gaming machine A4, the probability determining means is set so that the probability of being determined as a predetermined result increases as the remaining period of the valid period decreases. ..

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines A1 to the gaming machine A4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, as the remaining period of the valid period decreases, the probability of determining a predetermined result is set higher by the probability determining means. As a result, it is possible to configure the player to operate the operating means until the valid period is short, and there is an effect that the game can be performed using the operating means.

<Characteristic B group>
The main control means for executing the control of the game and the sub-control means for executing the control of the game according to the control signal from the main control means, and the main control means is based on the establishment of the starting condition, and the game is played. It has a winning / failing determination means for executing the winning / failing determination, and a privileged game executing means for executing a privileged game that is advantageous to the player based on the winning / failing determination result being a predetermined result. The means are an operation means that can be operated by the player, an acquisition means that acquires lottery information based on the operation of the operation means, and a determination means that executes a determination based on the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means. , The display means for displaying the operation effect display mode when the determination means determines a predetermined result, the period setting means for setting the valid period for enabling the operation of the operation means, and the operation means are operated. , A specific effect based on the storage means for storing the remaining period of the valid period when the predetermined result is determined and the total value of the remaining period stored in the storage means becomes a predetermined value or more. The gaming machine B1 is characterized by having a specific effect means for displaying the above on the display means.

According to the gaming machine B1, in the main control means, the winning / failing determination of the game is executed by the winning / failing determination means based on the establishment of the starting condition. Based on the hit / fail determination result being a predetermined result, the privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game execution means. In the slave control means, lottery information is acquired by the acquisition means based on the operation of the operation means that can be operated by the player. The determination is executed by the determination means based on the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means. When a predetermined result is determined by the determination means, the operation effect display mode is displayed on the display means. The validity period for enabling the operation of the operating means is set by the period setting means. When the operating means is operated and a predetermined result is determined, the remaining period of the valid period is stored by the storage means. Based on the fact that the total value of the remaining period stored in the storage means becomes a predetermined value or more, a specific effect is displayed on the display means by the specific effect means. As a result, when the valid period is set, the player can operate the operating means at an earlier timing to obtain a predetermined result, so that a larger remaining valid period can be stored. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested by operating the operation means, and there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets tired of the game at an early stage.

In the game machine B1, the main control means obtains the winning / failing determination information for which the winning / failing determination is executed by the winning / failing determination means based on the establishment of the acquisition condition, and the winning / failing determination information acquired by the acquiring means. The hit / fail judgment information storage means for storing the hit / fail judgment information, the advance / hit / fail judgment means for determining the hit / miss judgment information stored in the hit / miss judgment information storage means before the start condition is satisfied, and the pass / fail judgment means by the prior hit / miss judgment means. The specific effect means has a pre-signal generating means for generating a pre-signal for notifying the subordinate control means of the determination result, and the specific effect means has the pre-determined result in the hit / miss determination information storage means by the pre-signal. The specific effect is displayed on the display means even when the total value stored in the storage means is less than the predetermined value based on the determination that the hit / fail determination information is stored. A game machine B2 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in the main control means, the hit / fail determination information in which the hit / miss determination is executed by the hit / miss determination means is acquired by the acquisition means based on the establishment of the acquisition condition. The hit / fail determination information acquired by the acquisition means is stored in the hit / miss determination information storage means. The hit / fail judgment information stored in the hit / miss judgment information storage means is judged to be hit / miss before the start condition is satisfied by the advance hit / miss judgment means. A prior signal for notifying the slave control means of the result of the hit / fail determination by the prior hit / fail determination means is generated by the advance signal generation means. Even when the total value stored in the storage means is less than the predetermined value based on the determination that the hit / fail determination information having a predetermined result is stored in the hit / miss determination information storage means by the prior signal, a specific effect is produced. Is displayed on the display means by the specific effect means. As a result, the player can expect a predetermined result by the specific effect. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be played with the expectation that a more specific effect will be displayed.

The gaming machine B3 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine B1 or B2, the specific effect is displayed over a period in which a plurality of hit / fail determination results are shown.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B1 or B2, a specific effect is displayed over a period in which the winning / failing judgment result of a plurality of times is shown. Can be easily discriminated as one hit / fail judgment result, and there is an effect that a fresh effect can be provided.

A gaming machine B4, wherein in any of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the specific effect is displayed with a display time corresponding to a total value stored in the storage means.

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines B1 to B3, a specific effect is displayed at a display time corresponding to the total value stored in the storage means, so that the player is stored in the storage means. There is an effect that the total value of the remaining period of the valid period can be recognized.

<Characteristic C group>
The main control means for executing the control of the game and the sub-control means for executing the control of the game according to the control signal from the main control means, and the main control means is based on the establishment of the starting condition, and the game is played. It has a winning / failing determination means for executing the winning / failing determination, and a privileged game executing means for executing a privileged game that is advantageous to the player based on the winning / failing determination result being a predetermined result. The means are an operation means that can be operated by the player, an acquisition means that acquires lottery information based on the operation of the operation means, and a determination means that executes a determination based on the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means. , The display means for displaying the operation effect display mode when the determination means determines a predetermined result, the period setting means for setting the valid period for enabling the operation of the operation means, and the operation means are operated. , The specific effect of displaying a specific effect on the display means based on the storage means for storing the elapsed period of the valid period when the predetermined result is determined and the total value of the elapsed period stored in the storage means. A gaming machine C1 characterized by having a directing means.

According to the gaming machine C1, in the main control means, the winning / failing determination of the game is executed by the winning / failing determination means based on the establishment of the starting condition. Based on the hit / fail determination result being a predetermined result, the privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game execution means. In the slave control means, lottery information is acquired by the acquisition means based on the operation of the operation means that can be operated by the player. The determination is executed by the determination means based on the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means. When a predetermined result is determined by the determination means, the operation effect display mode is displayed on the display means. The validity period for enabling the operation of the operating means is set by the period setting means. When the operating means is operated and a predetermined result is determined, the elapsed period of the valid period is stored in the storage means. Based on the total value of the elapsed period stored in the storage means, the specific effect is displayed on the display means by the specific effect means. As a result, when the validity period is set, the player can give a privilege by operating the operating means at an earlier timing to obtain a predetermined result. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested by operating the operation means, and there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets tired of the game at an early stage.

<Feature D group>
The main control means for executing the control of the game and the sub-control means for executing the control of the game according to the control signal from the main control means, and the main control means has the game based on the establishment of the starting condition. It has a winning / failing determination means for executing the winning / failing determination, and a privileged game executing means for executing a privileged game that is advantageous to the player based on the result of the winning / failing determination. The means is a display means in which a selection display mode for displaying a plurality of selection candidates that can be selected by the player is displayed, an operation means that can be operated by the player, and the operation means based on the operation in the selection display mode. The selection means for selecting at least one of the displayed selection candidates, the period setting means for setting the valid period for enabling the operation of the operation means, and the operation means are operated, and the selection candidate is selected. In this case, the discriminating means for discriminating the elapsed period of the set valid period, and the display means even after the selection candidate is selected when the discriminating means determines that the elapsed period is equal to or less than a predetermined period. The gaming machine D1 is characterized in that it has at least a history display means for displaying selection candidates other than the selection candidates selected in the selection means, which is displayed in the selection display mode.

According to the gaming machine D1, in the main control means, the winning / failing determination of the game is executed by the winning / failing determination means based on the establishment of the starting condition. Based on the hit / fail determination result being a predetermined result, the privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game execution means. In the slave control means, the display means displays a selection display mode in which a plurality of selection candidates that can be selected by the player are displayed. At least one of the selection candidates displayed in the selection display mode is displayed by the selection means based on the operation on the operation means that can be operated by the player. The validity period for enabling the operation of the operating means is set by the period setting means. When the operating means is operated and a selection candidate is selected, the elapsed period of the set valid period is determined by the determining means. When it is determined by the determination means that the elapsed period is less than or equal to a predetermined period, even after the selection candidate is selected, the selection candidate selected by at least the selection means among those displayed in the selection display mode on the display means. Selection candidates other than are displayed by the history display means. As a result, even when the operating means is operated in a short time after the selection display mode is displayed and it becomes difficult for the player to determine what the selection candidate was, the selection candidate can be confirmed. Therefore, it is possible for the player to play the game in an easy-to-understand manner, and there is an effect that the problem of getting bored with the game at an early stage can be suppressed.

<Feature E group>
The main control means for executing the control of the game and the sub-control means for executing the control of the game according to the control signal from the main control means, and the main control means has the game based on the establishment of the starting condition. It has a winning / failing determination means for executing the winning / failing determination, and a privileged game executing means for executing a privileged game that is advantageous to the player based on the result of the winning / failing determination. The means is a period setting means for setting a valid period in which the operation of the operating means is determined to be valid, and a period setting thereof, over a period during which the game to be determined by the winning / failing determining means is executed a predetermined number of times. When the validity period is set by the means, the counting means for counting the number of times the operating means is operated and the number of times the counting means counts are equal to or more than a predetermined predetermined number of times. A gaming machine E1 characterized by having a gaming information giving means for giving specific gaming information to the player.

According to the gaming machine E1, in the main control means, the winning / failing determination of the game is executed by the winning / failing determination means based on the establishment of the starting condition. Based on the hit / fail determination result being a predetermined result, the privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game execution means. In the slave control means, the validity period in which the operation of the operation means is determined to be valid is set by the period setting means over the period during which the game to be determined by the hit / fail determination means is executed a predetermined number of times. When the valid period is set by the period setting means, the number of times the operating means is operated is counted by the counting means. Based on the number of times the counting means counts becomes a predetermined number of times or more, specific game information is given to the player by the game information giving means. As a result, even when the player does not obtain a determination result of a privileged game for a predetermined number of times, specific game information is given by continuously operating the operating means, and the game can be enjoyed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets tired of the game at an early stage.

In the gaming machine E1, the slave control means has an acquisition means for acquiring lottery information based on an operation by the operation means, and a lottery information determination means for determining the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means. When the lottery information determining means determines that the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means is a specific result based on the number of times the game information giving means is equal to or more than the predetermined number of times, the game information giving means said. A gaming machine E2 characterized in that specific gaming information is given to a player.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in the slave control means, the lottery information is acquired by the acquisition means based on the operation by the operation means. The lottery information acquired by the acquisition means is determined by the lottery information determination means. When the lottery information determining means determines that the lottery information acquired by the acquiring means is a specific result based on the number of times exceeding a predetermined number, the specific game information is given by the game information giving means. Granted to the player. As a result, the specific game information may not be given even when the operating means is operated more than a predetermined number of times, and the timing at which the specific game information is given can be randomized. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can provide a fresh game.

In the gaming machine E1 or the gaming machine E2, the counting value by the counting means is less than a predetermined number of times, based on the fact that the game information giving means is determined to be a specific result by the hit / fail determination result. The gaming machine E3 is also characterized in that the specific gaming information is given.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E1 or the gaming machine E2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, based on the determination of a specific result based on the result of the hit / fail determination, specific game information is given by the game information giving means even if the count value by the counting means is less than a predetermined number of times. Therefore, there is an effect that the timing at which specific game information is given can be made more random, and a novel impression can be given to the player.

In any of the game machines E1 to E3, the main control means acquires by the acquisition means for acquiring the pass / fail determination information in which the pass / fail determination is executed by the pass / fail determination means based on the establishment of the acquisition condition, and the acquisition means thereof. A hit / fail determination information storage means for storing the hit / miss determination information, a pre-hit / fail determination means for determining the hit / fail judgment information stored in the hit / miss judgment information storage means before the start condition is satisfied, and a prior The game information giving means has a pre-signal generating means for generating a pre-signal for notifying the sub-control means of the hit / fail determination result by the hit / fail determination means, and the game information giving means stores the hit / fail determination information by the prior signal. Based on the determination that the means has stored the hit / miss determination information having a predetermined result, the specific game information is given even if the count value by the counting means is less than the predetermined number of times. A game machine E4 characterized by being there.

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines E1 to the gaming machine E3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in the main control means, the hit / fail determination information in which the hit / miss determination is executed by the hit / miss determination means is acquired by the acquisition means based on the establishment of the acquisition condition. The hit / fail determination information acquired by the acquisition means is stored in the hit / miss determination information storage means. The hit / fail judgment information stored in the hit / miss judgment information storage means is judged to be hit / miss before the start condition is satisfied by the advance hit / miss judgment means. A prior signal for notifying the slave control means of the result of the hit / fail determination by the prior hit / fail determination means is generated by the advance signal generation means. Even if the count value by the counting means is less than a predetermined number of times, the specific game information is based on the determination that the hit / fail determination information having a predetermined result is stored in the hit / miss determination information storage means by the advance signal. Is given by the game information giving means. As a result, the player can expect a predetermined result based on the specific game information. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be played with the expectation that more specific game information will be displayed.

<Characteristic F group>
It has a main control means for executing game control and a subordinate control means for executing game control according to a control signal from the main control means, and the main control means is drawn based on the establishment of a start condition. The acquisition means for acquiring the information, the success / failure determination execution means for executing the winning / failing determination based on the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means based on the establishment of the lottery condition, and the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means are stored. The storage means to be used, the pre-win / fail determination means for determining the winning / failing of the lottery information stored in the storage means before the lottery condition is satisfied, and the determination result by the prior hit / fail determination means are notified to the slave control means. The sub-control means has a pre-signal generating means for generating a pre-signal for the purpose, and the sub-control means displays identification information indicating a hit / fail determination result by the hit / miss determination means based on a control signal from the main control means. Based on the display means, the dynamic display mode determining means for determining the dynamic display mode of the identification information, and the prior signal, the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determining means is determined in advance. A pre-determination means for determining the time until the hit / fail determination result of the identification information corresponding to the lottery information stored in the storage means is displayed based on the determination result by the pre-determination means. , The operating means that can be operated by the player and the valid period for which the operation by the operating means is determined to be valid are straddled over the period during which the hit / fail determination result is displayed a plurality of times within the time determined by the time determining means. A game machine F1 having a period setting means for setting.

According to the gaming machine F1, in the main control means, lottery information is acquired by the acquisition means based on the establishment of the starting condition. Based on the establishment of the lottery condition, the winning / failing determination is executed by the winning / failing determination executing means based on the lottery information acquired by the acquiring means. The lottery information acquired by the acquisition means is stored in the storage means. The lottery information stored in the storage means is determined to be successful or not before the lottery condition is satisfied by the advance winning / failing determination means. A prior signal for notifying the slave control means of the determination result by the prior hit / fail determination means is generated by the prior signal generation means. In the slave control means, identification information indicating the result of the hit / miss determination by the hit / miss determination means is displayed by the display means based on the control signal from the main control means. The dynamic display mode of the identification information is determined by the dynamic display mode determining means. Based on the prior signal, the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determining means is preliminarily determined by the pre-determining means. Based on the determination result by the prior determination means, the time until the hit / fail determination result of the identification information corresponding to the lottery information stored in the storage means is displayed is determined by the time determination means. The validity period for which the operation by the operation means that can be operated by the player is determined to be valid is set by the period setting means over the period in which the hit / fail judgment result is displayed a plurality of times within the time determined by the time determination means. ..

As a result, the validity period is set across the dynamic display mode in which the result of the hit / fail judgment is displayed a plurality of times, so that a more novel effect can be provided to the player. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the gaming machine at an early stage.

<Characteristic G group>
The main control means for executing the control of the game and the sub-control means for executing the control of the game according to the control signal from the main control means, and the main control means is based on the establishment of the starting condition, and the game is played. It has a winning / failing determination means for executing the winning / failing determination of the above, and a privileged game executing means for executing a privileged game that is advantageous to the player based on the result of the winning / failing determination. The means are an operating means that can be operated by the player, a period setting means for setting an effective period for validating the operation of the operating means, and a length of the effective period set by the period setting means depending on the size of the display area. The identification symbol display means for displaying the identification symbol indicating the value, the variable means for varying the size of the display area of the identification symbol so that the remaining valid period can be identified based on the passage of time, and the above-mentioned Based on the operation means being operated within the valid period, the game information giving means for giving game information to the player and the game information given by the game information giving means are determined from a plurality of game information. A storage means in which at least the first game information and the second game information different from the first game information are stored as the game information determined by the game information determining means to be performed and the given information determining means, and the valid period. Of the information period setting means for setting the first period in which the first game information is easily selected and the second period in which the second game information is easily selected, and the second period set by the information period setting means. The gaming machine G1 is characterized by having an identification information giving means for giving identification information that can be identified from the size of the display area of the identification symbol within the period.

According to the gaming machine G1, in the main control means, the winning / failing determination of the game is executed by the winning / failing determination means based on the establishment of the starting condition. Based on the hit / fail determination result being a predetermined result, the privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game execution means. In the slave control means, the validity period for enabling the operation of the operation means that can be operated by the player is set by the period setting means. An identification symbol indicating the length of the valid period set by the period setting means according to the size of the display area is displayed by the identification symbol display means. Based on the passage of time, the size of the display area of the identification symbol is changed by the variable means so that the remaining validity period can be identified. Game information is given to the player by the game information giving means based on the fact that the operating means is operated within the valid period. The game information given by the game information giving means is determined by the game information determining means from among a plurality of game information. As the game information determined by the given information determining means, at least the first game information and the second game information different from the first game information are stored by the storage means. Of the valid periods, the first period in which the first game information is easily selected and the second period in which the second game information is easily selected are set by the information period setting means. Identification information that can be identified from the size of the display area of the identification symbol within the second period set by the information period setting means is given by the identification information giving means. As a result, it is possible to notify that different game information can be easily obtained depending on the timing at which the player operates the operating means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can enjoy the game using the operation means more, and the problem that the player gets tired of the game at an early stage can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine G1, the slave control means provides an enlarged display means for displaying the second period identification information in a larger size than usual, based on the determination by the hit / fail determination means that the result is a predetermined result. A gaming machine D2 characterized by having.

According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G1, in the slave control means, the second period identification information is usually displayed by the enlarged display means based on the determination by the hit / fail determination means that the result is a predetermined result. Since the display is enlarged compared to the time, there is an effect that the player can expect the hit / fail determination result to be a predetermined result by expanding the second period identification information.

In the gaming machines G1 or G2, the identification information giving means is characterized in that when a predetermined lottery is executed and it is determined that the granting condition is satisfied, the identification information for the second period is given. Game machine G3.

According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G1 or G2, when it is determined that the granting condition is satisfied by executing a predetermined lottery, the second period identification information is given by the identification information giving means. Therefore, it is possible to randomly set the case where the second period information is given, and there is an effect that the player can be provided with a fresh game.

<Characteristic H group>
The main control means for executing the control of the game and the sub-control means for executing the control of the game according to the control signal from the main control means, and the main control means has the game based on the establishment of the starting condition. It has a winning / failing determination means for executing the winning / failing determination, and a privileged game executing means for executing a privileged game that is advantageous to the player based on the result of the winning / failing determination. The means has a display means for displaying identification information indicating a determination result by the hit / miss determination means according to a control signal from the main control means, and a plurality of dynamic display modes of the identification information displayed on the display means. A predetermined dynamic display mode is determined by the dynamic display mode determining means for determining one dynamic display mode from the display modes, the operating means that can be operated by the player, and the dynamic display mode determining means. Based on the above, based on the period setting means for setting the valid period for enabling the operation of the operating means and the operation of the operating means within the valid period set by the period setting means. It has an operation display means for displaying the operation display mode on the display means, and the period setting means is set before the first valid period in which the operation display mode is displayed and the first valid period. It is intended to set at least the second valid period, and to have a prohibiting means for prohibiting the setting of the first valid period or the setting of the operation display mode within the second valid period. Characteristic gaming machine H1.

According to the gaming machine H1, in the main control means, the winning / failing determination of the game is executed by the winning / failing determination means based on the establishment of the starting condition. Based on the hit / fail determination result being a predetermined result, the privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game execution means. In the slave control means, the identification information indicating the determination result by the hit / miss determination means is displayed on the display means according to the control signal from the main control means. The dynamic display mode of the identification information displayed on the display means is determined by the dynamic display mode determining means from among a plurality of dynamic display modes. Based on the determination of the predetermined dynamic display mode by the dynamic display mode determining means, the period setting means sets the valid period for enabling the operation of the operating means. Based on the operation of the operation means within the valid period set by the period setting means, the operation display mode is displayed on the display means by the operation display means. The first valid period in which the operation display mode is displayed and the second valid period set before the first valid period are at least set by the period setting means. Within the second valid period, the setting of the first valid period is prohibited or the setting of the operation display mode is prohibited by the prohibiting means. As a result, the setting of the first validity period or the setting of the operation display mode is prohibited, so that various games can be provided to the player. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets tired of the game at an early stage.

In the gaming machine H1, the prohibited means prohibits the setting of the first valid period or prohibits the setting of the operation display mode when a predetermined operation is executed by the operating means within the second valid period. The gaming machine H2, which is characterized in that it is to be played.

According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine H1, when a predetermined operation is executed by the operating means within the second valid period, the setting of the first valid period is prohibited or the operation display mode is set. Is prohibited by the prohibited means, so that the player can set the prohibition by operating the operating means, and there is an effect that the prohibition can be set according to the player's preference.

In the gaming machine H1 or H2, the display means displays the privilege game display mode when the privilege game is executed, and the operation display mode is displayed as the privilege game display mode. A gaming machine H3 characterized by being present.

According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines H1 or H2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the privilege game is executed, the privilege game display mode is displayed by the display means. The operation display mode is displayed as the privilege game display mode. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored during the privilege game.

In the gaming machine H3, the privilege game display mode is composed of at least a privilege game start display mode indicating the start of the privilege game and a privilege game in-game display mode indicating that the privilege game is being executed, and the period setting means. Is characterized in that the second valid period is set during the period when the privilege game start display mode is displayed, and the first valid period is set during the period when the privilege game start display mode is displayed. Game machine H4 to play.

According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, at least the privilege game display mode is configured by the privilege game start display mode indicating the start of the privilege game and the privilege game in-game display mode indicating that the privilege game is being executed. The second valid period is set by the period setting means during the period when the privilege game start display mode is displayed. In addition, the first valid period is set by the period setting means during the period in which the display mode during the privilege game is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to set whether to set prohibition at the start of the privilege game, and there is an effect that the game can be concentrated on the subsequent privilege game.

<Feature I group>
A winning / failing determination means for executing a winning / failing determination based on the establishment of the lottery condition, a first display means capable of displaying identification information indicating the winning / failing determination result of the winning / failing determination means, and an identification displayed on the first display means. A dynamic display mode determining means for determining a dynamic display mode of information, a rotating body configured to be rotatable, a detecting means capable of detecting the amount of rotation of the rotating body, and times detected by the detecting means. The first display control means for variably displaying the dynamic display mode based on the momentum, the second display means for visually arranging the display mode inside the rotating body, and the second display means for the second display means. 1 The gaming machine I1 characterized by having a second display control means for displaying a display mode related to the content displayed on the display means.

According to the gaming machine I1, the winning / failing determination is executed by the winning / failing determination means based on the establishment of the lottery condition. The identification information indicating the result of the hit / miss determination of the hit / miss determination means is displayed by the first display means. The dynamic display mode of the identification information displayed on the first display means is determined by the dynamic display mode determining means. The amount of rotation of the rotatably configured rotating body is detected by the detecting means. The dynamic display mode is variably displayed by the first display control means based on the amount of rotation detected by the detection means. The display mode related to the content displayed on the first display means is displayed on the second display means visibly arranged inside the rotating body by the second display control means. As a result, the display mode related to the content displayed on the first display means is also displayed inside the rotating body, so that the content displayed on the first display means can be grasped even if the rotating body is distracted. Can be done. Therefore, there is an effect that a gaming machine that is easy for a player to play can be provided.

In the gaming machine I1, the second display means is a projection means that projects a display image from the outside of the rotating body toward the inside of the rotating body, and is visibly arranged inside the rotating body from the projection means. The gaming machine I2 is characterized by having a display unit on which a projected display image is displayed.

According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the display image is projected onto the second display means from the outside of the rotating body toward the inside of the rotating body by the projection means. It is visibly arranged inside the rotating body, and the display image projected from the projection means is displayed on the display unit. Therefore, there is an effect that the configuration arranged inside the rotating body can be reduced and the rotating body can be compactly configured.

In the gaming machine I2, the gaming machine I3 is characterized in that the display unit is formed of a spherical surface bulging upward.

According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I2, since the display unit is composed of a spherical surface bulging upward, the display image projected on the display unit can be made to appear more three-dimensional. effective.

<Characteristic J group>
A winning / failing determination means for executing a winning / failing determination based on the establishment of the lottery conditions, a first display means capable of displaying identification information indicating the winning / failing determination result of the winning / failing determination means, and an identification displayed on the identification information display means A dynamic display mode determining means for determining a dynamic display mode of information, a second display means different from the first display means, and a display surface of the second display means are visibly covered and pressed by a player. It is displayed on the first display means based on the cover body capable of performing the pressing operation, the detecting means capable of detecting that the cover body has been pressed, and the pressing operation detected by the detecting means. Based on the execution of the dynamic display of the identification information and the first display control means for varying the display mode, the press display mode in which the display mode can be changed by pressing the cover body is selected. Based on the pressing display mode selection means and the pressing display mode selecting means selecting the pressing display mode, the display mode relating to the dynamic display mode of the identification information displayed on the first display means is displayed in the second display. A gaming machine J1 having a second display control means that is also displayed on the means.

According to the gaming machine J1, the winning / failing determination is executed by the winning / failing determination means based on the establishment of the lottery conditions. The identification information indicating the result of the hit / miss determination of the hit / miss determination means is displayed by the first display means. The dynamic display mode of the identification information displayed on the identification information display means is determined by the dynamic display mode determining means. The detection means detects that the cover body, which covers the display surface of the second display means different from the first display means and can be pressed by the player, has been pressed. Based on the fact that the pressing operation is detected by the detection means, the display mode displayed on the first display means is changed by the first display control means. Based on the execution of the dynamic display of the identification information, the pressing display mode in which the display mode is changed by pressing the cover body is selected by the pressing display mode selecting means. Based on the fact that the pressed display mode is selected by the pressed display mode selecting means, the display mode relating to the dynamic display mode of the identification information displayed on the first display means is also changed to the second display means by the second display control means. Is displayed. As a result, when the player presses the button, the display mode related to the display mode displayed on the first display means is displayed on the second display means, so that even if the line of sight is moved to the cover body, the first display mode is displayed. It is possible to suppress a problem that the display content displayed on the display means is overlooked and it becomes difficult to play the game. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can play the game more easily.

<Characteristic K group>
A display means capable of detecting that the player has touched the display surface, a cover body that visually covers the display surface of the display means and can be pressed by the player, and the display always described above. When the display surface of the means and the cover body are urged to a first position maintained at a predetermined interval and the cover body is pressed, the display surface of the display means and the cover body come close to each other. It is characterized by having an urging means that allows the cover body to move to the second position, and a determination means that determines that the player's touch operation is effective by moving the cover body to the second position. The game machine K1.

According to the gaming machine K1, the display means detects that the player has touched the display surface. Always, the display surface of the display means and the display surface of the display means are visibly covered, and the cover body that can be pressed by the player is urged to the first position maintained at a predetermined interval. By pressing the cover body, the urging means allows the display surface of the display means to move to a second position where the cover body approaches. When the cover body moves to the second position, the player's touch operation is determined to be effective by the determination means. As a result, even if the cover body is accidentally touched, the touch operation is not effective unless the cover body is in the second position, so that malfunction can be suppressed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can play the game more easily.

In the gaming machine K1, the second position is configured at a position where the cover body and the display surface of the display means come into contact with each other, and the cover body is electrically conductive when it comes into contact with the display surface of the display means. A gaming machine C2 characterized in that it is configured to be capable of playing.

According to the gaming machine K1, the position where the cover body and the display surface of the display means come into contact with each other is set to the second position. The cover body is configured to be electrically conductive when it comes into contact with the display surface of the display means. As a result, there is an effect that the touch operation can be accurately recognized even if the touch operation is performed through the cover body.

In the gaming machine K1 or K2, the second display control means is touch-operated between the specific two points, and the interval is changed by the touch operation so that the interval between the two points is opened or narrowed. The gaming machine K3 is characterized in that the image displayed on the second display means is enlarged or reduced and displayed based on the amount.

According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine K1 or K2, a touch operation is performed between two specific points, and the interval is touch-operated so that the interval between the two points is opened or narrowed. Since the image displayed on the second display means is enlarged or reduced by the second display control means based on the amount of change in the above, the display mode displayed by the player is set to an arbitrary size. It has the effect of making it easier to play.

The gaming machine Z1 is characterized in that each of the gaming machines is a pachinko gaming machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and the ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in a predetermined position in the game area. As a prerequisite for winning a prize (or passing through a winning opening), the identification information dynamically displayed by the display means may be fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable a ball to be won, and is valuable according to the number of winnings. Some are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written on a magnetic card).

The gaming machine Z2, wherein each of the gaming machines is a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of a slot machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming the identification information is provided for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to this, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and at the time of the stop. A gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, provided that the definite identification information of the above is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, and the like are typical examples of the game medium.

The gaming machine Z3 is characterized in that each of the gaming machines is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the fused gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The variation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player is provided on the condition that the definite identification information at the time of stopping is the specific identification information, the ball is used as the game medium, and the identification information is described. A game machine that requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of the game, and is configured to pay out a large number of balls when a special game state occurs. "
<Others>
Conventionally, there has been known a pachinko machine that draws a lottery when a game ball is won at the starting port and displays a variable effect or a big hit effect according to the lottery result on a liquid crystal screen. In such a production, various patterns of production such as a production to give the player a sense of expectation and a production to increase the player's motivation to participate in the game are executed to improve the interest of the game. .. Among these types of pachinko machines, a gaming machine is proposed in which the gaming machine is provided with an operating means (switch, etc.) that can be operated by the player, and the player operates the operating means to change the production of the game. Has been done.
In such a pachinko machine, for example, in order to execute various effects when the player operates the operating means, there is a machine that executes a lottery to change the effect of the game when the operating means is operated (for example). , Patent Document 1: Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-075741).
In this type of pachinko machine, there is a problem that the player becomes absorbed in operating the operating means and misses the displayed effect, which makes the game difficult.
The present technical idea is made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and aims to provide a gaming machine that is easy for a player to play.
<Means>
In order to achieve this purpose, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 has a display means capable of detecting that the player has touched the display surface, and the display surface of the display means is visually covered and pressed by the player. The cover body that can be operated, and the display surface of the display means and the cover body are always urged to a first position maintained at a predetermined interval, and the cover body is pressed. Then, the urging means that allows the display surface of the display means and the cover body to move to a second position close to each other, and the cover body moves to the second position, so that the player can perform a touch operation. It has a determination means for determining that is valid.
The gaming machine according to the technical idea 2 is the gaming machine according to the technical idea 1, wherein the second position is a position where the cover body and the display surface of the display means come into contact with each other, and the cover body is the same. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the gaming machine is configured to be electrically conductive when it comes into contact with the display surface of the display means.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 1, it is detected by the display means that the player touches the display surface. Always, the display surface of the display means and the display surface of the display means are visibly covered, and the cover body that can be pressed by the player is urged to the first position maintained at a predetermined interval. By pressing the cover body, the urging means allows the display surface of the display means to move to a second position where the cover body approaches. When the cover body moves to the second position, the player's touch operation is determined to be effective by the determination means.
As a result, even if the cover body is accidentally touched, the touch operation is not effective unless the cover body is in the second position, so that malfunction can be suppressed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can play the game more easily.
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 1. That is, the position where the cover body and the display surface of the display means come into contact with each other is set to the second position. The cover body is configured to be electrically conductive when it comes into contact with the display surface of the display means. Therefore, even if the touch operation is performed through the cover body, there is an effect that the touch operation can be accurately recognized.

10 Pachinko machine (game machine)
22 frame button (operation means)
81 third symbol display device (Viewing means)
110 Main controller (main control means)
113 voice lamp control device (an example of the slave control means)
223e counting means S305 winning / failing judgment means
S1004 privilege game execution means
S1404 Period setting means
S1607 Probability setting means, probability determination means
S1608 acquisition means
S1609 determination means

Claims (2)

A display means that can detect that the player has touched the display surface,
A cover body that visually covers the display surface of the display means and can be pressed by the player.
The display surface of the display means and the cover body are always urged to a first position maintained at a predetermined interval, and the cover body is pressed to push the display surface of the display means and the cover body. An urging means that allows the body to move to a second position closer to it,
A gaming machine characterized in that the cover body has a determination means for determining that the player's touch operation is effective by moving to the second position. The second position is configured at a position where the cover body and the display surface of the display means come into contact with each other.
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the cover body is configured to be electrically conductive when it comes into contact with the display surface of the display means.

Images